Class Notes

Building Construction
Question No. 01
Cast iron piles
(A) Are suitable for works under sea water
(B) Resist shocks or vibrations
(C) Are suitable for use as batter piles
(D) Are useful for heavy vertical loads
Answer: Option D
Question No. 02
The form work from the slabs excluding props, can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option B
Question No. 03
The process of filling hollow spaces of walls before plastering, is known
(A) Hacking
(B) Dubbing out
(C) Blistering
(D) Peeling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 04
The type of arch generally constructed over a wooden lintel or over a flat arch for the purpose of
carrying the load of the wall above is
(A) Segmental arch
(B) Pointed arch
(C) Relieving arch
(D) Flat arch
Answer: Option C
Question No. 05
The platform at the end of a series of steps, is known as
(A) Platform
(B) Relief
(C) Rest
(D) Landing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 06
The pile which supports the load due to friction between pile face and surrounding soil, is
generally known as
(A) Bearing pile
(B) Friction pile
(C) Sheet pile
(D) Battered pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 07
Pick up the correct statement from the following:
(A) A mortar joint having a concave finishing in brick masonry, is called keyed joint
(B) A mortar joint projecting beyond the face of a masonry wall, is called tucked joint
(C) A mortar joint having a recess in it, is called ruled joint
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 08
The type of roof which slopes in two directions with a break in the slope on each side is known as
(A) Gable roof
(B) Hip roof
(C) Gambrel roof
(D) Mansard roof
Answer: Option C
Question No. 09
The inclined surface of an abutment to receive the arch, is known as
(A) Skew back
(B) Soffit
(C) Spandril
(D) Haunch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 10
(A) D.P.C. should be continuous
(B) D.P.C. should be of good impervious material
(C) D.P.C. may be horizontal or vertical
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 11
A wall constructed with stones to protect slopes of cuttings in natural ground from the action of
weathering agents, is called
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option B
Question No. 12
Higher pitch of the roof
(i) Results in stronger roof
(ii) Results in weaker roof
(iii) Requires more covering material
(iv) Requires less covering material
The correct answer is
(A) (i) and (iii)
(B) (i) and (iv)
(C) (ii) and (iii)
(D) (ii) and (iv)
Answer: Option A
Question No. 13
For different layers of cement concrete floor. Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
(A) The lowest layer consists of consolidated ground
(B) A 10 cm thick clean sand is laid on consolidated ground
(C) A 10 cm lime concrete (1 : 4 : 8) is laid on clean sand
(D) A 10 cm thick cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is laid on top layer
Answer: Option D
Question No. 14
Open test pit is only suitable upto a depth of
(A) 2 metres
(B) 2.5 metres
(C) 3 metres
(D) None of the above
Answer: Option C
Question No. 15
The service area in a building means the area occupied by
(A) Stairs
(B) Toilets
(C) Light and shafts
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 16
The number of steps in a flight generally should not be less than
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 5
(D) No limit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 17
The columns of multi-storeyed buildings are designed to withstand the forces due to
(A) Dead loads
(B) Live loads
(C) Wind loads
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 18
In soils possessing low bearing capacity, the type of foundation generally provided, is
(A) Column footing
(B) Grillage footing
(C) Raft footing
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 19
The minimum strength of the mortar used in load bearing brick masonry, is
(A) 50 N/cm2
(B) 100 N/cm2
(C) 150 N/cm2
(D) 200 N/cm2
Answer: Option B
Question No. 20
As compared to stretcher course, the thickness of joints in header course should be
(A) Less
(B) More
(C) Equal
(D) Equal or more
Answer: Option A
Question No. 21
To obtain good bonding in brick masonry
(A) First class bricks are used
(B) Vertical joints in alternate courses are kept in plumb line
(C) Bats are used where necessary
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 22
The type of pointing in which upper side of mortar joints is kept about 12 mm inside the face of
the masonry and bottom is kept flushed with face of wall, is
(A) Truck pointing
(B) Recessed pointing
(C) Struck pointing
(D) Grooved pointing
Answer: Option C
Question No. 23
The wedge shaped bricks forming an arch ring, are called
(A) Soffits
(B) Voussoirs
(C) Haunches
(D) Spandrils
Answer: Option B
Question No. 24
The maximum total settlement for isolated foundations on clayey soils should be limited to
(A) 25 mm
(B) 40 mm
(C) 65 mm
(D) 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 25
The foundation which consists of a thick reinforced cement slab covering whole area to support
heavy concentrated structural loads, is known as
(A) Combined footing
(B) Strap footing
(C) Raft footing
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 26
For each storey of a building, the depth of exploration should be
(A) 1 metre
(B) 2 metres
(C) 3 metres
(D) 4 metres
Answer: Option C
Question No. 27
(A) Plain cement concrete is equally strong in compression as well as in tension
(B) Slump test is performed to check concrete strength
(C) Curing of concrete is done for proper compaction of cement
(D) Fineness modulus is the index number expressing the relative sizes of both coarse and fine
aggregates
Answer: Option D
Question No. 28
The bearing capacity of a water logged soil can be improved by
(A) Compacting the soil
(B) Draining the soil
(C) Increasing the depth of foundation
(D) Grouting
Answer: Option B
Question No. 29
The position of a brick when laid on its side 9 cm × 9 cm with its frog in the vertical plane, is called
(A) Brick on edge
(B) Brick on end
(C) Brick on bed
(D) Brick held vertically
Answer: Option B
Question No. 30
A floor constructed with the 4 to 6 mm marble chips, is known
(A) Reinforced marble floor
(B) Terrazzo floor
(C) Marble floor
(D) Chip floor
Answer: Option B
Question No. 31
A stair should not have pitch more than
(A) 25°
(B) 30°
(C) 40°
(D) 50°
Answer: Option C
Question No. 32
Depth or height of the arch is the
(A) Perpendicular distance between intrados and extrados
(B) Vertical distance between springing line and intrados
(C) Perpendicular distance between springing line and extrados
Answer: Option A
Question No. 33
(A) The pile driven in sand is called sand pile
(B) The drilled hole filled with sand is called sand pile
(C) The sand piles are used for bearing purposes
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 34
A wall constructed to resist the pressure of an earth filling, is called
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option A
Question No. 35
Two columns 50 cm × 50 cm and 60 cm × 60 cm carry 80 tonnes and 120 tonnes of loads
respectively. The centre to centre distance between columns is 5.00 metres. The permissible
bearing capacity of the soil is 20 t/m2. If the footing is not to project more than 25 cm beyond the
outside of the smaller column, pick up the correct design parameters of the footing from the
following:
(A) Distance of C.G. of the loads from the smaller column = 3.00 m
(B) The length of the foundation slab = 7.00 m
(C) Area of footing slab = 11.00 m2
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 36
Pitched and sloping roofs are suitable for
(A) Coastal regions
(B) Plain regions
(C) Covering large areas
(D) All of the above
Answer: Option A
Question No. 37
A wooden block hinged on post outside a door, is known
(A) Cleat
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 38
If a is the offset of concrete bed in cms, and d is the depth of concrete bed in cms, then
(A) d = 0.445 a
(B) d = 0.557 a
(C) d = 0.775 a
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 39
In high mountainous region, the type of roof generally recommended for buildings, is
(A) Shed type
(B) Gable type
(C) Gambrel type
(D) Mansard type
Answer: Option C
Question No. 40
The function of cleats in a roof truss is
(A) To support the common rafter
(B) To support purlins
(C) To prevent the purlins from tilting
Answer: Option C
Question No. 41
The Auger borings are not common
(A) In soils that require lateral support
(B) In cohesive soils
(C) In soft soils
Answer: Option A
Question No. 42
The pile provided with one or more bulles in its vertical shaft, is generally known as
(A) Under-ream pile
(B) Friction pile
(C) Bearing pile
(D) Sheet pile
Answer: Option A
Question No. 43
(A) Isolated footing is provided under column to transfer the load safely to soil bed
(B) Column footings may have steps or projections in the concrete base
(C) Heavily loaded column base must be provided steel reinforcement in both directions
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 44
In any good staircase, the maximum and minimum pitch respectively should be
(A) 90° and 0°
(B) 75° and 30°
(C) 60° and 10°
(D) 40° and 25°
Answer: Option D
Question No. 45
Raft foundation are generally preferred to when the area required for individual footing, is more
than
(A) 25% to total area
(B) 30% of total area
(C) 40% to total area
(D) 50% of total area
Answer: Option D
Question No. 46
According to National Building Code, the hydrants in water mains is provided at minimum interval
of
(A) 50 m
(B) 60 m
(C) 75 m
(D) 90 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 47
The X-ray rooms are plastered with
(A) Plaster of Paris
(B) Barium plaster
(C) Martin's cement
(D) Keen's cement
Answer: Option B
Question No. 48
The type of footing which is used to transmit heavy loads through steel columns is
(A) Raft foundation
(B) Grillage foundation
(C) Well foundation
(D) Isolated footing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 49
Dutch bond is a modification of
(A) English bond
(B) Stretcher bond
(C) Header bond
(D) Single Flemish bond
Answer: Option A
Question No. 50
In clay soil
(A) Swelling and shrinkage characteristics prevail
(B) Consolidation continues even after several years of construction
(C) Differential settlement is generally prevalent
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 51
Which one of the following activities is not correct as applicable to brick corbels?
(A) The maximum projection of the corbel should not be more than the thickness of the wall
(B) The maximum projection of each corbel course should be limited to a quarter brick at a time
(C) The discontinuous corbels are used to carry heavy concentrated loads
(D) Stretcher bond is generally used for the construction of brick corbel
Answer: Option D
Question No. 52
In ordinary residential and public buildings, the damp proof course is generally provided at
(A) Ground level
(B) Plinth level
(C) Water table level
(D) Midway ground level and water-table level
Answer: Option B
Question No. 53
In which of the following pairs both trees yield soft wood?
(A) Deodar and Shishum
(B) Chir and sal
(C) Sal and teak
(D) Chir and deodar
Answer: Option D
Question No. 54
The raft slab is projected beyond the outer walls of the structure by
(A) 5 to 10 cm
(B) 15 to 20 cm
(C) 25 to 30 cm
(D) 30 to 45 cm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 55
In grillage foundations, distance between flanges of grillage beams, is kept
(A) 40 cm
(B) Equal to flange width
(C) Twice the flange width
(D) Maximum of (a), (b) and (c)
Answer: Option C
Question No. 56
The sill of a common wooden partition is
(A) Vertical wooden member on either end
(B) Lower horizontal wooden member
(C) Upper horizontal wooden member
(D) Intermediate horizontal wooden member
Answer: Option B
Question No. 57
The important test to be conducted on a stone used in docks and harbours is
(A) Hardness test
(B) Workability test
(C) Weight test
(D) Toughness test
Answer: Option C
Question No. 58
The member which is placed horizontally to support common rafter of a sloping roof, is
(A) Purlin
(B) Cleat
(C) Batten
(D) Strut
Answer: Option A
Question No. 59
A covering of concrete placed on the exposed top of an external wall, is known as
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option B
Question No. 60
The bond in which headers and stretchers are laid in alternate courses and every stretcher course
is started with a three fourth brick bat, is known as
(A) English cross bond
(B) Dutch bond
(C) Monk bond
(D) Rat-trap bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 61
The vertical distance between the springing line and highest point of the inner curve of an arch is
known as
(A) Intrados
(B) Rise
(C) Spandril
(D) Extrados
Answer: Option B
Question No. 62
The entrained concrete is used in lining walls and roofs for making
(A) Heat insulated
(B) Sound insulated
(C) Neither (a) nor (b)
(D) Both (a) and (b)
Answer: Option D
Question No. 63
The depth of concrete bed of the foundation depends upon
(A) The projection of the concrete block beyond the footing over it
(B) The upward soil pressure
(C) The mix of the concrete
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 64
A pre-stressed concrete pile is
(A) Easy to handle
(B) Lighter in weight
(C) Extremely durable
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 65
The type of joint commonly used at the junction of a principal rafter and tie beam in timber
trusses is
(A) Mortise and tenon joint
(B) Oblique mortise and tenon joint
(C) Butt joint
(D) Mitred joint
Answer: Option B
Question No. 66
During percussion drilling
(A) Ground water observations are hindered due to entry of the slurry in the soil below the
bottom of the hole
(B) Caving or mixing of strata are caused in soft soils or cohesionless soils
(C) The soil to a considerable depth below the bottom of the hole gets disturbed
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 67
The type of stone masonry in which stones of same height are laid in layers, is called
(A) Random rubble masonry
(B) Course rubble masonry
(C) Uncoursed rubble masonry
(D) Ashlar masonry
Answer: Option B
Question No. 68
A wooden block fixed on back side of a door frame on its post, is known as
(A) Cleat
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 69
In a colar beam roof
(A) There is no horizontal tie beam
(B) There is a horizontal tie at the feet of rafters only
(C) There is a horizontal tie at almost the middle of rafters only
(D) There are two horizontal ties, one at the feet and other at the middle of the rafters
Answer: Option C
Question No. 70
The piece of a brick cut with its one corner equivalent to half the length and half the width of a full
brick, is known as
(A) Queen closer
(B) Bevelled closer
(C) King closer
(D) Half king closer
Answer: Option C
Question No. 71
For effective drainage, the finished surface of flat roof should have a minimum slope of
(A) 1 in 20
(B) 1 to 50
(C) 1 in 10
(D) 1 in 5
Answer: Option A
Question No. 72
Vertical construction joints are provided where the shearing forces are minimum in the case of
(A) Slabs
(B) Beams
(C) Girders
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 73
Single Flemish bond consists of
(A) Double Flemish bond facing and English bond backing in each course
(B) English bond facing and double Flemish bond backing in each course
(C) Stretcher bond facing and double Flemish bond backing in each course
(D) Double Flemish bond facing and header bond backing in each course
Answer: Option A
Question No. 74
The foundations are placed below ground level, to increase
(A) Strength
(B) Workability
(C) Stability of structure
(D) All the above
Answer: Option C
Question No. 75
The type of bond in a brick masonry containing alternate courses of stretchers and headers, is
called
(A) Flemish bond
(B) English bond
(C) Stretcher bond
(D) Header bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 76
The width of the hollow space between two walls of a cavity wall should not exceed
(A) 5 cm
(B) 7.5 cm
(C) 10 cm
(D) 15 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 77
The predominant constituent which is responsible for strength in granite is
(A) Quartz
(B) Felspar
(C) Mica
Answer: Option A
Question No. 78
To ensure that supporting area of an offset footing of a boundary wall is fully compressive, the
C.G. of load must act
(A) At the centre of the base
(B) Within the middle third of the base
(C) Within the middle fifth of the base
(D) Neither (a), (b) nor (c)
Answer: Option B
Question No. 79
The size of a floor tile commonly used, is
(A) 15 cm × 15 cm × 1.8 cm
(B) 20 cm × 20 cm × 2 cm
(C) 22.5 × 22.5 cm × 2.2 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 80
The art of bringing the floor to a true level surface by means of screeds, is called
(A) Topping
(B) Bedding
(C) Screeding
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 81
The type of roof suitable in plains where rainfall is meagre and temperature is high is
(A) Pitched and sloping roof
(B) Flat roof
(C) Shell roof
Answer: Option B
Question No. 82
For constructing a terrazzo floor, Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
(A) A base course is prepared as in cement concrete flooring
(B) A 32 mm thick layer of cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is laid on the base course and the surface
is made smooth by trowelling
(C) Glass strips are driven into the layer according to the pattern required
(D) After final grinding is over, oxalic acid mixed with water is spread over and rubbed hard with
soft material
Answer: Option B
Question No. 83
The arrangement made to support an unsafe structure temporarily, is known as
(A) Shoring
(B) Scaffolding
(C) Underpinning
(D) Jacking
Answer: Option A
Question No. 84
The type of pointing in which a V-shaped projection outside the wall surface, is provided, is called
(A) Recessed pointing
(B) Weather pointing
(C) V-pointing
(D) Tuck pointing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 85
Assertion A : Shishum is used for decorative woodwork.
Reason R : Shishum can be polished to an excellent finish.
Select your answer according to the coding system given below:
(A) Both A and R is true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R is true but R is not the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false but R is true
Answer: Option A
Question No. 86
Rotary drilling
(A) Is not suitable for deposits containing very coarse gravel
(B) Hinders the ground water observations and permeability test
(C) Is not economical for holes of less than 10 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 87
Safe bearing capacity of black cotton soil varies from
(A) 2 to 3 t/m2
(B) 5 to 7.5 t/m2
(C) 8 to 10 t/m2
(D) 10 to 12 t/m2
Answer: Option B
Question No. 88
The window which projects outside a room of a building for admitting more light and air, is known
(A) Bay window
(B) Casement window
(C) Lantern window
(D) Dormer window
Answer: Option A
Question No. 89
In the construction of arches, sand box method is used for
(A) Centring
(B) Actual laying of arch work
(C) Striking of centring
Answer: Option C
Question No. 90
In English garden wall bond
(A) One course of headers to three or five course of stretchers
(B) Queen closer in provided in each heading course
(C) The middle course of stretchers is started with a header to give proper vertical joints
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 91
The concrete slump recommended for foundations, is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 30 to 125 mm
(C) 50 to 100 mm
(D) 75 to 125 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 92
(A) In a king post truss, principal rafter and tie beams are jointed together with a bridle joint
(B) Joint between the principal rafter and the king post is made by making tenon and mortise
respectively
(C) Joint between strut and king post, is generally of mortise and tenon type
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 93
Sum of tread and rise must lie between
(A) 300 to 350 mm
(B) 400 to 450 mm
(C) 500 to 550 mm
(D) 600 to 650 mm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 94
In case of foundations on sandy soil, maximum permissible differential settlement, is usually
limited to
(A) 15 mm
(B) 25 mm
(C) 35 mm
(D) 45 mm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 95
In soft clay of low bearing capacity, the type of steel pile generally used, is
(A) H-pile
(B) Screw pile
(C) Disc pile
(D) Pipe pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 96
Gravels
(A) Are cohesionless aggregates
(B) Vary in size between 2 to 20 mm
(C) Never swell when they come into contact with water
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 97
The differential settlement in case of foundations on sandy soils should not exceed
(A) 25 mm
(B) 40 mm
(C) 65 mm
(D) 100 mm
Answer: Option A
Question No. 98
An arch constructed with finely dressed stones, is known
(A) Ashlar arch
(B) Rubble arch
(C) Gauged arch
(D) Axed arch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 99
(A) Lime mortar with cement in the ratio of in 10 is cheaper and better for outside plaster
(B) For very cold or very hot climate, a compact and closed plan should be provided
(C) On the sea coast, an exposed and open house is generally preferred
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 100

Weep holes are provided in retaining and breast walls
(A) To drain off the water from the filling
(B) To ventilate the stone masonry
(C) To add architectural beauty
(D) To increase compaction of the earth retained
Answer: Option A
Question No. 101

The radial splits which are wider on the outside of the log and narrower towards the pith are
known as
(A) Heart shakes
(B) Cupshakes
(C) Starshakes
(D) Rindgalls
Answer: Option C
Question No. 102

The angular steps used for changing direction of the stairs, are called
(A) Round steps
(B) Angular steps
(C) Winders
(D) Radial steps
Answer: Option C
Question No. 103
The concrete slump recommended for columns, is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 25 to 75 mm
(C) 75 to 125 mm
(D) 50 to 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 104

The minimum width of a stair in residential buildings, is
(A) 55 cm
(B) 70 cm
(C) 85 cm
(D) 100 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 105

The function of king post in a king post roof truss is
(A) To support the frame work of the roof
(B) To receive the ends of principal rafter
(C) To prevent the walls from spreading outward
(D) To prevent the tie beam from sagging at its centre
Answer: Option D
Question No. 106

The dimensions of a half queen closer, are
(A) 9 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
(B) 9 cm × 9 cm × 4.5 cm
(C) 9 cm × 4.5 cm × 9 cm
(D) 1.8 cm × 4.5 cm × 9 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 107

For plastering the exposed brick walls, the cement sand mortar should be
(A) 1 : 2
(B) 1 : 3
(C) 1 : 4
(D) 1 : 6
Answer: Option C
Question No. 108

The stone blocks approximately triangular in shape, used as steps, are known
(A) Stone steps
(B) Built up steps
(C) Spandril steps
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 109

As compared to English bond, double Flemish bond is
(A) Stronger
(B) More compact
(C) Costly
Answer: Option B
Question No. 110

(A) The cost of square rooms is less
(B) The expenditure on the foundation and roof for the double storeyed building is nearly half of
that for the ground storeyed building
(C) The cost of construction of a house may be minimised by restricting the height floors
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 111

In the method of tube boring of soil investigation, the following is essential:
(A) A tube of about 2 metres length and 20 cm diameter with a cutting edge
(B) A flap valve at the bottom of tube is provided to extract the soil sample
(C) The tube is raised and lowered by 4 thick rope moving over a pulley suspended on a tripod
stand
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 112

Slate
(A) Is a metamorphic rock
(B) Splits into thin sheets along its bedding planes
(C) Has a smooth surface and contains alumina and silica
(D) Possesses good water absorption capacity
Answer: Option A
Question No. 113

The minimum depth of foundation in clayey soils is
(A) 0.5 m
(B) 0.7 m
(C) 0.9 m
(D) 1.2 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 114
In case of Raymond pile
(A) Lengths vary from 6 m to 12 m
(B) Diameter of top of piles varies from 40 cm to 60 cm
(C) Diameter of pile at bottom varies from 20 cm to 28 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 115

Herringbone bond is used for
(A) Walls having thickness more than 4 bricks
(B) Architectural finish to the face work
(C) Ornamental panels in brick flooring
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 116

Suitable spacing of timber piles, is
(A) 50 cm
(B) 60 cm
(C) 80 cm
(D) 90 cm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 117

The disease of dry rot in timber is caused by
(A) Lack of ventilation
(B) Alternate wet and dry conditions
(C) Complete submergence in water
Answer: Option A
Question No. 118

(A) Louvered door is generally provided in bath rooms
(B) Flush door is generally provided in dining room
(C) Revolving door is generally provided in cinema halls
(D) Sliding door is generally provided in show rooms
Answer: Option C
Question No. 119

The minimum distance between the centres of bulb of diameter du, of a multi under reamed piles,
is
(A) du
(B) 1.25 du
(C) 1.5 du
(D) 1.75 du
Answer: Option C
Question No. 120

The stone masonry of finely dressed stones laid in cement or lime, is
(B) Coursed rubble masonry
(C) Dry rubble masonry
(D) Ashlar masonry
Answer: Option D
Question No. 121

The vertical posts placed at the top and bottom ends of a flight supporting the hand rail are known
as
(A) Balusters
(B) Newel posts
(C) Balustrades
(D) Railings
Answer: Option B
Question No. 122

Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
(A) The function of foundation is to distribute the load of super structure over a large bearing
area
(B) No timbering is required for shallow trenches
(C) Shallow foundations can be constructed on made-up soil
(D) Black cotton soil is very good for foundation bed
Answer: Option D
Question No. 123

For the construction of flyovers in sandy soils, the type of foundation provided, is
(A) Strap footing
(B) Raft footing
(C) Combined footing
(D) Pier footing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 124

For a rectangular foundation of width b, eccentricity of load should not exceed
(A) b/2
(B) b/3
(C) b/4
(D) b/6
Answer: Option D
Question No. 125
The type of pile which is driven at an inclination to resist inclined forces is known as
(A) Friction pile
(B) Sheet pile
(C) Batter pile
(D) Anchor pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 126

The maximum bearing capacity of soil is that of
(A) Black cotton soil
(B) Loose fine sandy soil
(C) Dry coarse sandy soil
(D) Hard rocks
Answer: Option D
Question No. 127

(A) Cavity of a cavity wall should start near ground level
(B) Cavity of a cavity wall should terminate near eaves level of sloping roof
(C) Cavity of a cavity wall should terminate near coping of flat roof with parapet wall
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 128

The thickness of a reinforced brick partition wall, is generally kept
(A) 5 cm
(B) 10 cm
(C) 15 cm
(D) 20 cm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 129

The term string is used for
(A) The underside of a stair
(B) Outer projecting edge of a tread
(C) A sloping member which supports the steps in a stair
(D) A vertical member between two treads
Answer: Option C
Question No. 130

The 19 cm × 9 cm side of a brick as seen in the wall face, is generally known as
(A) Stretcher
(B) Face
(C) Front
(D) Header
Answer: Option A
Question No. 131

The steel pile which is generally sunk in soft clay or loose sand of low bearing capacity, is
(A) H-pile
(B) Pipe pile
(C) Screw pile
(D) Disc pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 132

Pick up the correct statement about silt soil from the following:
(A) The silt soil has particle size from 0.02 mm to 0.06 mm
(B) In organic fine grained silt soil possesses no plasticity
(C) The least plastic type normally consists of more or less equidimensional grains of quartz
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 133

The type of flooring suitable for use in churches, theatres, public libraries and other places where
noiseless floor covering is desired is
(A) Cork flooring
(B) Glass flooring
(C) Wooden flooring
(D) Linoleum flooring
Answer: Option A
Question No. 134

The angle between skew back of a flat arch and the horizontal, is kept approximately equal to
(A) 0°
(B) 30°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°
Answer: Option C
Question No. 135

(A) The sand in the sand pile is well compacted
(B) The sand is kept moist at the time of placing and tamping
(C) Sand piles are generally used under column loads
Answer: Option D
Question No. 136
(A) A combined footing is so proportioned that centre of gravity of supporting area coincides
with centre of gravity of two column loads
(B) A combined footing may be either rectangular or trapezoidal in shape
(C) Trapezoidal shaped footings may be provided under any loading
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 137

Minimum width of landing should be
(A) Equal to width of stairs
(B) Half the width of stairs
(C) Twice the width of stairs
(D) One fourth the width of stairs
Answer: Option A
Question No. 138

For a wall carrying heavy load on low bearing capacity soil,
(A) Lean concrete bed is provided
(B) Thick concrete bed is provided
(C) Reinforced concrete bed is provided
(D) Both (a) and (c) of the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 139

While investigating the site, a thick layer of fairly firm clay over a deep layer of soft clay is
encountered. In such a situation, the following type of foundation is useful:
(A) Pile formation
(B) Raft foundation
(C) Grillage foundation
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 140

The type of arch used for high class buildings where appearance is of prime importance, is known
as
(A) Ashlar arch
(B) Rubble arch
(C) Gauged brick arch
(D) Axed brick arch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 141

Mansard roof is a roof which slopes in
(A) Two directions without break in the slope on each side
(B) Two directions with break in the slope on each side
(C) Four directions without break in the slope on each side
(D) Four directions with break in the slope on each side
Answer: Option D
Question No. 142

If is the angle of repose of soil of weight w kg/m3, the horizontal pressure p at a depth
of h metres per metre length of wall, is
(A) wh × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]
(B) (wh/2) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]
(C) wh - sin )/(1 + )]
(D) wh )/(1 - )]
Answer: Option A
Question No. 143

Pick up the correct specification of one-room quarters generally adopted from the following:
(A) Six quarters in a row
(B) The size of room is either 3.5 m × 3 m or 4.2 m × 2.5 m
(C) The front verandah is kept 2 m wide
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 144

The piece of a brick cut along the centre of width in such a way that its length is equal to that of
full brick, is called
(A) Half brick
(B) Queen closer
(C) King closer
(D) Bevelled closer
Answer: Option B
Question No. 145

Number of vertical joints in a stretcher course is x times the number of joints in the header course,
where x is equal to
(A) 1/2
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 1/4
Answer: Option A
Question No. 146

The process of keeping concrete moist for a certain period after its finishing, is known as
(A) Finishing of concrete
(B) Curing of concrete
(C) Placing of concrete
(D) Compaction of concrete
Answer: Option B
Question No. 147

The inner section of a cavity wall, is generally known as
(A) Buttress
(B) Leaf wall
(C) Pilaster
(D) Pillar
Answer: Option B
Question No. 148

(A) Sand consists of coarse particles of silica formed due to the disintegration of rocks
(B) The grains of sand are not affected by frost
(C) Sand beds are permeable and do not allow water to rise up between pores due to capillary
action
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 149

The lintels are preferred to arches because
(A) Arches require more headroom to span the openings like doors, windows etc.
(B) Arches require strong abutments to withstand arch thrust
(C) Arches are difficult in construction
Answer: Option D
Question No. 150

Cavity wall is generally provided for
(A) Heat insulation
(B) Sound insulation
(C) Prevention of dampness
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 151

The construction joints in buildings are provided after
(A) 10 m
(B) 15 m
(C) 20 m
(D) 40 m
Answer: Option D
Question No. 152
A pointed arch which forms isosceles or equilateral triangle, is generally known as
(A) Three centred arch
(B) Two centred arch
(C) Lancet arch
(D) Bull's eye arch
Answer: Option C
Question No. 153

In case of foundations on black cotton soils, the most suitable method to increase the bearing
capacity of soils is to
(A) Increase the depth of foundation
(B) Drain the soil
(C) Compact the soil
(D) Replace the poor soil
Answer: Option D
Question No. 154

Depth of lean concrete bed placed at the bottom of a wall footing, is kept
(A) 10 cm
(B) 15 cm
(C) Equal to its projection beyond wall base
(D) Less than its projection beyond wall base
Answer: Option C
Question No. 155

The sound which continues even after its source is cut off, is called
(A) Reverberation
(B) Echo
(C) Intensity of sound
(D) Interference
Answer: Option A
Question No. 156

(A) The bearing capacity of a pile is defined as the load which can be sustained by the pile
without producing excessive settlement
(B) The safe bearing capacity of a pile is obtained by dividing the ultimate bearing capacity with
a suitable factor of safety
(C) The factor of safety for piles is taken as 6
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 157

The maximum total settlement for raft foundation on clayey soils should be limited to
(A) 25 mm
(B) 25 to 40 mm
(C) 40 to 65 mm
(D) 65 to 100 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 158

Which one of the following rocks is used for monumental buildings?
(A) Granite
(B) Marble
(C) Sand stone
(D) Slate
Answer: Option B
Question No. 159

Pick up the consideration to the taken while designing a hospital from the following:
(A) The operation theatre unit to be detached as it requires sterilized zone but near the ward for
the patients and doctor
(B) The mortuary should be detached from the main circulation with a post-mortem room
(C) Casualty unit should be provided a separate entrance
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 160

The members which support covering material of a sloping roof, are
(A) Rafters
(B) Purlins
(C) Battens
(D) Struts
Answer: Option A
Question No. 161

The triangular space formed between the extrados and the horizontal line drawn through the
crown of an arch is known as
(A) Haunch
(B) Spandril
(C) Voussoirs
(D) Skewbacks
Answer: Option B
Question No. 162

For providing a raft foundation, the following activities are involved
1. Ramming the foundation bed
2. Excavation of the soil upto required depth
3. Laying the reinforcement over the foundation bed
4. Curing the cement concrete placed over reinforcement
5. Pouring the cement concrete over the reinforcement
The correct sequence is
(A) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
(B) 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
(C) 2, 1, 3, 5, 4
(D) 3, 2, 5, 1, 4
Answer: Option C
Question No. 163

The stone whose crushing strength is maximum, is
(A) Granite
(B) Chalk
(C) Slate
(D) Sand stone
Answer: Option A
Question No. 164

Brick nogging type of partition wall, is constructed by
(A) Laying bricks as stretchers in cement mortar
(B) Laying bricks as headers in cement mortar
(C) Reinforcing brick wall with iron straps
(D) Constructing brick work within a wooden framework
Answer: Option D
Question No. 165

Couple close roof is suitable for maximum span of
(A) 2.5 m
(B) 3.5 m
(C) 4.5 m
(D) 5.5 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 166

A solid core of rock is formed inside the cylinder in the case of
(A) Auger boring
(B) Percussion drilling
(C) Diamond drilling
(D) Wash boring
Answer: Option C
Question No. 167

The floor is rubbed with oxalic acid, for making its surface
(A) Free from voids
(B) Glossy
(C) Durable
(D) Uniform
Answer: Option B
Question No. 168

The line of intersection of two surfaces of a sloping roof forming an internal angle less than 180°, is
known as
(A) Ridge
(B) Hip
(C) Valley
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 169

In which of the following directions, the strength of timber is maximum?
(A) Parallel to grains
(B) 45° to grains
(C) Perpendicular to grains
(D) Same in all directions
Answer: Option A
Question No. 170

Arches in the form of masonry arcs struck from more than four centres, are called
(A) Two curved arches
(B) Gothic arches
(C) Ogee arches
(D) Drop gothic arches
Answer: Option C
Question No. 171

(A) Horizontal D.P.C. is provided at plinth level in internal walls
(B) D.P.C. is provided under door and verandah openings
(C) Vertical D.P.C. is not provided in internal walls
(D) Cement concrete is a rigid damp-proofing material
Answer: Option B
Question No. 172

The vertical faces of a door opening which support frame of the door, are
(A) Jambs
(B) Posts
(C) Reveals
(D) Styles
Answer: Option A
Question No. 173
The lower edge of the pitched roof, from where the rain water of the roof surface drops down, is
known as
(A) Hip
(B) Gable
(C) Ridge
(D) Eaves
Answer: Option D
Question No. 174

The arrangement of supporting an existing structure by providing supports underneath, is known
as
(A) Shoring
(B) Underpinning
(C) Jacking
(D) Piling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 175

(A) The first coat of stucco plaster is called scratch coat
(B) The second coat of stucco plaster is called brown coat
(C) The third coat of stucco plaster is called white coat
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 176

A concrete structure is set on fire and the temperature raises to 1000°C. The strength of concrete
as compared to original strength reduces to
(A) 10 %
(B) 15 %
(C) 20 %
(D) 25 %
Answer: Option C
Question No. 177

The horizontal timber piece provided at the apex of a roof truss which supports the common rafter
is called
(A) Ridge board
(B) Hip rafter
(C) Eaves board
(D) Valley rafter
Answer: Option A
Question No. 178

(A) In dog-legged stairs, no space between its flights is provided
(B) In open newel stair, a rectangular well is provided
(C) In geometric stair, a curved shaped well between forward and backward flights, is provided
(D) In geometrical stair, two quarter space landing is provided
Answer: Option D
Question No. 179

The maximum number of steps in a flight should generally be restricted to
(A) 10
(B) 12
(C) 15
(D) No limit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 180

In flat roof of reinforced cement concrete, the recommended angle of slope, is
(A) Zero
(B) A few degrees
(C) 10°
(D) 200°
Answer: Option B
Question No. 181

The process of working a flat for the finishing coat, is known
(A) Dubbing out
(B) Floating
(C) Knitting
(D) Blistering
Answer: Option B
Question No. 182

The highest line of sloping roof, where two opposite slopes meet, is known as
(A) Rafter
(B) Ridge
(C) Crown
(D) Eave
Answer: Option B
Question No. 183

The depth of the ground water table may be ascertained by
(A) Looking through the well in the vicinity
(B) Standing on the well in the vicinity
(C) Measuring the depth of water in the well
Answer: Option C
Question No. 184

Which of the following metal sheets is most effective in preventing dampness?
(A) Copper sheets
(B) Lead sheets
(C) Aluminium sheets
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 185

Under reamed piles are generally used for
(A) Machine foundations
(B) Factory building
(C) Tall structures
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 186

(A) The width of the wall is constructed thicker at the base in a stepped fashion
(B) A long vertical load transferring concrete structure is called a concrete pile
(C) In pile which transfers the load to the soil by the friction between the pile and the
surrounding soil is called friction pile
(D) The pile which transfers the load to a hard rock bed at certain depth is called load bearing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 187

Engineering news formula for obtaining safe bearing capacity of pile for drop hammer, is,
(A) Q = Wh/6 (S + 2.5)
(B) Q = Wh/2.5 (S + 6)
(C) Q = (W × 6)/h (S + 2.5)
(D) Q = (W × 2.5)/6 (S + h)
Answer: Option A
Question No. 188

The rock formed from the solidification of molten matter (magma) is called:
(A) Sedimentary rock
(B) Metamorphic rock
(C) Igneous rock
Answer: Option C
Question No. 189

The maximum permissible deflection of a timber beam supporting a roof, is
(A) L/100
(B) L/150
(C) L/260
(D) L/360
Answer: Option D
Question No. 190

Negative skin friction
(A) Is a downward drag acting on a pile due to downward movement of the surrounding
compressible soil relative to the pile
(B) Develops due to lowering of ground water
(C) Both (a) and (b)
(D) Neither (a) not (b)
Answer: Option C
Question No. 191

The ceiling height of a building is
(A) Between ceiling and ground level
(B) Between ceiling and floor level
(C) Upto roof above ground level
(D) Upto ceiling from the ground level
Answer: Option B
Question No. 192

The skirting/dado in a bath roof should be upto
(A) Ceiling
(B) 15 cm above floor level
(C) 200 cm
(D) Level of the tap
Answer: Option C
Question No. 193

The bearing capacity of piles is determined by
(A) Dynamic formula
(B) Static formula
(C) Pile load tests
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 194

The vertical sides of a door and window openings provided in a wall, are known as
(A) Verticals
(B) Reveals
(C) Jambs
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 195

The type of ashlar masonry in which stones are finely chisel dressed and thickness of joints does
not exceed 3 mm, is
(A) Chamfered ashlar masonry
(B) Ashlar facing masonry
(C) Random coursed ashlar masonry
(D) Coursed ashlar masonry
Answer: Option D
Question No. 196

The form Work including the props can be removed from beams, only after
(A) 3 day
(B) 7 days
(C) 14 days
(D) 21 days
Answer: Option C
Question No. 197

The mortar in which both cement and lime are used as binding materials, is called
(A) Cement mortar
(B) Lime mortar
(C) Fire resistant mortar
(D) Gauged mortar
Answer: Option D
Question No. 198

According to Rankine's formula, minimum depth of foundations, is
(A) (P/w) × [(1 + sin )/(1 - )]²
(B) (P/w) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]²
(C) (P/2w) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]²
(D) (P/w) × [(1 + sin )/(1 - )]
Answer: Option B
Question No. 199

To stagger vertical joints in successive courses of a wall, a piece of brick is generally used at the
end of the course, which is known as
(A) Bat
(B) Header
(C) Stretcher
(D) Closer
Answer: Option D
Question No. 200
The bearing capacity of granite is generally
(A) 5 to 10 kg/cm2
(B) 15 to 20 kg/cm2
(C) 30 to 35 kg/cm2
(D) 40 to 45 kg/cm2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 201

In grillage foundations a minimum 15 cm cover is provided on
(A) Upper flange of top tier
(B) Lower beam of lower tier
(C) Ends of external beams
(D) None to these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 202

Stability of an existing structure may be disturbed by
(A) Rising of water table
(B) Vibrations caused by traffic movements
(C) Mining in the neighbourhood
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 203

The Auger boring method is not suitable for
(A) Very hard soil
(B) Cemented soil
(C) Vary soft soil
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 204

Dampness causes
(A) Efflorescence
(B) Bleaching of paints
(C) Crumbling of plaster
(D) Growth of termites
Answer: Option D
Question No. 205

The pile which supports the load partly by friction and partly by resting on hard stratum, is called
(A) Friction pile
(B) Bearing pile
(C) Friction bearing pile
(D) Rough pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 206

An ordinary concrete may be made water proof by adding
(A) Pudlo
(B) Impermo
(C) Snowcem
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 207

The opening provided in sloping roof with its top parallel to the roof surface, is called
(A) Dormer window
(B) Sky light window
(C) Lantern window
(D) Louvered window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 208

(A) The roof slabs of multi-storeyed buildings are constructed monolithically to carry the various
floor loads
(B) The beams of multi-storeyed buildings rest on girders and are the main load transferring
members to the columns
(C) The slab is spanned across the secondary beams provided between the main beams
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 209

The window which is provided in flat roof of a room, is known
(A) Dormer window
(B) Lantern window
(C) Louvered window
(D) Sky window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 210

Grillage foundation
(A) Is used to transfer heavy structural loads from steel columns to a soil having low bearing
capacity
(B) Is light and economical
(C) Does not require deep cutting as the required base area with required pressure intensity is
obtained at a shallow depth
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 211

Pick up the correct statements from the following:
(A) Cracks appear on the plastered surface in the form of hair cracks
(B) In brick work, the efflorescence is removed by applying a solution of zinc sulphate and water
(C) Excessive thermal variations in the backing or plaster causes the plaster to fall
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 212

The window which is provided on a sloping roof of a building, is called
(A) Lantern window
(B) Dormer window
(C) Louvered window
(D) Rash window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 213

The single stage well point system of dewatering an excavation can be used if the depth of
excavation does not exceed
(A) 5 m
(B) 10 m
(C) 15 m
(D) 20 m
Answer: Option A
Question No. 214

The nominal thickness of one brick wall in mm, is
(A) 90 mm
(B) 150 mm
(C) 190 mm
(D) 200 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 215

(A) The retaining wall should be structurally capable to resist the applied earth pressure
(B) The section of the retaining wall should be so proportioned that it may not overturn by the
lateral pressure
(C) The retaining wall should be safe against sliding
(D) To drain off water from the earth retained, weep holes are provided near the top of the
retaining wall
Answer: Option D
Question No. 216
The stepped structure provided for lateral support of a structure, is
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option C
Question No. 217

Raft foundations are used for:
(A) Providing increased area of foundation over poor bearing capacity of soil
(B) Spanning over small soft or loose pockets
(C) Counter acting the hydrostatic effect
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 218

(A) In Flemish bond, headers and stretchers are laid alternately in the same course
(B) In Flemish bond every header in each course lies centrally over every stretcher of the
underlying course
(C) In English bond, stretchers are laid in every course
(D) In English bond, headers and stretchers are laid in alternate courses
Answer: Option C
Question No. 219

Stud(s) of a common wooden partition
(A) Are vertical wooden members
(B) Is the upper horizontal wooden member
(C) Is the lower horizontal wooden member
(D) Are the intermediate horizontal wooden members
Answer: Option A
Question No. 220

The additional piles which are driven to increase the capacity of supporting loads on vertical piles,
are known
(A) Construction piles
(B) Raking piles
(C) Eccentric piles
(D) Sinking piles
Answer: Option B
Question No. 221

Queen closer may be placed
(A) In header course
(B) In stretcher course
(C) In header course next to first brick
(D) In stretcher course next to first brick
Answer: Option C
Question No. 222

The bearing capacity of a water logged soil, may be improved by
(A) Grouting
(B) Chemical action
(C) Drainage
(D) Compaction
Answer: Option C
Question No. 223

The process of making the back ground rough, before plastering, is
(A) Dubbing
(B) Hacking
(C) Blistering
(D) Peeling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 224

Which one of the following piles has a cast iron shoe even after removal of the hollow cylindrical
steel casing?
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Pedestal pile
(C) Vibro pile
Answer: Option D
Question No. 225

While designing a stair, the product of rise and going is approximately kept equal to
(A) 350
(B) 420
(C) 450
(D) 500
Answer: Option B
Question No. 226

Nogging of a common wooden partition is
(A) Upper horizontal wooden member
(C) Intermediate horizontal wooden member
(D) Vertical wooden member
Answer: Option C
Question No. 227
Which one of the following factors is considered for the orientation of buildings?
(A) The direction of the prevailing winds in the area
(B) The exposure of the walls and roof of the buildings to the rays of sun
(C) The extent up to which the sunrays penetrate with the verandah
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 228

To construct a 10 cm thick partition wall, you will prefer
(A) English bond
(B) Flemish bond
(C) Header bond
(D) Stretcher bond
Answer: Option D
Question No. 229

The strength of brick masonry in 1:6 cement mortar, is
(A) 20 tonnes/m2
(B) 40 tonnes/m2
(C) 50 tonnes/m2
(D) 60 tonnes/m2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 230

The form work from the sides of beams can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option A
Question No. 231

For brick construction, the lime-sand mortar, is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 1 : 3
(D) 1 : 4
Answer: Option B
Question No. 232

The least bearing capacity of soil is that of
(A) Hard rock
(B) Moist clay
(C) Soft rock
(D) Coarse sandy soil
Answer: Option B
Question No. 233

The maximum permissible differential settlement, in case of foundations in clayey soil, is usually
limited to
(A) 10 mm
(B) 20 mm
(C) 30 mm
(D) 40 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 234

(A) English bond is used for brick masonry to support heavy loads
(B) Double-Flemish bond is suitable for brick masonry to give uniform face appearance
(C) The stretcher bond is used for the construction of half brick masonry brick
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 235

The black cotton soil
(A) Undergoes volumetric changes
(B) Swells excessively when wet
(C) Shrinks excessively when dry
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 236

A cut in frame of a door to receive the shutter, is called
(A) Louver
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) Rebate
Answer: Option D
Question No. 237

The loose pockets in soil mass can be bridged safely by providing a raft foundation provided the
soft area is smaller than
(A) The column spacing
(B) One-third the column spacing
(C) Half the column spacing
(D) Three-fourth the column spacing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 238
(A) In king post truss, one vertical post is used
(B) In a queen post truss, one vertical post is used
(C) In a queen post truss, two vertical posts are used
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 239

The pile which is provided with a bulb filled with concrete at its lower end, is known as
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Mac-Arthur pile
(C) Raymond pile
(D) Franki pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 240

Ornamental moulded course placed on the top of a wall, is
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option A
Question No. 241

(A) Cement is added to lime mortar to increase its hydraulic properties only
(B) Lime surkhi mortar is used for pointing the walls
(C) Lime should be slaked before preparing lime mortar
(D) High early strength concrete is generally used in cold weather
Answer: Option A
Question No. 242

Pile foundation is generally provided if soil is
(A) Compressible
(B) Water logged
(C) Made up
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 243

Bearing capacity of soils cannot be improved by
(A) Draining sub-soil water
(B) Ramming crushed stone in soil
(C) Driving sand piles
(D) Watering surface of soil
Answer: Option D
Question No. 244

Rotary drilling is the fastest method in case of
(A) Rocky soils
(B) Clay soils
(C) Sandy soil
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 245

The concrete slump recommended for beams and slabs; is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 25 to 75 mm
(C) 30 to 125 mm
(D) 50 to 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 246

The alignment of a cross joint along the plumb line is
(A) Bed block
(B) Perpend
(C) Lintel
(D) Vertical line
Answer: Option B
Question No. 247

A projecting piece usually provided to support a truss, is
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option C
Question No. 248

Best type of piles for soft soil having little resistance to the flow of concrete, is
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Vibro pile
(C) Raymond pile
(D) Franki pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 249

The form work from the underside of slabs, can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option C
Question No. 250

Couple roof is used for spans
(A) 3.5 m or less
(B) 3.5 m but less than 5 m
(C) 5 m but less than 6.5 m
(D) 6.5 m but less than 8 m
Answer: Option A
Question No. 251

For heavy embankments and dams, of height h, the depth of exploration of soil should not be less
than
(A) h/4
(B) 1/2 h
(C) h
(D) 2 h
Answer: Option D
Question No. 252

The vertical member running through middle of a shutter frame, is
(A) Style
(B) Reveal
(C) Mullion
(D) Post
Answer: Option C
Question No. 253

The lower half portion between crown and skew back of the arch, is called
(A) Spandril
(B) Haunch
(C) Springing
(D) Soffit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 254

An arch may fail due to
(A) Uneven settlement of abutments
(B) Sliding of voussoirs
(C) Crushing of the material
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 255

The exterior angle between outer faces of a wall, is known as
(A) Turn
(B) Junction
(C) Quion
(D) All the above
Answer: Option C
Question No. 256

The minimum thickness of walls built in cement mortar (1 : 6) for a single storey building, is
(A) 10 cm
(B) 15 cm
(C) 20 cm
(D) 25 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 257

Pick up the commonly adopted geophysical method in civil engineering from the following:
(A) The seismic method
(B) Electrical resistivity method
(C) Gravitational method
(D) Both (a) and (b) of the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 258

If height of the first storey of a building is 3.2 m and riser is 13 cm, the number of treads required,
is
(A) 12
(B) 18
(C) 24
(D) 25
Answer: Option C
Question No. 259

Dado is usually provided in
(A) Dining halls
(B) Bath rooms
(C) Living rooms
(D) Verandah
Answer: Option B
Question No. 260

A roof which slopes in four directions, is called
(A) Shed roof
(B) Gable end roof
(C) Hipped roof
(D) Gambrel roof
Answer: Option C
Question No. 261

The taper of precast concrete pile should not be more than
(A) 1 cm per metre length
(B) 2 cm per metre length
(C) 4 cm per metre length
(D) 5 cm per metre length
Answer: Option B
Question No. 262

If the depth of an excavation is 20 metres, number of single stage well points to be installed at
various levels, is
(A) 5
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 263

In case of multi-storeyed buildings, the forms to be removed first are
(A) Sides of beams and girders
(B) Column forms
(C) Bottom of beams and girders
(D) All the above at the same time
Answer: Option A
Question No. 264

The vertical members fixed between steps and hand rail, are known
(A) Balusters
(B) Strings
(C) Newel posts
(D) Soffits
Answer: Option A
Question No. 265

The depth of an arch is the distance between
(A) Ground level and springing line
(B) Crown and springing line
(C) Crown and ground level
(D) Intrados and extrados
Answer: Option D
Question No. 266

The nominal thickness of an expansion joint in brick walls, is kept more than
(A) 5 mm
(B) 10 mm
(C) 15 mm
(D) 20 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 267

Exposed portions of vertical surface at right angles to the door or window frame, are known as
(A) Jambs
(B) Lintels
(C) Reveals
(D) Soffits
Answer: Option C
Question No. 268

The projections of head or sill of a door or window frame are
(A) Transoms
(B) Horns
(C) Stops
(D) Chocks
Answer: Option B
Question No. 269

The line of intersection of the surfaces of a sloping roof forming an external angle exceeding 180°,
is
(A) Ridge
(B) Hip
(C) Valley
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 270

The depth of excavation of foundations, is generally measured with a
(A) Ranging rod
(B) Steel tape
(C) Levelling staff
(D) Boning rod
Answer: Option D
Question No. 271

(A) Stretcher
(B) Face
(C) Front
(D) Header
Answer: Option D
Question No. 272

The range of spread from the wall base to outer edge of a brick work foundation does not exceed
(A) 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical
(B) 2/3 horizontal to 1 vertical
(C) 1 horizontal to 1 vertical
(D) 2 horizontals to 1 vertical
Answer: Option C
Question No. 273

The foundation in which a cantilever beam is provided to join two footings, is known as
(A) Strip footing
(B) Strap footing
(D) Raft footing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 274

Auger boring
(A) Is the most primitive method for making a hole in the ground
(B) Is generally employed in cohesive and other self soils above water table
(C) Is most economical upto a depth of 5 metres
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 275

In horizontal D.P.C, thickness of cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is
(A) 2 cm
(B) 4 cm
(C) 6 cm
(D) 8 cm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 276

The triangular portion between any two adjacent arches and the tangent to their crowns, is
(A) Haunch
(B) Spandril
(C) Soffit
(D) Rise
Answer: Option B
Question No. 277
The compaction of concrete in the drilled pile hole is done by compressed air in the case of
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Franki pile
(C) Pressure pile
(D) Vibro pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 278

Pile foundations are suitable for
(A) Water logged soils
(B) Soft rocks
(C) Compact soils
(D) Multi-storeyed buildings
Answer: Option A
Question No. 279

(A) Inclined borings are made for taking samples under existing structures
(B) Inclined borings are occasionally used instead of vertical holes
(C) The spacing of inclined borings is kept such that one bore hole is vertically above the bottom
of an adjacent bore hole
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 280

The inclined support at the ends of treads and rises of a stair, is known as
(A) Baluster
(B) Header
(C) String
(D) Beam
Answer: Option C
Question No. 281

The brick laid with its breadth parallel to the face of a wall, is known as
(A) Header
(B) Stretcher
(C) Closer
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 282

The voussoir placed at crown of an arch, is known as a
(A) Key
(B) Soffit
(C) Springer
(D) Haunch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 283

In places where the soil is soft and has small resistance to the flow of concrete, which one of the
following types of piles, is used
(A) Vibro pile
(B) Pressure pile
(C) Franki pile
(D) Pedestal pile
Answer: Option A
Question No. 284

Crown is located at
(A) Highest point on the extrados of the arch
(B) Highest point on the intrados of the arch
(C) Skew-back of the arch
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 285

The under surface of an arch, is called
(A) Soffit
(B) Intrados
(C) Haunch
(D) Back
Answer: Option A
Question No. 286

The brick laid with its length parallel to the face of a wall, is a known as
(A) Header
(B) Stretcher
(C) Closer
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 287

You are asked to design and supervise a truss for a factory to have spans 6 m to 9 m. The type of
the truss you will use, is
(A) Mansard truss
(B) Queen post truss
(C) King post truss
(D) Collar truss
Answer: Option C
Question No. 288
In verandah floors outward slope is
(A) 1 in 40
(B) 1 in 50
(C) 1 in 60
(D) 1 in 70
Answer: Option C
Question No. 289

In jack arch floor, the rise is kept
(A) 1/6th of the span
(B) 1/8th of the span
(C) 1/10th of the span
(D) 1/12th of the span
Answer: Option D
Question No. 290

The method of moving each brick through a small horizontal distance before it is finally laid in any
brick wall and pressing it by means of brick hammer, is known as
(A) Trowelling
(B) Laying
(C) Grouting
(D) Placing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 291

Black cotton soil is unsuitable for foundations because its
(A) Bearing capacity is low
(B) Permeability is uncertain
(C) Particles are cohesive
(D) Property to undergo a volumetric change due to variation of moisture content
Answer: Option D
Question No. 292

A temporary rigid structure having platforms to enable masons to work at different stages of a
building, is known as
(A) Scaffolding
(B) Dead shore
(C) Raking shore
(D) Under pinning
Answer: Option A
Question No. 293

A floor constructed with 3 mm marble chips, is known
(A) Mosaic floor
(B) Terrazzo floor
(C) Chips floor
(D) Marble floor
Answer: Option B
Question No. 294

The local swelling of a finished plaster, is termed
(A) Cracking
(B) Dubbing
(C) Blistering
(D) Hacking
Answer: Option C
Question No. 295

Expansion joints in masonry walls are provided if length exceeds
(A) 10 m
(B) 20 m
(C) 30 m
(D) 40 m
Answer: Option D
Question No. 296

The stone whose crushing strength is least, is
(A) Granite
(B) Chalk
(C) Marble
(D) Slate
Answer: Option B
Question No. 297

The portion of a brick cut across the width, is called
(A) Closer
(B) Half brick
(C) Bed
(D) Bat
Answer: Option D
Question No. 298

The type of bond in which every course contains both headers and stretchers, is called
(A) English bond
(B) Flemish bond
(C) Russian band
(D) Mixed bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 299
To support a heavy structure in sandy soil, the type of foundation generally used, is
(B) Raft footing
(C) Pier footing
(D) Strap footing
Answer: Option C
Question No. 300

The vertical side member of a shutter frame, is known
(A) Style
(B) Reveal
(C) Mullion
(D) Post
Answer: Option A
Building Construction MCQs [set-1]
1. The asphalt type of flooring is recommended for swimming pools

because it is non-slippery.
A. Yes
B. No
Answer: A
o m
2. A couple-close roof is used for spans e
.c
a t upto
A. 3.5 m
q M
B. 5 m
c
C. 9 m M
D. 14 m
Answer: B
3. When the foundation is placed immediately beneath the lowest part of

the super-structure, it is called
A. deep
B. shallow
Answer: B
4. The minimum thickness of a wall in stone masonry should not be less

than
A. 100 mm
B. 200 mm
C. 350 mm
D. 450 mm
Answer: C
Download more at McqMate.com

5. In masonry construction, excessive tension is not permissible and
hence in order that the supporting area is fully in compression, the width
of footing is so adopted that the centre of gravity of the load falls.
A. at the centre of base
B. within the middle third of base
C. within the middle fifth of base
D. any one of these
Answer: B
o m
.c
t e as a result of
a
6. High early strength of cement is obtained
A. fine grinding
q M
c
B. burning at high temperatures
M
C. decreasing the lime content
D. increasing the quantity of gypsum
Answer: A
7. Cast-in-situ piles
A. are cast in position inside the ground
B. beed not be reinforced in ordinary cases
C. are not subjected to handling or driving stresses
D. all of the above
Answer: D
8. King closers are related to
A. king post truss
B. queen post truss
C. brick masonry

D. doors and windows
Answer: C
9. A bat is the portion of a
A. wall not exposed to weather
B. brick cut across the width
C. wall between facing and backing
o m
D. brick cut in such a manner that its one long face remains uncut
Answer: B
.c
te
a for
10. Herring-bone bond is commonly used
q M
A. brick paving
c
B. very thick walls M
C. partition walls
D. footings in foundations
Answer: A
11. The bearing capacity of soils can be improved by
A. increasing the depth of footing
B. draining the sub-soil water
C. ramming the granular material like crushed stone in the soil
D. all of the above
Answer: D
12. The most important purpose of frog in a brick is to
A. emboss manufacture's name
B. reduce the weight of brick

C. form keyed joint between brick and mortar
D. improve insulation by providing 'hollows'
Answer: C
13. The raft foundations are generally used when the required area of
footing is
A. more than one-fourth
B. less than one-fourth
o m
C. more than one-helf
.c
D. less than one-half
te
a
Answer: C
q M
c structure required to support an
14. The construction of a temporary
unsafe structure, is calledM
A. underpinning
B. scaffolding
C. shoring
D. jacking
Answer: C
15. In the first class coursed rubble masonry
A. all the coruses are of the same height
B. minimum height of the course is limited to 150 mm
C. the length of the quoin is generally kept 450 mm
D. all of the above
Answer: D

16. For providing safe and economical foundation in black cotton soil, the
under-reamed piles are commonly recommended.
A. Yes
B. No
Answer: A
17. In pitched roofs, the term gable is defined as the
A. apex line of the sloping roof o m

.c
e
B. inclination of the sides of a roof to the hoizontal plane
t
a
C. horizontal distance between the internal faces of the walls
q M
D. triangular upper part of a wall formed at the end of a pitched roof
c
Answer: D
M
18. In order that the wall may be stable, the lowermost course of the wall
footing is made
A. half
B. equal to
C. twice
D. four times
Answer: C
19. The projecting part of the tread beyond the face of riser is called
A. pitch
B. nosing
C. baluster
D. stringer
Answer: B

20. The piles which are driven in the type of soil whose strength does not
increase with depth or where the rate of increase in strength with depth is
very slow, are known as
A. friction piles
B. bearing piles
C. batter piles
D. compaction piles
Answer: A
o m
.c
t e
21. Plain brick type of partition wall is constructed by
a
M
A. laying bricks as stretchers in cement mortar
q
c
B. laying bricks as headers in cement mortar
M
C. reinforcing the brick wall with iron straps
D. brick work built within a frame-work of wooden members
Answer: A
22. In made-up ground having a low value of its bearing power, heavy
concentrated structural loads are generally supported by providing
A. combined footing
B. strap footing
C. raft footing
D. all of these
Answer: C
23. The minimum load which will cause failure of a foundation is called
A. ultimate tensile strength
B. nominal strength
C. ultimate bearing power

D. ultimate compressive strength
Answer: C
24. In stairs, the flier is
A. a vertical portion of a step providing a support to the tread
B. a straight step having a parallel width of tread
C. the under surface of a stair
o m
D. the angle which the line of nosing of the stair makes with the horizontal
Answer: B
.c
t e
25. The highest point on the extradosais called
q M
A. skew back
c
B. crown M
C. voussoir
D. keystone
Answer: A

Take Quick Mock/Practice test on this topic HERE
For Discussion / Reporting / Correction of any MCQ please visit discussion page by clicking on
'answer' of respective MCQ.
McqMate is also available on
PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

26. The bottom or lowermost horizontal part of a window frame is known

as
A. sill
B. mullion
C. transom
o m
D. horn
.c
te
Answer: A
a
q M
27. In a Mac Arthur pile, the core and the casting are together driven into
the ground to the required depth. c
A. Agree
M
B. Disagree
Answer: A
28. A combined footing is commonly used
A. when two columns are spaced close to each other
B. when two columns are spaced far apart
C. under a set of columns
D. under a set of walls
Answer: A
29. The minimum covering of the reinforcement for the pre-cast reinforced
piles used in sea water, is
A. 40 mm
B. 55 mm

C. 75 mm
D. 100 mm
Answer: B
30. When the walls are subjected to heavy loading and the bearing
capacity of the soil is very low, then the wall is constructed on
A. reinforced concrete footing
B. column footing
o m
C. lean concrete footing
.c
D. none of these
te
a
Answer: A
q M
31. Frog is defined as a c
M
A. depression on the top face of a brick
B. topmost course of plinth
C. brick whose one end is cut splayed or mitred for the full width
D. brick used for the corner of a wall
Answer: A
32. The external jamb of a door or window opening at right angles to the
wall face, is called
A. reveals
B. styles
C. posts
D. jambs
Answer: A

33. The nogging, in a brick nogged partition wall, is a intermediate
horizontal wooden member.
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A
34. An open-newel stair consists of two or more straight flights arranged
forward flights. o m
in such a manner that a clear space occurs between the backward and
.c
A. Agree
te
a
B. Disagree
q M
Answer: A
c
M
35. In air conditioned building, a door has to serve both purposes of
opening and closing. The most suitable type of door for this purpose is
A. sliding door
B. swinging door
C. revolving door
D. none of these
Answer: B
36. A horizontal member of stone, concrete or wood provided to give

support for the vertical members of a wooden window, is called
A. jamb
B. reveal
C. sill
D. quoin
Answer: C

37. The coupled roof is suitable for spans upto
A. 3.5 m
B. 5 m
C. 6.5 m
D. 8 m
Answer: A
o m
38. A course of stone provided immediately below a cornice, is called
.c
A. blocking course
te
a
B. coping
q M
C. frieze
c
D. parapet
M
Answer: C
39. A partition wall is designed as a no load bearing wall.
A. Right
B. Wrong
Answer: A
40. In a Raymond pile
A. the length varies from 6 to 12 m
B. the diameter at the top varies from 400 to 600 mm and the diameter at the base varies from
200 to 280 mm
C. the thickness of the outer shell depends upon the pile diameter and site conditions
D. all of the above
Answer: D
41. In case of buildings without basement, the best position for damp-

proof course (D.P.C.) lies at
A. plinth level
B. ground level
C. 150 mm above plinth level
D. 150 mm above ground level
Answer: A
called o m
42. The lower portion of an arch between the skew back and crown is
.c
A. depth
te
B. rise a
C. haunch q M
c
D. intrados
Answer: C
M
43. The ability of sub-soil to support the load of the structure without
yielding is known as
A. bearing value of soil
B. bearing power of soil
C. bearing capacity of soil
D. any one of these
Answer: D
44. Sheet piles are made of
A. wood
B. steel
C. concrete
D. all of these
Answer: D

45. The type of pointing in which the mortar is first pressed into the raked
joints and then finished off flush with the edges of the bricks or stones, is
called
A. flust pointing
B. struck pointing
C. V-grooved pointing
D. tuck pointing
Answer: A
o m
.c
e
46. Which of the following statement istcorrect?
a
q M
A. The flat members connecting the jambs at the top is called head.
c
B. The head is of the same size as the jamb
M
C. The jamb are tennoned into the head and wedged.
D. all of the above
Answer: D
47. The depth of the concrete bed placed at the bottom of a wall footing
should never be less than its projection beyond the wall base.
A. Agree
B. Disagree
Answer: A
48. The centre to centre spacing of lateral reinforcement in pre-cast

reinforced concrete piles should not exceed
A. half
B. equal to
C. double
D. three times
Answer: A

49. A semi-rigid material which forms an excellent impervious layer for
damp-proofing, is called
A. bitumen
B. mastic asphalt
C. aluminal
D. bituminous felt
Answer: B
o m
.c
e
50. A queen post truss is commonly used for spans
t
a
A. upto 3.5 m
q M
B. from 3.5 to 5 m
c
C. from 5 to 8 m
D. from 8 to 12 m
M
Answer: D

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

51. A partition wall may be
A. folding
B. collapsible
C. fixed
D. any one of these

o m
.c
Answer: D
te
a
from the action of weather, is known as q M
52. A stone wall provided to protect the slopes of cutting in natural ground
c
A. retaining wall M
B. breast wall
C. parapet wall
D. buttress
Answer: B
53. The term pitch in connection with pitched roofs is defined as the
A. apex line of the sloping roof
B. inclination of the sides of a roof to the horizontal plane
C. horizontal distance between the internal faces of the walls
D. triangular upper part of a wall formed at the end of a pitch roof
Answer: B
54. A system of providing temporary support to the party walls of two

buildings where the intermediate building is to be pulled down and built, is
called

A. ranking shore
B. dead or vertical shore
C. flying or horizontal shore
D. none of these
Answer: C
55. The most commonly used material for damp proofing is
A. bitumen
o m
B. paraffin wax
.c
te
C. cement solution
a
D. cement concrete
q M
Answer: A
c
M
56. In brick masonry, for good bonding
A. all bricks need not be uniform in size
B. bats must be used in alternate courses only
C. vertical joints in alternate courses should fall in plumb
D. cement mortar used must have surkhi as additive
Answer: C
57. H-piles
A. require large storage space
B. are difficult to handle
C. cannot withstand large impact stress developed during hadn driving
D. none of the above
Answer: D

58. Corince is defined as a
A. horizontal course of masonry projecting from the face of the wall
B. horizontal moulded projection provided ner the top of a building
C. covering placed on the exposed top of an external wall
D. triangular shaped portion of masonry at the end of a sloped roof
Answer: B
59. The span of an arch is o m

.c
te
A. vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point on the intrados
a
M
B. vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point on the extrados
q
c
C. perpendicular distance between the intrados and extrados
M
D. horizontal distance between the supports
Answer: D
60. The pre-stressed concrete piles as compared to pre-cast and

reinforced concrete piles
A. are lesser in weight
B. have high load carrying capacity
C. are extremely durable
D. all of these
Answer: D
61. The type of stone masonry commonly adopted in the construction of

residential building is
A. uncoused rubble masonry
B. coursed rubble masonry
C. random rubble masonry

D. dry rubble masonry
Answer: B
62. Which of the following statement is wrong?
A. In English bond, vertical joints in the header courses come over each other and vertical joints in
the stretcher courses are also in the same line.
B. In English bond, the heading course should start with a queen closer.
strechers in the course below.

o m
C. In Flemish bond, the alternate headeers of each course are centrally supported over the
.c
D. In Flemish bond, every alternate course starts with a header at the corner.
te
Answer: B
a
q M
63. A raking shore is a system of
c
M
A. giving temporary lateral support to an unsafe wall
B. providing temporary support to the party walls of two buildings where the intermediate building
is to be pulled down and rebuilt
C. providing vertical support to walls and roofs, floors etc. when the lower part of a wall has to be
removed for the purpose of providing an opening in the wall
D. all of the above
Answer: A
64. The window which projects outward from the walls of a room to
provide an increased area of opening for admitting greater light and
ventilation, is called
A. dormer window
B. corner window
C. bay window
D. clerestorey window
Answer: C

65. The wedge shaped unit (voussoir) placed at the crown of an arch, is
called
A. skew back
B. intrados
C. extrados
D. keystone
Answer: D
o m
.c
66. The surface of the abutment on which the arch rests, is known as
te
A. span a
B. keystone
q M
c
C. skew back
D. crown
M
Answer: C
67. The nogging pieces are housed in the studs at a vertical distance of
about
A. 100 to 200 mm
B. 200 to 400 mm
C. 400 to 600 mm
D. 600 to 900 mm
Answer: D
68. When the depth of water is from 4.5 to 6 m, the type of coefferdam
used is
A. earthen cofferdam
B. rockfill cofferdam
C. single-walled cofferdam

D. double walled cofferdam
Answer: C
69. A block of stone or concrete provided under the end of tie beam to
spread the load from the roof over a large area of bearing, is called
A. gable
B. hip
C. verge
o m
D. template
.c
Answer: D
te
a
q M
70. A ridge formed by the intersection of two sloped surfaces having an
c
exterior angle greater than 180?, is called
A. gable
M
B. hip
C. verge
D. template
Answer: B
71. The arrangement of supports provided underneath the existing

structure without disturbing its stability, is known as
A. underpinning
B. scaffolding
C. shoring
D. jacking
Answer: A
72. In combined footing

A. depth of footing varies
B. width of footing is uniform
C. centre of gravity of the column loads must coincide with the centre of gravity of the footing
D. all of the above
Answer: C
73. The vertical distance between the wall plate and top of the ridge is
called
o m
A. rise
.c
B. pitch
te
a
C. template
q M
D. gable
c
Answer: A
M
74. The dampness in a building is due to
A. ground moisture
B. rain water
C. defective construction
D. all of these
Answer: D
75. When the pile is driven by means of water jets, water is forced through
the jet pipe under a pressure of
A. 0.2 to 0.5 N/mm2
B. 0.5 to 0.7 N/mm2
C. 0.7 to 1.75 N/mm2
D. 1.75 to 2.5 N/mm2
Answer: C

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

76. The foundation in a building is provided to
A. distribute the load over a large area
B. increase overall stability of the structure
C. transmit load to the bearing surface (sub soil) at a uniform rate
D. all of the above

o m
.c
Answer: D
te
a
should not be greater than q M
77. For a rectangular foundation of width b, the eccentricity of the load
c
A. b/3 M
B. b/4
C. b/5
D. b/6
Answer: D
78. A coarse aggregate is one whose particles are of size
A. 4.75 mm
B. below 4.75 mm
C. 6.75 mm
D. above 6.75 mm
Answer: A
79. A temporary rigid structure having platforms raised up as the building

increases in height, is called
A. underpinning

B. scaffolding
C. shoring
D. jacking
Answer: B
80. The horizontal upper part of a step on which foot is placed in

ascending or descending a stairway, is called
A. riser
o m
B. tread
.c
C. flight
te
a
D. nosing
q M
Answer: B
c
M
81. The intrados of the flat arch is horizontal but the extrados has a
straight camber or upward curvature.
A. Yes
B. No
Answer: B
82. In stairs, the vertical portion of a step providing a support to the tread,
is known as
A. riser
B. flier
C. soffit
D. pitch or slope
Answer: A
83. In a public building, the stairs should be located near the

A. entrance
B. centre
C. end
D. toilet
Answer: A
84. In designing a stair, the sum of going (in cm) and twice the rise (in cm)
should be equal to
o m
A. 40
.c
B. 50
te
a
C. 60
q M
D. 70
c
Answer: A
M
85. The process of placing a stone in its position in masonry construction
is termed as setting.
A. Yes
B. No
Answer: A
86. Batter piles are
A. used to function as retaining walls
B. used to protect concrete deck or other water front structures from the abrasion or impact
C. driven at an inclination to resist large horizontal inclined forces
D. driven in granular soil with the aim of increasing the bearing capacity of the soil
Answer: C

87. A brick which is cut in such a way that the width of its one end is half
that of a full brick, is called
A. king closer
B. mitred closer
C. bevelled closer
D. queen closer
Answer: A
o m
.c
88. A type of bond in which all the bricks are laid as headeers on the faces
of walls, is known as
te
a
A. raking bond
q M
B. dutch bond c
C. facing bond M
D. heading bond
Answer: D
89. A type of cast-in-situ pile best suited for places where the ground is
soft and offers little resistance to the flow of concrete, is
A. simplex pile
B. Franki pile
C. vibro-pile
D. Raymond pile
Answer: C
90. The ultimate strength of rapid hardening cement is just the same as
that of normal setting cement.
A. True
B. False
Answer: A

91. In a king post truss, one vertical post is used.
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A
92. The brick laid with its length perpendicular to the face of the wall is
called a
o m
A. course
.c
B. stretcher
te
a
C. header
q M
D. closer
c
Answer: C
M
93. A foundation consisting of thick reinforced concrete slab covering the
entire area of the bottom of the structure, is known as
A. pile foundation
B. pier foundation
C. raft foundation
D. machine foundation
Answer: C
94. A raft foundation is also known as mat foundation
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A

95. The exposed vertical surface left on the sides of an opening after the
door or window frame has been fitted in position, is called
A. jamb
B. reveal
C. sill
D. quoin
Answer: B
o m
.c
96. The combination of a king-post truss and queen post truss is known as
te
A. couple roof a
B. collar beam roof
q M
c
C. mansard roof
D. purlin roof
M
Answer: C
97. The most commonly used bond for all wall thicknesses is
A. English bond
B. Flemish bond
C. stretching bond
D. heading bond
Answer: A
98. Pile foundation is generally used when the soil is
A. compressible
B. water-logged
C. made-up type
D. all of these
Answer: D

99. The frog of the brick must be kept
A. down
B. upward
Answer: B
100. The lowest part of a structure which transmits the load to the soil is
known as
o m
A. Super-structure
.c
B. Plinth
te
a
C. Foundation
q M
D. Basement
c
Answer: C
M

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

101. In wooden stairs, the thickness of tread is adopted as
A. 28 mm
B. 38 mm
C. 48 mm
D. 58 mm
o m
.c
Answer: B
te
a
M
102. Brick nogging type of partition wall is constructed by
q
c
A. laying bricks as stretchers in cement mortar
M
B. laying bricks as headers in cement mortar
C. reinforcing the brick wall with iron straps
D. brick work built within a frame-work of wooden members
Answer: D
103. The pointing which is extensively used in brick work and stone
masonry face work, is
A. flush poining
B. struck pointing
D. tuck pointing
Answer: A
104. A grillage foundation can be treated as a deep foundation.
A. Right

B. Wrong
Answer: A
105. A retaining wall is commonly required in the construction of
A. hill roads
B. masonry dams
C. wing walls
D. all of these
o m
Answer: D
.c
te
a corrosion, a minimum cover of
106. In order to protect the beam against
q M
A. 50 mm
c
B. 100 mm M
C. 150 mm
D. 200 mm
Answer: B
107. The damp-proof course
A. may be horizontal or vertical
B. should be continuous
C. should be good impervious material
D. all of these
Answer: D
108. When the pile is required to penetrate beds of hard soil or soft rock to
reach its required depth, the best method od driving the pile is by
A. drop hammer
B. steam hammer

C. water jets
D. boring
Answer: D
109. A wateright structure constructed in connection with excavations for

foundations of bridges, piers etc., is known as
A. caisson
B. cofferdam
o m
C. well foundation
.c
D. raft foundatio
te
a
Answer: A
q M
c used for
110. The heading bond is usually
A. half brick wall

M
B. one brick wall
C. one and half brick wall
D. two brick wall
Answer: B
111. The higher water cement ratio in concrete results in
A. a weak mix
B. a stronger mix
C. better workable mix
D. less bleeding
Answer: C
112. The type of truss commonly used for spans varying from 5 to 9 metre
is

A. queen post truss
B. king post truss
C. mansard truss
D. composite truss
Answer: B
113. The size of a step commonly adopted for residential buildings is
A. 250 mm x 160 mm
o m
B. 270 mm x 150 mm
.c
te
C. 300 mm x 130 mm
a
D. 350 mm x 100 mm
q M
Answer: A
c
M
114. The type of masonry in which the stones of irregular size and shapes
are used and there are no regular courses, is known as
A. uncoursed rubble masonry
B. coursed rubble masonry
C. random rubble masonry
D. dry rubble masonry
Answer: A
115. A type of flooring made with special aggregate of marble chips mixed
with white and coloured cement, is called
A. granolithic flooring
B. terrazzo flooring
C. mosaic flooring
D. asphalt flooring
Answer: B

116. In stairs, the soffit is
A. a vertical portion of a step providing a support to the tread
B. a straight step having a parallel width of tread
C. the under surface of a stair
D. the angle which the line of nosing of the stair makes with the horizontal
Answer: C
117. The failure of foundation of a building is due to o m

.c
A. withdrawl of subsoil moisture
te
a
B. unequal settlement of soil
q M
c
C. lateral escape of the supporting material
D. all of these
M
Answer: D
118. The filling in cavities with cement slurry is known as
A. coping
B. beam-filling
C. grouting
D. gunniting
Answer: C
119. The slump commonly adopted for concrete for columns is
A. 25 to 50
B. 50 to 100
C. 75 to 175
D. 175 to 200
Answer: C

120. In a brick nogging type of partition wall the vertical wooden members
are called
A. noggings
B. studs
C. sills
D. templates
Answer: B
o m
.c
121. A series of steps without any platform, break or landing in their
direction, is called
te
a
A. riser
q M
B. tread c
C. flight M
D. nosing
Answer: C
122. The distance between the flanges of the beams in steel grillage
foundation should not be more than twice the width of flange.
A. True
B. False
Answer: A
123. Pre-cast concrete piles are usually
A. reinforced concrete only
B. plain or reinforced concrete
C. reinforced concrete or pre-stressed concrete
D. plain, reinforced concrete or pre-stressed concrete
Answer: C

124. The brick flooring may be done with bricks
A. laid flat
B. set at right angle to the walls
C. laid on edge arranged in herring-bone fashion
D. all of the above
Answer: D
o m
125. The vertical members which support the door frame are called
.c
A. reveals
te
a
B. styles
q M
C. posts
c
D. jambs
M
Answer: D

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

126. A type of cast-in-situ pile which has an enlarged base and a

corrugated stem, is
A. simplex pile
B. Franki pile
C. vibro-pile
o m
D. Raymond pile
.c
te
Answer: B
a
q M
127. The type of foundation most suitable for brideges is
c
A. pier foundation M
B. raft foundation
C. pile foundation
D. strap foundation
Answer: C
128. The cement which is commonly used in all types of structures and
require no special consideration, is called
A. rapid hardening cement
B. normal setting cement
C. quick setting cement
D. white cement
Answer: B
129. The depth of arch is the
A. vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point on the intrados

B. vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point on the extrados
C. perpendicular distance between the intrados and extrados
D. horizontal distance between the supports
Answer: C
130. In residential building, the average value of stair width is
A. 600 mm
B. 700 mm
o m
C. 800 mm
.c
te
D. 900 mm
a
Answer: D
q M
c
M
131. The process of filling up all mail holes, cracks etc. with putty is known
as
A. knotting
B. priming
C. stopping
D. finishing
Answer: C
132. Coping is defined as a
A. horizontal course of masonry projecting from the face of the wall
B. horizontal moulded projection provided ner the top of a building
C. covering placed on the exposed top of an external wall
D. triangular shaped portion of masonry at the end of a sloped roof
Answer: C
133. Which of the following statement is correct?

A. The cavity should start near the ground level.
B. The cavity should terminate near eaves level in case of sloping roof.
C. The cavity should terminate near coping in case of flat roof with parapet wall.
D. all of the above
Answer: D
134. The pitch of stair should never exceed
A. 20?
o m
B. 25?
.c
te
C. 30?
a
D. 40?
q M
Answer: D
c
135. In a stretching bond
M
A. all the bricks are laid as headers
B. all the bricks are laid as stretchers
C. the arrangement of bricks is similar to English bond
D. the bonding bricks are laid at any angle other than zero or ninety degrees
Answer: B
136. For ordinary Portland cement, the initial setting time should not be
more than
A. 30 minutes
B. 1 hour
C. 5 hours
D. 10 hours
Answer: D

137. Corbel is the extension of one or more course of bricks from the
A. face
B. back
Answer: A
138. The intermediate support of an arch is known as pier.
A. Right
o m
B. Wrong
.c
Answer: A
te
a
q M
139. If the water-cement ratio is low, the strength of the mix is high.
c
A. Agree
M
B. Disagree
Answer: A
140. The flooring made with small pieces of broken tiles of china glazed or
of marble arranged in different pattern, is known as
A. asphalt flooring
B. mosaic flooring
C. terrazo flooring
D. granolithic flooring
Answer: B
141. Which of the following foundation is used for weaker soil?
A. Column footing
B. Grillage footing
C. Raft footing

D. all of these
Answer: D
142. A tomparary structure constructed in a river for excluding water from

a given site to enable the building operation to be performed on dry
surface, is called
A. caisson
B. cofferdam
C. well foundation
o m
.c
D. raft foundatio
te
Answer: B a
q M
c
143. The minimum depth of foundation for the load bearing wall of a
building is restricted to
M
A. 600 mm
B. 700 mm
C. 800 mm
D. 900 mm
Answer: D
144. A pitched roof in which rafters slope to one side only is called
A. lean-to roof
B. Pent roof
C. Aisle roof
D. any one of these
Answer: D
145. When two or more footings are connected by a beam, it is called

A. beam footing
B. combined footing
C. strap footing
D. mat footing
Answer: C
146. A type of bond in a brick masonry in which each course consists of

alternate headers and stretchers, is called
o m
A. English bond
.c
B. Flemish bond
te
a
C. stretching bond
q M
D. heading bond
c
Answer: B
M
147. The diameter of the drilled piles should not exceed
A. 200 mm
B. 400 mm
C. 600 mm
D. 800 mm
Answer: C
148. The dampness on roof may be due to
A. use of porous materials
B. insufficient lap of covering material
C. bad workmanship in plumbing
D. all of these
Answer: D

149. The perpendicular distance between the intrados and extrados of an
arch, is called
A. pitch of an arch
B. depth of an arch
C. width of an arch
D. thickness of an arch
Answer: B
o m
.c
150. For D.P.C. at plinth level, the commonly adopted material is
te
A. bitumen sheeting a
B. plastic sheeting
q M
c
C. mastic asphalt
D. cement concrete
M
Answer: D

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

151. The projections which help in securing the head of a door frame to
the masonry, are called
A. reveals
B. stops
C. horns
o m
D. styles
.c
te
Answer: C
a
q M
152. In a flat arch, the skew back is made to rest in an inclined position so
as to make an angle of c
A. 30?
M
B. 40?
C. 50?
D. 60?
Answer: D
153. The vertical distance between the upper surface of the successive
treads is known as 'going of step'.
A. True
B. False
Answer: B
154. Fender piles are
A. used to function as retaining walls
B. used to protect concrete deck or other water front structures from the abrasion or impact

C. driven at an inclination to resist large horizontal inclined forces
D. driven in granular soil with the aim of increasing the bearing capacity of the soil
Answer: B
155. The arch consisting of fully dressed stones, is called
A. axed arch
B. gauged arch
C. ashlar arch
o m
D. roubble arch
.c
te
Answer: C
a
q M
156. A wall built to resist the pressure of earth filling, is known as
c
A. breast wall M
B. retaining wall
C. parapet wall
D. duttress
Answer: D
157. The window used with the object of providing light and air to the
enclosed space below the roof, is called
A. dormer window
B. corner window
C. bay window
Answer: A
158. A fine aggregate is one whose particles are of size
A. 4.75 mm

B. below 4.75 mm
C. 6.75 mm
D. above 6.75 mm
Answer: B
159. The horizontal members of wood or steel used to support the

common rafter of a sloping roof, are called
A. purlins
o m
B. cleats
.c
C. hip rafters
te
a
D. valley rafters
q M
Answer: A
c
M
160. The vibro-expanded pile
A. increases
B. decreases
Answer: A
161. For the pre-cast reinforced concrete piles, the quality of concrete
recommended is
A. M 100 to M 150
B. M 150 to M 200
C. M 200 to M 250
D. M 250 to M 300
Answer: B
162. The sill in a wooden partition wall is the
A. vertical

B. lower horizontal
C. upper horizontal
D. intermediate horizontal
Answer: B
163. A retaining wall may be built in
A. dry stone masonry
B. stonemasonry
o m
C. plain cement concrete
.c
te
D. all of these
a
Answer: D
q M
c
M
164. A brick which is half as wide as a full brick, is called
A. king closer
B. mitred closer
C. bevelled closer
D. queen closer
Answer: D
165. A horizontal layer of bricks laid in mortar is known as
A. course
B. stretcher
C. header
D. closer
Answer: A

A. The retaining wall should be structurally capable of resisting the earth pressure applied to it.
B. The section of the wall should be so proportioned that it will not overturn by the lateral pressure.
C. The weight of the retaining wall and the force resulting from the earth pressure should not
stress its foundation to a value greater than safe bearing capacity of the soil.
D. all of the above
Answer: D
167. A black cotton soil is unsuitable for foundations because it
o m
c
A. undergoes volumetric changes with the change of atmospheric conditions
.
B. swells excessively when wet
te
C. shrinks excessively when dry a
D. all of the above
q M
c
Answer: D
M
168. In axed brick arches, the joints of the arch are not of uniform
thickness.
A. Right
B. Wrong
Answer: B
169. The maximum bearing capacity of soil is that of
A. hard rocks
B. black cotton soil
C. dry, coarse sandy soil
D. fine sandy soil
Answer: A
170. The maximum load on the wooden pile should not exceed

A. 50 kN
B. 100 kN
C. 150 kN
D. 200 kN
Answer: D
171. For a building on the side of a busy street where the ordinary
scaffolding will obstruct the traffic on road, the type of scaffolding
provided is
o m
.c
A. brick layer's scaffold
te
B. mason's scaffold a
C. steel scaffold
q M
D. needle scaffold c
Answer: D
M
172. The type of pointing in which the mortar is first pressed into the raked
joint and then finished off flush with the face of the bricks or stones is
called
A. flush poining
B. struck pointing
D. tuck pointing
Answer: D
173. In designing a stair, the product of going (in cm) and the rise (in cm)
should be equal to
A. 300
B. 350
C. 400

D. 450
Answer: C
174. The brick flooring is used in
A. workshops
B. godowns
C. verandahs
D. none of these
o m
Answer: B
.c
te
a should be placed next to the
175. In English bond, the queen's closer
quoin header.
q M
c
A. Yes
B. no
M
Answer: A

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

176. In a queen post truss,
A. two
B. three
C. four
D. six
o m
.c
Answer: A
te
a
177. Hearting is the portion of a
q M
A. wall not exposed to weather c
B. brick cut across the width
M
C. wall between facing and backing
D. brick cut in such a manner that its one long face remains uncut
Answer: C
178. In rough brick arches, the joints at the extrados are wider than those
at the intrados.
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A
179. Weep holes are provided in the retaining walls to drain off the water
from the filling behind.
A. Agree
B. Disagree
Answer: A

180. In a sloping roof, the inclined wooden members laid from the ridge to
the caves are known as
A. hip rafters
B. jack rafters
C. common rafters
D. valley rafters
Answer: C
o m
181. The inner surface of an arch is called .c
te
A. extrados a
B. intrados
q M
c
C. crown
D. voussoir
M
Answer: B
182. The minimum depth of foundation for buildings on clays is
A. 0.2 to 0.4 m
B. 0.4 to 0.6 m
C. 0.6 to 0.9 m
D. 0.9 to 1.6 m
Answer: D
183. Which of the following statement is wrong?
A. The part of the wall on which the arch rests, is called abutment.
B. Soffit is the under surface of an arch
C. Crown is the highest point of the intrados
D. all of the above
Answer: C

184. The damp-proof course for the two leaves of the cavity wall is laid
separately although at the same level.
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A
185. A type of bond in a brick masonry consisting of alternate course of

headers and stretchers, is called
o m
.c
A. English bond
te
B. Flemish bond a
C. stretching bond
q M
D. heading bond c
Answer: A
M
186. The length of pre-cast concrete piles varies from
A. 3 m to 4.5 m
B. 4.5 m to 10 m
C. 4.5 m to 20 m
D. 4.5 m to 30 m
Answer: D
187. A bond consisting of heading and stretching courses so arranged

that one heading course comes after several stretching courses, is called
A. raking bond
B. dutch bond
C. facing bond
D. heading bond
Answer: C

188. The best spacing of timber piles from centre to centre is
A. 600 mm
B. 700 mm
C. 800 mm
D. 900 mm
Answer: D
o m
c
.
e
at
A. A combined footing is so proportioned that the centre of gravity of the supporting area is in line
with the centre of gravity of the two column loads.
q M
B. A combined rectangular footing is provided where loading condition is such that either the two
c
columns are equally loaded or the interior column carries greater load.
M
C. A trapezoidal shaped footing is provided under any condition of loading.
D. all of the above
Answer: D
190. The window usually provided near the main roof of a room and opens
above the adjoining verandah, is called
A. dormer window
B. corner window
C. bay window
Answer: D
191. The width of landing should be
A. equal to
B. less than
C. greater than
Answer: C
192. The brick laid with its length parallel to the face of the wall is called a
A. course
B. stretcher
C. header
D. closer
Answer: B
o m
193. For walls thicker than 1
.c
te
A. True
a
B. False
q M
Answer: A
c
M
194. A horizontal member of a frame employed to sub-divide a window
opening horizontally is called
A. sill
B. mullion
C. transom
D. horn
Answer: C
195. The angle which the line of nosing of the stair makes with the
horizontal, is called
A. riser
B. flier
C. soffit
D. pitch or slope
Answer: D

196. The coefficient of friction between the concrete and soil is
A. 0.20 to 0.25
B. 0.25 to 0.30
C. 0.30 to 0.35
D. 0.35 to 0.50
Answer: C
197. In a raking bond, o m

.c
A. all the bricks are laid as headers
te
a
B. all the bricks are laid as stretchers
q M
c
C. the arrangement of bricks is similar to English bond
M
D. the bonding bricks are laid at any angle other than zero or ninety degrees
Answer: D
198. Pile foundations are used where the good bearing capacity is
available near the ground.
A. True
B. False
Answer: B
199. In constructing concrete partition wall, the concrete mixture usually

adopted is
A. M 100
B. M 150
C. M 200
D. M 250
Answer: B

200. In horizontal D.P.C. at plinth level, the thickness of cement concrete
of 1 : 2 : 4 mix, is kept as minimum of 400 mm.
A. Correct
B. Incorrect
Answer: A
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

201. The depth of jambs is
A. 57 mm to 76 mm
B. 76 mm to 114 mm
C. 114 mm to 138 mm
D. 138 mm to 152 mm
o m
.c
Answer: A
te
a
is called q M
202. A course of stone masonry provided immediately above the cornice,
c
A. blocking course M
B. coping
C. frieze
D. parapet
Answer: A
203. When heavy structural loads from columns are required to be

transferred to a soil of low bearing capacity, the most economical
foundation is
A. shallow foundation
B. deep foundation
C. raft foundation
D. grillage foundation
Answer: D
204. The arrangement of bricks is similar to English bond in

A. raking bond
B. dutch bond
C. facing bond
D. heading bond
Answer: D
205. The exterior angle or corner of a wall is known as quoin.
A. Right
o m
B. Wrong
.c
te
Answer: A
a
q M
206. A flexible material used for D.P.C. is
c
A. bitumen sheeting M
B. plastic sheeting
C. mastic asphalt
D. cement concrete
Answer: A
207. The vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point
on the intrados is called
A. depth
B. rise
C. haunch
D. extrados
Answer: B

208. The piles which do not support the load by themselves, but act as a
medium to transmit the load from the foundation to the resisting sub-
stratum, are known as
A. friction piles
B. bearing piles
C. batter piles
D. compaction piles
Answer: B
o m
.c
t e
209. In the pre-cast reinforced concrete piles,
covering the main bars should not bealess than
the thickness of concrete
q M
A. 40 mm
c
B. 55 mm
M
C. 75 mm
D. 100 mm
Answer: A
210. The width of jambs is
A. 57 mm to 76 mm
B. 76 mm to 114 mm
C. 114 mm to 138 mm
D. 138 mm to 152 mm
Answer: B
211. A screw pile consists of cast iron or steel shaft of external diameter
varying from
A. 0 to 150 mm
B. 150 to 300 mm

C. 300 to 450 mm
D. 450 to 600 mm
Answer: B
212. The slump commonly adopted for concrete for road works is
A. 12 to 25
B. 20 to 28
C. 25 to 50
o m
D. 50 to 100
.c
te
Answer: B
a
q M
213. A steel pile which function more efficiently in soft clay or loose sand,
is c
A. H-pile
M
B. pipe pile
C. screw pile
D. disc pile
Answer: C
214. When a veavy structure is to be constructed in sandy soil, the

foundation used is
A. pier foundation
B. strap foundation
C. raft foundation
D. any one of these
Answer: A
215. High alumina cement is

A. made by fusing together a mixture of lime-stone and bauxite
B. highly resistant to heat, chemical and other corrosive acids
C. used for structures subjected to the action of sea water
D. all of the above
Answer: D
216. The moulding provided under nosing to beautify the elevation of a

step of stair, is called
o m
A. flier
.c
B. soffit
te
a
C. scotia
q M
D. tread
c
Answer: C
M
217. A stretcher bond is usually used for
A. half brick wall
B. one brick wall
C. one and half brick wall
D. two brick wall
Answer: A

PlayStore
o m
.c
te
a
q M
c
M

Building Construction
Question No. 01
Cast iron piles
(A) Are suitable for works under sea water
(B) Resist shocks or vibrations
(C) Are suitable for use as batter piles
(D) Are useful for heavy vertical loads
Answer: Option D
Question No. 02
The form work from the slabs excluding props, can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option B
Question No. 03
The process of filling hollow spaces of walls before plastering, is known
(A) Hacking
(B) Dubbing out
(C) Blistering
(D) Peeling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 04
The type of arch generally constructed over a wooden lintel or over a flat arch for the purpose of
carrying the load of the wall above is
(A) Segmental arch
(B) Pointed arch
(C) Relieving arch
(D) Flat arch
Answer: Option C
Question No. 05
The platform at the end of a series of steps, is known as
(A) Platform
(B) Relief
(C) Rest
(D) Landing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 06
The pile which supports the load due to friction between pile face and surrounding soil, is
generally known as
(A) Bearing pile
(B) Friction pile
(C) Sheet pile
(D) Battered pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 07
(A) A mortar joint having a concave finishing in brick masonry, is called keyed joint
(B) A mortar joint projecting beyond the face of a masonry wall, is called tucked joint
(C) A mortar joint having a recess in it, is called ruled joint
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 08
The type of roof which slopes in two directions with a break in the slope on each side is known as
(A) Gable roof
(B) Hip roof
(C) Gambrel roof
(D) Mansard roof
Answer: Option C
Question No. 09
The inclined surface of an abutment to receive the arch, is known as
(A) Skew back
(B) Soffit
(C) Spandril
(D) Haunch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 10
(A) D.P.C. should be continuous
(B) D.P.C. should be of good impervious material
(C) D.P.C. may be horizontal or vertical
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 11
A wall constructed with stones to protect slopes of cuttings in natural ground from the action of
weathering agents, is called
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option B
Question No. 12
Higher pitch of the roof
(i) Results in stronger roof
(ii) Results in weaker roof
(iii) Requires more covering material
(iv) Requires less covering material
The correct answer is
(A) (i) and (iii)
(B) (i) and (iv)
(C) (ii) and (iii)
(D) (ii) and (iv)
Answer: Option A
Question No. 13
For different layers of cement concrete floor. Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
(A) The lowest layer consists of consolidated ground
(B) A 10 cm thick clean sand is laid on consolidated ground
(C) A 10 cm lime concrete (1 : 4 : 8) is laid on clean sand
(D) A 10 cm thick cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is laid on top layer
Answer: Option D
Question No. 14
Open test pit is only suitable upto a depth of
(A) 2 metres
(B) 2.5 metres
(C) 3 metres
Answer: Option C
Question No. 15
The service area in a building means the area occupied by
(A) Stairs
(B) Toilets
(C) Light and shafts
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 16
The number of steps in a flight generally should not be less than
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 5
(D) No limit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 17
The columns of multi-storeyed buildings are designed to withstand the forces due to
(A) Dead loads
(B) Live loads
(C) Wind loads
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 18
In soils possessing low bearing capacity, the type of foundation generally provided, is
(A) Column footing
(B) Grillage footing
(C) Raft footing
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 19
The minimum strength of the mortar used in load bearing brick masonry, is
(A) 50 N/cm2
(B) 100 N/cm2
(C) 150 N/cm2
(D) 200 N/cm2
Answer: Option B
Question No. 20
As compared to stretcher course, the thickness of joints in header course should be
(A) Less
(B) More
(C) Equal
(D) Equal or more
Answer: Option A
Question No. 21
To obtain good bonding in brick masonry
(A) First class bricks are used
(B) Vertical joints in alternate courses are kept in plumb line
(C) Bats are used where necessary
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 22
The type of pointing in which upper side of mortar joints is kept about 12 mm inside the face of
the masonry and bottom is kept flushed with face of wall, is
(A) Truck pointing
(B) Recessed pointing
(C) Struck pointing
(D) Grooved pointing
Answer: Option C
Question No. 23
The wedge shaped bricks forming an arch ring, are called
(A) Soffits
(B) Voussoirs
(C) Haunches
(D) Spandrils
Answer: Option B
Question No. 24
The maximum total settlement for isolated foundations on clayey soils should be limited to
(A) 25 mm
(B) 40 mm
(C) 65 mm
(D) 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 25
The foundation which consists of a thick reinforced cement slab covering whole area to support
heavy concentrated structural loads, is known as
(B) Strap footing
(C) Raft footing
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 26
For each storey of a building, the depth of exploration should be
(A) 1 metre
(B) 2 metres
(C) 3 metres
(D) 4 metres
Answer: Option C
Question No. 27
(A) Plain cement concrete is equally strong in compression as well as in tension
(B) Slump test is performed to check concrete strength
(C) Curing of concrete is done for proper compaction of cement
(D) Fineness modulus is the index number expressing the relative sizes of both coarse and fine
aggregates
Answer: Option D
Question No. 28
The bearing capacity of a water logged soil can be improved by
(A) Compacting the soil
(B) Draining the soil
(C) Increasing the depth of foundation
(D) Grouting
Answer: Option B
Question No. 29
The position of a brick when laid on its side 9 cm × 9 cm with its frog in the vertical plane, is called
(A) Brick on edge
(B) Brick on end
(C) Brick on bed
(D) Brick held vertically
Answer: Option B
Question No. 30
A floor constructed with the 4 to 6 mm marble chips, is known
(A) Reinforced marble floor
(B) Terrazzo floor
(C) Marble floor
(D) Chip floor
Answer: Option B
Question No. 31
A stair should not have pitch more than
(A) 25°
(B) 30°
(C) 40°
(D) 50°
Answer: Option C
Question No. 32
Depth or height of the arch is the
(A) Perpendicular distance between intrados and extrados
(B) Vertical distance between springing line and intrados
(C) Perpendicular distance between springing line and extrados
Answer: Option A
Question No. 33
(A) The pile driven in sand is called sand pile
(B) The drilled hole filled with sand is called sand pile
(C) The sand piles are used for bearing purposes
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 34
A wall constructed to resist the pressure of an earth filling, is called
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option A
Question No. 35
Two columns 50 cm × 50 cm and 60 cm × 60 cm carry 80 tonnes and 120 tonnes of loads
respectively. The centre to centre distance between columns is 5.00 metres. The permissible
bearing capacity of the soil is 20 t/m2. If the footing is not to project more than 25 cm beyond the
outside of the smaller column, pick up the correct design parameters of the footing from the
following:
(A) Distance of C.G. of the loads from the smaller column = 3.00 m
(B) The length of the foundation slab = 7.00 m
(C) Area of footing slab = 11.00 m2
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 36
Pitched and sloping roofs are suitable for
(A) Coastal regions
(B) Plain regions
(C) Covering large areas
Answer: Option A
Question No. 37
A wooden block hinged on post outside a door, is known
(A) Cleat
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 38
If a is the offset of concrete bed in cms, and d is the depth of concrete bed in cms, then
(A) d = 0.445 a
(B) d = 0.557 a
(C) d = 0.775 a
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 39
In high mountainous region, the type of roof generally recommended for buildings, is
(A) Shed type
(B) Gable type
(C) Gambrel type
(D) Mansard type
Answer: Option C
Question No. 40
The function of cleats in a roof truss is
(A) To support the common rafter
(B) To support purlins
(C) To prevent the purlins from tilting
Answer: Option C
Question No. 41
The Auger borings are not common
(A) In soils that require lateral support
(B) In cohesive soils
(C) In soft soils
Answer: Option A
Question No. 42
The pile provided with one or more bulles in its vertical shaft, is generally known as
(A) Under-ream pile
(B) Friction pile
(C) Bearing pile
(D) Sheet pile
Answer: Option A
Question No. 43
(A) Isolated footing is provided under column to transfer the load safely to soil bed
(B) Column footings may have steps or projections in the concrete base
(C) Heavily loaded column base must be provided steel reinforcement in both directions
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 44
In any good staircase, the maximum and minimum pitch respectively should be
(A) 90° and 0°
(B) 75° and 30°
(C) 60° and 10°
(D) 40° and 25°
Answer: Option D
Question No. 45
Raft foundation are generally preferred to when the area required for individual footing, is more
than
(A) 25% to total area
(B) 30% of total area
(C) 40% to total area
(D) 50% of total area
Answer: Option D
Question No. 46
According to National Building Code, the hydrants in water mains is provided at minimum interval
of
(A) 50 m
(B) 60 m
(C) 75 m
(D) 90 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 47
The X-ray rooms are plastered with
(A) Plaster of Paris
(B) Barium plaster
(C) Martin's cement
(D) Keen's cement
Answer: Option B
Question No. 48
The type of footing which is used to transmit heavy loads through steel columns is
(A) Raft foundation
(B) Grillage foundation
(C) Well foundation
(D) Isolated footing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 49
Dutch bond is a modification of
(A) English bond
(B) Stretcher bond
(C) Header bond
(D) Single Flemish bond
Answer: Option A
Question No. 50
In clay soil
(A) Swelling and shrinkage characteristics prevail
(B) Consolidation continues even after several years of construction
(C) Differential settlement is generally prevalent
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 51
Which one of the following activities is not correct as applicable to brick corbels?
(A) The maximum projection of the corbel should not be more than the thickness of the wall
(B) The maximum projection of each corbel course should be limited to a quarter brick at a time
(C) The discontinuous corbels are used to carry heavy concentrated loads
(D) Stretcher bond is generally used for the construction of brick corbel
Answer: Option D
Question No. 52
In ordinary residential and public buildings, the damp proof course is generally provided at
(A) Ground level
(B) Plinth level
(C) Water table level
(D) Midway ground level and water-table level
Answer: Option B
Question No. 53
In which of the following pairs both trees yield soft wood?
(A) Deodar and Shishum
(B) Chir and sal
(C) Sal and teak
(D) Chir and deodar
Answer: Option D
Question No. 54
The raft slab is projected beyond the outer walls of the structure by
(A) 5 to 10 cm
(B) 15 to 20 cm
(C) 25 to 30 cm
(D) 30 to 45 cm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 55
In grillage foundations, distance between flanges of grillage beams, is kept
(A) 40 cm
(B) Equal to flange width
(C) Twice the flange width
(D) Maximum of (a), (b) and (c)
Answer: Option C
Question No. 56
The sill of a common wooden partition is
(A) Vertical wooden member on either end
(C) Upper horizontal wooden member
(D) Intermediate horizontal wooden member
Answer: Option B
Question No. 57
The important test to be conducted on a stone used in docks and harbours is
(A) Hardness test
(B) Workability test
(C) Weight test
(D) Toughness test
Answer: Option C
Question No. 58
The member which is placed horizontally to support common rafter of a sloping roof, is
(A) Purlin
(B) Cleat
(C) Batten
(D) Strut
Answer: Option A
Question No. 59
A covering of concrete placed on the exposed top of an external wall, is known as
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option B
Question No. 60
The bond in which headers and stretchers are laid in alternate courses and every stretcher course
is started with a three fourth brick bat, is known as
(A) English cross bond
(B) Dutch bond
(C) Monk bond
(D) Rat-trap bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 61
The vertical distance between the springing line and highest point of the inner curve of an arch is
known as
(A) Intrados
(B) Rise
(C) Spandril
(D) Extrados
Answer: Option B
Question No. 62
The entrained concrete is used in lining walls and roofs for making
(A) Heat insulated
(B) Sound insulated
(C) Neither (a) nor (b)
(D) Both (a) and (b)
Answer: Option D
Question No. 63
The depth of concrete bed of the foundation depends upon
(A) The projection of the concrete block beyond the footing over it
(B) The upward soil pressure
(C) The mix of the concrete
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 64
A pre-stressed concrete pile is
(A) Easy to handle
(B) Lighter in weight
(C) Extremely durable
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 65
The type of joint commonly used at the junction of a principal rafter and tie beam in timber
trusses is
(A) Mortise and tenon joint
(B) Oblique mortise and tenon joint
(C) Butt joint
(D) Mitred joint
Answer: Option B
Question No. 66
During percussion drilling
(A) Ground water observations are hindered due to entry of the slurry in the soil below the
bottom of the hole
(B) Caving or mixing of strata are caused in soft soils or cohesionless soils
(C) The soil to a considerable depth below the bottom of the hole gets disturbed
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 67
The type of stone masonry in which stones of same height are laid in layers, is called
(B) Course rubble masonry
(C) Uncoursed rubble masonry
(D) Ashlar masonry
Answer: Option B
Question No. 68
A wooden block fixed on back side of a door frame on its post, is known as
(A) Cleat
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 69
In a colar beam roof
(A) There is no horizontal tie beam
(B) There is a horizontal tie at the feet of rafters only
(C) There is a horizontal tie at almost the middle of rafters only
(D) There are two horizontal ties, one at the feet and other at the middle of the rafters
Answer: Option C
Question No. 70
The piece of a brick cut with its one corner equivalent to half the length and half the width of a full
brick, is known as
(A) Queen closer
(B) Bevelled closer
(C) King closer
(D) Half king closer
Answer: Option C
Question No. 71
For effective drainage, the finished surface of flat roof should have a minimum slope of
(A) 1 in 20
(B) 1 to 50
(C) 1 in 10
(D) 1 in 5
Answer: Option A
Question No. 72
Vertical construction joints are provided where the shearing forces are minimum in the case of
(A) Slabs
(B) Beams
(C) Girders
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 73
Single Flemish bond consists of
(A) Double Flemish bond facing and English bond backing in each course
(B) English bond facing and double Flemish bond backing in each course
(C) Stretcher bond facing and double Flemish bond backing in each course
(D) Double Flemish bond facing and header bond backing in each course
Answer: Option A
Question No. 74
The foundations are placed below ground level, to increase
(A) Strength
(B) Workability
(C) Stability of structure
(D) All the above
Answer: Option C
Question No. 75
The type of bond in a brick masonry containing alternate courses of stretchers and headers, is
called
(A) Flemish bond
(B) English bond
(C) Stretcher bond
(D) Header bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 76
The width of the hollow space between two walls of a cavity wall should not exceed
(A) 5 cm
(B) 7.5 cm
(C) 10 cm
(D) 15 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 77
The predominant constituent which is responsible for strength in granite is
(A) Quartz
(B) Felspar
(C) Mica
Answer: Option A
Question No. 78
To ensure that supporting area of an offset footing of a boundary wall is fully compressive, the
C.G. of load must act
(A) At the centre of the base
(B) Within the middle third of the base
(C) Within the middle fifth of the base
(D) Neither (a), (b) nor (c)
Answer: Option B
Question No. 79
The size of a floor tile commonly used, is
(A) 15 cm × 15 cm × 1.8 cm
(B) 20 cm × 20 cm × 2 cm
(C) 22.5 × 22.5 cm × 2.2 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 80
The art of bringing the floor to a true level surface by means of screeds, is called
(A) Topping
(B) Bedding
(C) Screeding
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 81
The type of roof suitable in plains where rainfall is meagre and temperature is high is
(A) Pitched and sloping roof
(B) Flat roof
(C) Shell roof
Answer: Option B
Question No. 82
For constructing a terrazzo floor, Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
(A) A base course is prepared as in cement concrete flooring
(B) A 32 mm thick layer of cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is laid on the base course and the surface
is made smooth by trowelling
(C) Glass strips are driven into the layer according to the pattern required
(D) After final grinding is over, oxalic acid mixed with water is spread over and rubbed hard with
soft material
Answer: Option B
Question No. 83
The arrangement made to support an unsafe structure temporarily, is known as
(A) Shoring
(B) Scaffolding
(C) Underpinning
(D) Jacking
Answer: Option A
Question No. 84
The type of pointing in which a V-shaped projection outside the wall surface, is provided, is called
(A) Recessed pointing
(B) Weather pointing
(C) V-pointing
(D) Tuck pointing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 85
Assertion A : Shishum is used for decorative woodwork.
Reason R : Shishum can be polished to an excellent finish.
Select your answer according to the coding system given below:
(A) Both A and R is true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R is true but R is not the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false but R is true
Answer: Option A
Question No. 86
Rotary drilling
(A) Is not suitable for deposits containing very coarse gravel
(B) Hinders the ground water observations and permeability test
(C) Is not economical for holes of less than 10 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 87
Safe bearing capacity of black cotton soil varies from
(A) 2 to 3 t/m2
(B) 5 to 7.5 t/m2
(C) 8 to 10 t/m2
(D) 10 to 12 t/m2
Answer: Option B
Question No. 88
The window which projects outside a room of a building for admitting more light and air, is known
(A) Bay window
(B) Casement window
(C) Lantern window
(D) Dormer window
Answer: Option A
Question No. 89
In the construction of arches, sand box method is used for
(A) Centring
(B) Actual laying of arch work
(C) Striking of centring
Answer: Option C
Question No. 90
In English garden wall bond
(A) One course of headers to three or five course of stretchers
(B) Queen closer in provided in each heading course
(C) The middle course of stretchers is started with a header to give proper vertical joints
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 91
The concrete slump recommended for foundations, is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 30 to 125 mm
(C) 50 to 100 mm
(D) 75 to 125 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 92
(A) In a king post truss, principal rafter and tie beams are jointed together with a bridle joint
(B) Joint between the principal rafter and the king post is made by making tenon and mortise
respectively
(C) Joint between strut and king post, is generally of mortise and tenon type
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 93
Sum of tread and rise must lie between
(A) 300 to 350 mm
(B) 400 to 450 mm
(C) 500 to 550 mm
(D) 600 to 650 mm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 94
In case of foundations on sandy soil, maximum permissible differential settlement, is usually
limited to
(A) 15 mm
(B) 25 mm
(C) 35 mm
(D) 45 mm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 95
In soft clay of low bearing capacity, the type of steel pile generally used, is
(A) H-pile
(B) Screw pile
(C) Disc pile
(D) Pipe pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 96
Gravels
(A) Are cohesionless aggregates
(B) Vary in size between 2 to 20 mm
(C) Never swell when they come into contact with water
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 97
The differential settlement in case of foundations on sandy soils should not exceed
(A) 25 mm
(B) 40 mm
(C) 65 mm
(D) 100 mm
Answer: Option A
Question No. 98
An arch constructed with finely dressed stones, is known
(A) Ashlar arch
(B) Rubble arch
(C) Gauged arch
(D) Axed arch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 99
(A) Lime mortar with cement in the ratio of in 10 is cheaper and better for outside plaster
(B) For very cold or very hot climate, a compact and closed plan should be provided
(C) On the sea coast, an exposed and open house is generally preferred
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 100

Weep holes are provided in retaining and breast walls
(A) To drain off the water from the filling
(B) To ventilate the stone masonry
(C) To add architectural beauty
(D) To increase compaction of the earth retained
Answer: Option A
Question No. 101

The radial splits which are wider on the outside of the log and narrower towards the pith are
known as
(A) Heart shakes
(B) Cupshakes
(C) Starshakes
(D) Rindgalls
Answer: Option C
Question No. 102

The angular steps used for changing direction of the stairs, are called
(A) Round steps
(B) Angular steps
(C) Winders
(D) Radial steps
Answer: Option C
Question No. 103
The concrete slump recommended for columns, is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 25 to 75 mm
(C) 75 to 125 mm
(D) 50 to 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 104

The minimum width of a stair in residential buildings, is
(A) 55 cm
(B) 70 cm
(C) 85 cm
(D) 100 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 105

The function of king post in a king post roof truss is
(A) To support the frame work of the roof
(B) To receive the ends of principal rafter
(C) To prevent the walls from spreading outward
(D) To prevent the tie beam from sagging at its centre
Answer: Option D
Question No. 106

The dimensions of a half queen closer, are
(A) 9 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
(B) 9 cm × 9 cm × 4.5 cm
(C) 9 cm × 4.5 cm × 9 cm
(D) 1.8 cm × 4.5 cm × 9 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 107

For plastering the exposed brick walls, the cement sand mortar should be
(A) 1 : 2
(B) 1 : 3
(C) 1 : 4
(D) 1 : 6
Answer: Option C
Question No. 108

The stone blocks approximately triangular in shape, used as steps, are known
(A) Stone steps
(B) Built up steps
(C) Spandril steps
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 109

As compared to English bond, double Flemish bond is
(A) Stronger
(B) More compact
(C) Costly
Answer: Option B
Question No. 110

(A) The cost of square rooms is less
(B) The expenditure on the foundation and roof for the double storeyed building is nearly half of
that for the ground storeyed building
(C) The cost of construction of a house may be minimised by restricting the height floors
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 111

In the method of tube boring of soil investigation, the following is essential:
(A) A tube of about 2 metres length and 20 cm diameter with a cutting edge
(B) A flap valve at the bottom of tube is provided to extract the soil sample
(C) The tube is raised and lowered by 4 thick rope moving over a pulley suspended on a tripod
stand
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 112

Slate
(A) Is a metamorphic rock
(B) Splits into thin sheets along its bedding planes
(C) Has a smooth surface and contains alumina and silica
(D) Possesses good water absorption capacity
Answer: Option A
Question No. 113

The minimum depth of foundation in clayey soils is
(A) 0.5 m
(B) 0.7 m
(C) 0.9 m
(D) 1.2 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 114
In case of Raymond pile
(A) Lengths vary from 6 m to 12 m
(B) Diameter of top of piles varies from 40 cm to 60 cm
(C) Diameter of pile at bottom varies from 20 cm to 28 cm
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 115

Herringbone bond is used for
(A) Walls having thickness more than 4 bricks
(B) Architectural finish to the face work
(C) Ornamental panels in brick flooring
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 116

Suitable spacing of timber piles, is
(A) 50 cm
(B) 60 cm
(C) 80 cm
(D) 90 cm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 117

The disease of dry rot in timber is caused by
(A) Lack of ventilation
(B) Alternate wet and dry conditions
(C) Complete submergence in water
Answer: Option A
Question No. 118

(A) Louvered door is generally provided in bath rooms
(B) Flush door is generally provided in dining room
(C) Revolving door is generally provided in cinema halls
(D) Sliding door is generally provided in show rooms
Answer: Option C
Question No. 119

The minimum distance between the centres of bulb of diameter du, of a multi under reamed piles,
is
(A) du
(B) 1.25 du
(C) 1.5 du
(D) 1.75 du
Answer: Option C
Question No. 120

The stone masonry of finely dressed stones laid in cement or lime, is
(B) Coursed rubble masonry
(C) Dry rubble masonry
(D) Ashlar masonry
Answer: Option D
Question No. 121

The vertical posts placed at the top and bottom ends of a flight supporting the hand rail are known
as
(A) Balusters
(B) Newel posts
(C) Balustrades
(D) Railings
Answer: Option B
Question No. 122

(A) The function of foundation is to distribute the load of super structure over a large bearing
area
(B) No timbering is required for shallow trenches
(C) Shallow foundations can be constructed on made-up soil
(D) Black cotton soil is very good for foundation bed
Answer: Option D
Question No. 123

For the construction of flyovers in sandy soils, the type of foundation provided, is
(A) Strap footing
(B) Raft footing
(D) Pier footing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 124

For a rectangular foundation of width b, eccentricity of load should not exceed
(A) b/2
(B) b/3
(C) b/4
(D) b/6
Answer: Option D
Question No. 125
The type of pile which is driven at an inclination to resist inclined forces is known as
(A) Friction pile
(B) Sheet pile
(C) Batter pile
(D) Anchor pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 126

The maximum bearing capacity of soil is that of
(A) Black cotton soil
(B) Loose fine sandy soil
(C) Dry coarse sandy soil
(D) Hard rocks
Answer: Option D
Question No. 127

(A) Cavity of a cavity wall should start near ground level
(B) Cavity of a cavity wall should terminate near eaves level of sloping roof
(C) Cavity of a cavity wall should terminate near coping of flat roof with parapet wall
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 128

The thickness of a reinforced brick partition wall, is generally kept
(A) 5 cm
(B) 10 cm
(C) 15 cm
(D) 20 cm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 129

The term string is used for
(A) The underside of a stair
(B) Outer projecting edge of a tread
(C) A sloping member which supports the steps in a stair
(D) A vertical member between two treads
Answer: Option C
Question No. 130

(A) Stretcher
(B) Face
(C) Front
(D) Header
Answer: Option A
Question No. 131

The steel pile which is generally sunk in soft clay or loose sand of low bearing capacity, is
(A) H-pile
(B) Pipe pile
(C) Screw pile
(D) Disc pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 132

Pick up the correct statement about silt soil from the following:
(A) The silt soil has particle size from 0.02 mm to 0.06 mm
(B) In organic fine grained silt soil possesses no plasticity
(C) The least plastic type normally consists of more or less equidimensional grains of quartz
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 133

The type of flooring suitable for use in churches, theatres, public libraries and other places where
noiseless floor covering is desired is
(A) Cork flooring
(B) Glass flooring
(C) Wooden flooring
(D) Linoleum flooring
Answer: Option A
Question No. 134

The angle between skew back of a flat arch and the horizontal, is kept approximately equal to
(A) 0°
(B) 30°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°
Answer: Option C
Question No. 135

(A) The sand in the sand pile is well compacted
(B) The sand is kept moist at the time of placing and tamping
(C) Sand piles are generally used under column loads
Answer: Option D
Question No. 136
(A) A combined footing is so proportioned that centre of gravity of supporting area coincides
with centre of gravity of two column loads
(B) A combined footing may be either rectangular or trapezoidal in shape
(C) Trapezoidal shaped footings may be provided under any loading
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 137

Minimum width of landing should be
(A) Equal to width of stairs
(B) Half the width of stairs
(C) Twice the width of stairs
(D) One fourth the width of stairs
Answer: Option A
Question No. 138

For a wall carrying heavy load on low bearing capacity soil,
(A) Lean concrete bed is provided
(B) Thick concrete bed is provided
(C) Reinforced concrete bed is provided
Answer: Option D
Question No. 139

While investigating the site, a thick layer of fairly firm clay over a deep layer of soft clay is
encountered. In such a situation, the following type of foundation is useful:
(A) Pile formation
(B) Raft foundation
(C) Grillage foundation
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 140

The type of arch used for high class buildings where appearance is of prime importance, is known
as
(A) Ashlar arch
(B) Rubble arch
(C) Gauged brick arch
(D) Axed brick arch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 141

Mansard roof is a roof which slopes in
(A) Two directions without break in the slope on each side
(B) Two directions with break in the slope on each side
(C) Four directions without break in the slope on each side
(D) Four directions with break in the slope on each side
Answer: Option D
Question No. 142

If is the angle of repose of soil of weight w kg/m3, the horizontal pressure p at a depth
of h metres per metre length of wall, is
(A) wh × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]
(B) (wh/2) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]
(C) wh - sin )/(1 + )]
(D) wh )/(1 - )]
Answer: Option A
Question No. 143

Pick up the correct specification of one-room quarters generally adopted from the following:
(A) Six quarters in a row
(B) The size of room is either 3.5 m × 3 m or 4.2 m × 2.5 m
(C) The front verandah is kept 2 m wide
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 144

The piece of a brick cut along the centre of width in such a way that its length is equal to that of
full brick, is called
(A) Half brick
(B) Queen closer
(C) King closer
(D) Bevelled closer
Answer: Option B
Question No. 145

Number of vertical joints in a stretcher course is x times the number of joints in the header course,
where x is equal to
(A) 1/2
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 1/4
Answer: Option A
Question No. 146

The process of keeping concrete moist for a certain period after its finishing, is known as
(A) Finishing of concrete
(B) Curing of concrete
(C) Placing of concrete
(D) Compaction of concrete
Answer: Option B
Question No. 147

The inner section of a cavity wall, is generally known as
(A) Buttress
(B) Leaf wall
(C) Pilaster
(D) Pillar
Answer: Option B
Question No. 148

(A) Sand consists of coarse particles of silica formed due to the disintegration of rocks
(B) The grains of sand are not affected by frost
(C) Sand beds are permeable and do not allow water to rise up between pores due to capillary
action
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 149

The lintels are preferred to arches because
(A) Arches require more headroom to span the openings like doors, windows etc.
(B) Arches require strong abutments to withstand arch thrust
(C) Arches are difficult in construction
Answer: Option D
Question No. 150

Cavity wall is generally provided for
(A) Heat insulation
(B) Sound insulation
(C) Prevention of dampness
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 151

The construction joints in buildings are provided after
(A) 10 m
(B) 15 m
(C) 20 m
(D) 40 m
Answer: Option D
Question No. 152
A pointed arch which forms isosceles or equilateral triangle, is generally known as
(A) Three centred arch
(B) Two centred arch
(C) Lancet arch
(D) Bull's eye arch
Answer: Option C
Question No. 153

In case of foundations on black cotton soils, the most suitable method to increase the bearing
capacity of soils is to
(A) Increase the depth of foundation
(B) Drain the soil
(C) Compact the soil
(D) Replace the poor soil
Answer: Option D
Question No. 154

Depth of lean concrete bed placed at the bottom of a wall footing, is kept
(A) 10 cm
(B) 15 cm
(C) Equal to its projection beyond wall base
(D) Less than its projection beyond wall base
Answer: Option C
Question No. 155

The sound which continues even after its source is cut off, is called
(A) Reverberation
(B) Echo
(C) Intensity of sound
(D) Interference
Answer: Option A
Question No. 156

(A) The bearing capacity of a pile is defined as the load which can be sustained by the pile
without producing excessive settlement
(B) The safe bearing capacity of a pile is obtained by dividing the ultimate bearing capacity with
a suitable factor of safety
(C) The factor of safety for piles is taken as 6
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 157

The maximum total settlement for raft foundation on clayey soils should be limited to
(A) 25 mm
(B) 25 to 40 mm
(C) 40 to 65 mm
(D) 65 to 100 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 158

Which one of the following rocks is used for monumental buildings?
(A) Granite
(B) Marble
(C) Sand stone
(D) Slate
Answer: Option B
Question No. 159

Pick up the consideration to the taken while designing a hospital from the following:
(A) The operation theatre unit to be detached as it requires sterilized zone but near the ward for
the patients and doctor
(B) The mortuary should be detached from the main circulation with a post-mortem room
(C) Casualty unit should be provided a separate entrance
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 160

The members which support covering material of a sloping roof, are
(A) Rafters
(B) Purlins
(C) Battens
(D) Struts
Answer: Option A
Question No. 161

The triangular space formed between the extrados and the horizontal line drawn through the
crown of an arch is known as
(A) Haunch
(B) Spandril
(C) Voussoirs
(D) Skewbacks
Answer: Option B
Question No. 162

For providing a raft foundation, the following activities are involved
1. Ramming the foundation bed
2. Excavation of the soil upto required depth
3. Laying the reinforcement over the foundation bed
4. Curing the cement concrete placed over reinforcement
5. Pouring the cement concrete over the reinforcement
The correct sequence is
(A) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
(B) 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
(C) 2, 1, 3, 5, 4
(D) 3, 2, 5, 1, 4
Answer: Option C
Question No. 163

The stone whose crushing strength is maximum, is
(A) Granite
(B) Chalk
(C) Slate
(D) Sand stone
Answer: Option A
Question No. 164

Brick nogging type of partition wall, is constructed by
(A) Laying bricks as stretchers in cement mortar
(B) Laying bricks as headers in cement mortar
(C) Reinforcing brick wall with iron straps
(D) Constructing brick work within a wooden framework
Answer: Option D
Question No. 165

Couple close roof is suitable for maximum span of
(A) 2.5 m
(B) 3.5 m
(C) 4.5 m
(D) 5.5 m
Answer: Option C
Question No. 166

A solid core of rock is formed inside the cylinder in the case of
(A) Auger boring
(B) Percussion drilling
(C) Diamond drilling
(D) Wash boring
Answer: Option C
Question No. 167

The floor is rubbed with oxalic acid, for making its surface
(A) Free from voids
(B) Glossy
(C) Durable
(D) Uniform
Answer: Option B
Question No. 168

The line of intersection of two surfaces of a sloping roof forming an internal angle less than 180°, is
known as
(A) Ridge
(B) Hip
(C) Valley
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 169

In which of the following directions, the strength of timber is maximum?
(A) Parallel to grains
(B) 45° to grains
(C) Perpendicular to grains
(D) Same in all directions
Answer: Option A
Question No. 170

Arches in the form of masonry arcs struck from more than four centres, are called
(A) Two curved arches
(B) Gothic arches
(C) Ogee arches
(D) Drop gothic arches
Answer: Option C
Question No. 171

(A) Horizontal D.P.C. is provided at plinth level in internal walls
(B) D.P.C. is provided under door and verandah openings
(C) Vertical D.P.C. is not provided in internal walls
(D) Cement concrete is a rigid damp-proofing material
Answer: Option B
Question No. 172

The vertical faces of a door opening which support frame of the door, are
(A) Jambs
(B) Posts
(C) Reveals
(D) Styles
Answer: Option A
Question No. 173
The lower edge of the pitched roof, from where the rain water of the roof surface drops down, is
known as
(A) Hip
(B) Gable
(C) Ridge
(D) Eaves
Answer: Option D
Question No. 174

The arrangement of supporting an existing structure by providing supports underneath, is known
as
(A) Shoring
(B) Underpinning
(C) Jacking
(D) Piling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 175

(A) The first coat of stucco plaster is called scratch coat
(B) The second coat of stucco plaster is called brown coat
(C) The third coat of stucco plaster is called white coat
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 176

A concrete structure is set on fire and the temperature raises to 1000°C. The strength of concrete
as compared to original strength reduces to
(A) 10 %
(B) 15 %
(C) 20 %
(D) 25 %
Answer: Option C
Question No. 177

The horizontal timber piece provided at the apex of a roof truss which supports the common rafter
is called
(A) Ridge board
(B) Hip rafter
(C) Eaves board
(D) Valley rafter
Answer: Option A
Question No. 178

(A) In dog-legged stairs, no space between its flights is provided
(B) In open newel stair, a rectangular well is provided
(C) In geometric stair, a curved shaped well between forward and backward flights, is provided
(D) In geometrical stair, two quarter space landing is provided
Answer: Option D
Question No. 179

The maximum number of steps in a flight should generally be restricted to
(A) 10
(B) 12
(C) 15
(D) No limit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 180

In flat roof of reinforced cement concrete, the recommended angle of slope, is
(A) Zero
(B) A few degrees
(C) 10°
(D) 200°
Answer: Option B
Question No. 181

The process of working a flat for the finishing coat, is known
(A) Dubbing out
(B) Floating
(C) Knitting
(D) Blistering
Answer: Option B
Question No. 182

The highest line of sloping roof, where two opposite slopes meet, is known as
(A) Rafter
(B) Ridge
(C) Crown
(D) Eave
Answer: Option B
Question No. 183

The depth of the ground water table may be ascertained by
(A) Looking through the well in the vicinity
(B) Standing on the well in the vicinity
(C) Measuring the depth of water in the well
Answer: Option C
Question No. 184

Which of the following metal sheets is most effective in preventing dampness?
(A) Copper sheets
(B) Lead sheets
(C) Aluminium sheets
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 185

Under reamed piles are generally used for
(A) Machine foundations
(B) Factory building
(C) Tall structures
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 186

(A) The width of the wall is constructed thicker at the base in a stepped fashion
(B) A long vertical load transferring concrete structure is called a concrete pile
(C) In pile which transfers the load to the soil by the friction between the pile and the
surrounding soil is called friction pile
(D) The pile which transfers the load to a hard rock bed at certain depth is called load bearing
Answer: Option D
Question No. 187

Engineering news formula for obtaining safe bearing capacity of pile for drop hammer, is,
(A) Q = Wh/6 (S + 2.5)
(B) Q = Wh/2.5 (S + 6)
(C) Q = (W × 6)/h (S + 2.5)
(D) Q = (W × 2.5)/6 (S + h)
Answer: Option A
Question No. 188

The rock formed from the solidification of molten matter (magma) is called:
(A) Sedimentary rock
(B) Metamorphic rock
(C) Igneous rock
Answer: Option C
Question No. 189

The maximum permissible deflection of a timber beam supporting a roof, is
(A) L/100
(B) L/150
(C) L/260
(D) L/360
Answer: Option D
Question No. 190

Negative skin friction
(A) Is a downward drag acting on a pile due to downward movement of the surrounding
compressible soil relative to the pile
(B) Develops due to lowering of ground water
(C) Both (a) and (b)
(D) Neither (a) not (b)
Answer: Option C
Question No. 191

The ceiling height of a building is
(A) Between ceiling and ground level
(B) Between ceiling and floor level
(C) Upto roof above ground level
(D) Upto ceiling from the ground level
Answer: Option B
Question No. 192

The skirting/dado in a bath roof should be upto
(A) Ceiling
(B) 15 cm above floor level
(C) 200 cm
(D) Level of the tap
Answer: Option C
Question No. 193

The bearing capacity of piles is determined by
(A) Dynamic formula
(B) Static formula
(C) Pile load tests
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 194

The vertical sides of a door and window openings provided in a wall, are known as
(A) Verticals
(B) Reveals
(C) Jambs
(D) None of these
Answer: Option C
Question No. 195

The type of ashlar masonry in which stones are finely chisel dressed and thickness of joints does
not exceed 3 mm, is
(A) Chamfered ashlar masonry
(B) Ashlar facing masonry
(C) Random coursed ashlar masonry
(D) Coursed ashlar masonry
Answer: Option D
Question No. 196

The form Work including the props can be removed from beams, only after
(A) 3 day
(B) 7 days
(C) 14 days
(D) 21 days
Answer: Option C
Question No. 197

The mortar in which both cement and lime are used as binding materials, is called
(A) Cement mortar
(B) Lime mortar
(C) Fire resistant mortar
(D) Gauged mortar
Answer: Option D
Question No. 198

According to Rankine's formula, minimum depth of foundations, is
(A) (P/w) × [(1 + sin )/(1 - )]²
(B) (P/w) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]²
(C) (P/2w) × [(1 - sin )/(1 + )]²
(D) (P/w) × [(1 + sin )/(1 - )]
Answer: Option B
Question No. 199

To stagger vertical joints in successive courses of a wall, a piece of brick is generally used at the
end of the course, which is known as
(A) Bat
(B) Header
(C) Stretcher
(D) Closer
Answer: Option D
Question No. 200
The bearing capacity of granite is generally
(A) 5 to 10 kg/cm2
(B) 15 to 20 kg/cm2
(C) 30 to 35 kg/cm2
(D) 40 to 45 kg/cm2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 201

In grillage foundations a minimum 15 cm cover is provided on
(A) Upper flange of top tier
(B) Lower beam of lower tier
(C) Ends of external beams
(D) None to these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 202

Stability of an existing structure may be disturbed by
(A) Rising of water table
(B) Vibrations caused by traffic movements
(C) Mining in the neighbourhood
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 203

The Auger boring method is not suitable for
(A) Very hard soil
(B) Cemented soil
(C) Vary soft soil
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 204

Dampness causes
(A) Efflorescence
(B) Bleaching of paints
(C) Crumbling of plaster
(D) Growth of termites
Answer: Option D
Question No. 205

The pile which supports the load partly by friction and partly by resting on hard stratum, is called
(A) Friction pile
(B) Bearing pile
(C) Friction bearing pile
(D) Rough pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 206

An ordinary concrete may be made water proof by adding
(A) Pudlo
(B) Impermo
(C) Snowcem
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 207

The opening provided in sloping roof with its top parallel to the roof surface, is called
(A) Dormer window
(B) Sky light window
(C) Lantern window
(D) Louvered window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 208

(A) The roof slabs of multi-storeyed buildings are constructed monolithically to carry the various
floor loads
(B) The beams of multi-storeyed buildings rest on girders and are the main load transferring
members to the columns
(C) The slab is spanned across the secondary beams provided between the main beams
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 209

The window which is provided in flat roof of a room, is known
(A) Dormer window
(B) Lantern window
(C) Louvered window
(D) Sky window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 210

Grillage foundation
(A) Is used to transfer heavy structural loads from steel columns to a soil having low bearing
capacity
(B) Is light and economical
(C) Does not require deep cutting as the required base area with required pressure intensity is
obtained at a shallow depth
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 211

Pick up the correct statements from the following:
(A) Cracks appear on the plastered surface in the form of hair cracks
(B) In brick work, the efflorescence is removed by applying a solution of zinc sulphate and water
(C) Excessive thermal variations in the backing or plaster causes the plaster to fall
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 212

The window which is provided on a sloping roof of a building, is called
(A) Lantern window
(B) Dormer window
(C) Louvered window
(D) Rash window
Answer: Option B
Question No. 213

The single stage well point system of dewatering an excavation can be used if the depth of
excavation does not exceed
(A) 5 m
(B) 10 m
(C) 15 m
(D) 20 m
Answer: Option A
Question No. 214

The nominal thickness of one brick wall in mm, is
(A) 90 mm
(B) 150 mm
(C) 190 mm
(D) 200 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 215

(A) The retaining wall should be structurally capable to resist the applied earth pressure
(B) The section of the retaining wall should be so proportioned that it may not overturn by the
lateral pressure
(C) The retaining wall should be safe against sliding
(D) To drain off water from the earth retained, weep holes are provided near the top of the
retaining wall
Answer: Option D
Question No. 216
The stepped structure provided for lateral support of a structure, is
(A) Retaining wall
(B) Breast wall
(C) Buttress
(D) Parapet wall
Answer: Option C
Question No. 217

Raft foundations are used for:
(A) Providing increased area of foundation over poor bearing capacity of soil
(B) Spanning over small soft or loose pockets
(C) Counter acting the hydrostatic effect
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 218

(A) In Flemish bond, headers and stretchers are laid alternately in the same course
(B) In Flemish bond every header in each course lies centrally over every stretcher of the
underlying course
(C) In English bond, stretchers are laid in every course
(D) In English bond, headers and stretchers are laid in alternate courses
Answer: Option C
Question No. 219

Stud(s) of a common wooden partition
(A) Are vertical wooden members
(B) Is the upper horizontal wooden member
(C) Is the lower horizontal wooden member
(D) Are the intermediate horizontal wooden members
Answer: Option A
Question No. 220

The additional piles which are driven to increase the capacity of supporting loads on vertical piles,
are known
(A) Construction piles
(B) Raking piles
(C) Eccentric piles
(D) Sinking piles
Answer: Option B
Question No. 221

Queen closer may be placed
(A) In header course
(B) In stretcher course
(C) In header course next to first brick
(D) In stretcher course next to first brick
Answer: Option C
Question No. 222

The bearing capacity of a water logged soil, may be improved by
(A) Grouting
(B) Chemical action
(C) Drainage
(D) Compaction
Answer: Option C
Question No. 223

The process of making the back ground rough, before plastering, is
(A) Dubbing
(B) Hacking
(C) Blistering
(D) Peeling
Answer: Option B
Question No. 224

Which one of the following piles has a cast iron shoe even after removal of the hollow cylindrical
steel casing?
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Pedestal pile
(C) Vibro pile
Answer: Option D
Question No. 225

While designing a stair, the product of rise and going is approximately kept equal to
(A) 350
(B) 420
(C) 450
(D) 500
Answer: Option B
Question No. 226

Nogging of a common wooden partition is
(A) Upper horizontal wooden member
(C) Intermediate horizontal wooden member
(D) Vertical wooden member
Answer: Option C
Question No. 227
Which one of the following factors is considered for the orientation of buildings?
(A) The direction of the prevailing winds in the area
(B) The exposure of the walls and roof of the buildings to the rays of sun
(C) The extent up to which the sunrays penetrate with the verandah
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 228

To construct a 10 cm thick partition wall, you will prefer
(A) English bond
(B) Flemish bond
(C) Header bond
(D) Stretcher bond
Answer: Option D
Question No. 229

The strength of brick masonry in 1:6 cement mortar, is
(A) 20 tonnes/m2
(B) 40 tonnes/m2
(C) 50 tonnes/m2
(D) 60 tonnes/m2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 230

The form work from the sides of beams can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option A
Question No. 231

For brick construction, the lime-sand mortar, is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 1 : 3
(D) 1 : 4
Answer: Option B
Question No. 232

The least bearing capacity of soil is that of
(A) Hard rock
(B) Moist clay
(C) Soft rock
(D) Coarse sandy soil
Answer: Option B
Question No. 233

The maximum permissible differential settlement, in case of foundations in clayey soil, is usually
limited to
(A) 10 mm
(B) 20 mm
(C) 30 mm
(D) 40 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 234

(A) English bond is used for brick masonry to support heavy loads
(B) Double-Flemish bond is suitable for brick masonry to give uniform face appearance
(C) The stretcher bond is used for the construction of half brick masonry brick
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 235

The black cotton soil
(A) Undergoes volumetric changes
(B) Swells excessively when wet
(C) Shrinks excessively when dry
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 236

A cut in frame of a door to receive the shutter, is called
(A) Louver
(B) Stop
(C) Horn
(D) Rebate
Answer: Option D
Question No. 237

The loose pockets in soil mass can be bridged safely by providing a raft foundation provided the
soft area is smaller than
(A) The column spacing
(B) One-third the column spacing
(C) Half the column spacing
(D) Three-fourth the column spacing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 238
(A) In king post truss, one vertical post is used
(B) In a queen post truss, one vertical post is used
(C) In a queen post truss, two vertical posts are used
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 239

The pile which is provided with a bulb filled with concrete at its lower end, is known as
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Mac-Arthur pile
(C) Raymond pile
(D) Franki pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 240

Ornamental moulded course placed on the top of a wall, is
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option A
Question No. 241

(A) Cement is added to lime mortar to increase its hydraulic properties only
(B) Lime surkhi mortar is used for pointing the walls
(C) Lime should be slaked before preparing lime mortar
(D) High early strength concrete is generally used in cold weather
Answer: Option A
Question No. 242

Pile foundation is generally provided if soil is
(A) Compressible
(B) Water logged
(C) Made up
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 243

Bearing capacity of soils cannot be improved by
(A) Draining sub-soil water
(B) Ramming crushed stone in soil
(C) Driving sand piles
(D) Watering surface of soil
Answer: Option D
Question No. 244

Rotary drilling is the fastest method in case of
(A) Rocky soils
(B) Clay soils
(C) Sandy soil
(D) All of these
Answer: Option D
Question No. 245

The concrete slump recommended for beams and slabs; is
(A) 25 to 50 mm
(B) 25 to 75 mm
(C) 30 to 125 mm
(D) 50 to 100 mm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 246

The alignment of a cross joint along the plumb line is
(A) Bed block
(B) Perpend
(C) Lintel
(D) Vertical line
Answer: Option B
Question No. 247

A projecting piece usually provided to support a truss, is
(A) Cornice
(B) Coping
(C) Frieze
(D) Lintel
Answer: Option C
Question No. 248

Best type of piles for soft soil having little resistance to the flow of concrete, is
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Vibro pile
(C) Raymond pile
(D) Franki pile
Answer: Option B
Question No. 249

The form work from the underside of slabs, can be removed only after
(A) 1 day
(B) 4 days
(C) 7 days
(D) 14 days
Answer: Option C
Question No. 250

Couple roof is used for spans
(A) 3.5 m or less
(B) 3.5 m but less than 5 m
(C) 5 m but less than 6.5 m
(D) 6.5 m but less than 8 m
Answer: Option A
Question No. 251

For heavy embankments and dams, of height h, the depth of exploration of soil should not be less
than
(A) h/4
(B) 1/2 h
(C) h
(D) 2 h
Answer: Option D
Question No. 252

The vertical member running through middle of a shutter frame, is
(A) Style
(B) Reveal
(C) Mullion
(D) Post
Answer: Option C
Question No. 253

The lower half portion between crown and skew back of the arch, is called
(A) Spandril
(B) Haunch
(C) Springing
(D) Soffit
Answer: Option B
Question No. 254

An arch may fail due to
(A) Uneven settlement of abutments
(B) Sliding of voussoirs
(C) Crushing of the material
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 255

The exterior angle between outer faces of a wall, is known as
(A) Turn
(B) Junction
(C) Quion
(D) All the above
Answer: Option C
Question No. 256

The minimum thickness of walls built in cement mortar (1 : 6) for a single storey building, is
(A) 10 cm
(B) 15 cm
(C) 20 cm
(D) 25 cm
Answer: Option C
Question No. 257

Pick up the commonly adopted geophysical method in civil engineering from the following:
(A) The seismic method
(B) Electrical resistivity method
(C) Gravitational method
(D) Both (a) and (b) of the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 258

If height of the first storey of a building is 3.2 m and riser is 13 cm, the number of treads required,
is
(A) 12
(B) 18
(C) 24
(D) 25
Answer: Option C
Question No. 259

Dado is usually provided in
(A) Dining halls
(B) Bath rooms
(C) Living rooms
(D) Verandah
Answer: Option B
Question No. 260

A roof which slopes in four directions, is called
(A) Shed roof
(B) Gable end roof
(C) Hipped roof
(D) Gambrel roof
Answer: Option C
Question No. 261

The taper of precast concrete pile should not be more than
(A) 1 cm per metre length
(B) 2 cm per metre length
(C) 4 cm per metre length
(D) 5 cm per metre length
Answer: Option B
Question No. 262

If the depth of an excavation is 20 metres, number of single stage well points to be installed at
various levels, is
(A) 5
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 2
Answer: Option C
Question No. 263

In case of multi-storeyed buildings, the forms to be removed first are
(A) Sides of beams and girders
(B) Column forms
(C) Bottom of beams and girders
(D) All the above at the same time
Answer: Option A
Question No. 264

The vertical members fixed between steps and hand rail, are known
(A) Balusters
(B) Strings
(C) Newel posts
(D) Soffits
Answer: Option A
Question No. 265

The depth of an arch is the distance between
(A) Ground level and springing line
(B) Crown and springing line
(C) Crown and ground level
(D) Intrados and extrados
Answer: Option D
Question No. 266

The nominal thickness of an expansion joint in brick walls, is kept more than
(A) 5 mm
(B) 10 mm
(C) 15 mm
(D) 20 mm
Answer: Option D
Question No. 267

Exposed portions of vertical surface at right angles to the door or window frame, are known as
(A) Jambs
(B) Lintels
(C) Reveals
(D) Soffits
Answer: Option C
Question No. 268

The projections of head or sill of a door or window frame are
(A) Transoms
(B) Horns
(C) Stops
(D) Chocks
Answer: Option B
Question No. 269

The line of intersection of the surfaces of a sloping roof forming an external angle exceeding 180°,
is
(A) Ridge
(B) Hip
(C) Valley
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 270

The depth of excavation of foundations, is generally measured with a
(A) Ranging rod
(B) Steel tape
(C) Levelling staff
(D) Boning rod
Answer: Option D
Question No. 271

(A) Stretcher
(B) Face
(C) Front
(D) Header
Answer: Option D
Question No. 272

The range of spread from the wall base to outer edge of a brick work foundation does not exceed
(A) 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical
(B) 2/3 horizontal to 1 vertical
(C) 1 horizontal to 1 vertical
(D) 2 horizontals to 1 vertical
Answer: Option C
Question No. 273

The foundation in which a cantilever beam is provided to join two footings, is known as
(A) Strip footing
(B) Strap footing
(D) Raft footing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 274

Auger boring
(A) Is the most primitive method for making a hole in the ground
(B) Is generally employed in cohesive and other self soils above water table
(C) Is most economical upto a depth of 5 metres
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 275

In horizontal D.P.C, thickness of cement concrete (1 : 2 : 4) is
(A) 2 cm
(B) 4 cm
(C) 6 cm
(D) 8 cm
Answer: Option B
Question No. 276

The triangular portion between any two adjacent arches and the tangent to their crowns, is
(A) Haunch
(B) Spandril
(C) Soffit
(D) Rise
Answer: Option B
Question No. 277
The compaction of concrete in the drilled pile hole is done by compressed air in the case of
(A) Simplex pile
(B) Franki pile
(C) Pressure pile
(D) Vibro pile
Answer: Option C
Question No. 278

Pile foundations are suitable for
(A) Water logged soils
(B) Soft rocks
(C) Compact soils
(D) Multi-storeyed buildings
Answer: Option A
Question No. 279

(A) Inclined borings are made for taking samples under existing structures
(B) Inclined borings are occasionally used instead of vertical holes
(C) The spacing of inclined borings is kept such that one bore hole is vertically above the bottom
of an adjacent bore hole
(D) All the above
Answer: Option D
Question No. 280

The inclined support at the ends of treads and rises of a stair, is known as
(A) Baluster
(B) Header
(C) String
(D) Beam
Answer: Option C
Question No. 281

The brick laid with its breadth parallel to the face of a wall, is known as
(A) Header
(B) Stretcher
(C) Closer
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 282

The voussoir placed at crown of an arch, is known as a
(A) Key
(B) Soffit
(C) Springer
(D) Haunch
Answer: Option A
Question No. 283

In places where the soil is soft and has small resistance to the flow of concrete, which one of the
following types of piles, is used
(A) Vibro pile
(B) Pressure pile
(C) Franki pile
(D) Pedestal pile
Answer: Option A
Question No. 284

Crown is located at
(A) Highest point on the extrados of the arch
(B) Highest point on the intrados of the arch
(C) Skew-back of the arch
(D) None of these
Answer: Option A
Question No. 285

The under surface of an arch, is called
(A) Soffit
(B) Intrados
(C) Haunch
(D) Back
Answer: Option A
Question No. 286

The brick laid with its length parallel to the face of a wall, is a known as
(A) Header
(B) Stretcher
(C) Closer
(D) None of these
Answer: Option B
Question No. 287

You are asked to design and supervise a truss for a factory to have spans 6 m to 9 m. The type of
the truss you will use, is
(A) Mansard truss
(B) Queen post truss
(C) King post truss
(D) Collar truss
Answer: Option C
Question No. 288
In verandah floors outward slope is
(A) 1 in 40
(B) 1 in 50
(C) 1 in 60
(D) 1 in 70
Answer: Option C
Question No. 289

In jack arch floor, the rise is kept
(A) 1/6th of the span
(B) 1/8th of the span
(C) 1/10th of the span
(D) 1/12th of the span
Answer: Option D
Question No. 290

The method of moving each brick through a small horizontal distance before it is finally laid in any
brick wall and pressing it by means of brick hammer, is known as
(A) Trowelling
(B) Laying
(C) Grouting
(D) Placing
Answer: Option B
Question No. 291

Black cotton soil is unsuitable for foundations because its
(A) Bearing capacity is low
(B) Permeability is uncertain
(C) Particles are cohesive
(D) Property to undergo a volumetric change due to variation of moisture content
Answer: Option D
Question No. 292

A temporary rigid structure having platforms to enable masons to work at different stages of a
building, is known as
(A) Scaffolding
(B) Dead shore
(C) Raking shore
(D) Under pinning
Answer: Option A
Question No. 293

A floor constructed with 3 mm marble chips, is known
(A) Mosaic floor
(B) Terrazzo floor
(C) Chips floor
(D) Marble floor
Answer: Option B
Question No. 294

The local swelling of a finished plaster, is termed
(A) Cracking
(B) Dubbing
(C) Blistering
(D) Hacking
Answer: Option C
Question No. 295

Expansion joints in masonry walls are provided if length exceeds
(A) 10 m
(B) 20 m
(C) 30 m
(D) 40 m
Answer: Option D
Question No. 296

The stone whose crushing strength is least, is
(A) Granite
(B) Chalk
(C) Marble
(D) Slate
Answer: Option B
Question No. 297

The portion of a brick cut across the width, is called
(A) Closer
(B) Half brick
(C) Bed
(D) Bat
Answer: Option D
Question No. 298

The type of bond in which every course contains both headers and stretchers, is called
(A) English bond
(B) Flemish bond
(C) Russian band
(D) Mixed bond
Answer: Option B
Question No. 299
To support a heavy structure in sandy soil, the type of foundation generally used, is
(B) Raft footing
(C) Pier footing
(D) Strap footing
Answer: Option C
Question No. 300

The vertical side member of a shutter frame, is known
(A) Style
(B) Reveal
(C) Mullion
(D) Post
Answer: Option A
1.Gy
psum i
sa
a)mechani
cal
l
yfor
medsedi
ment
aryr
ock
b)i
gneousr
ock
c)chemi
cal
l
ypr
eci
pit
atedsedi
ment
aryr
ock
d)met
amor
phi
crock
Ans:
c
2.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngsedi
ment
aryr
ockschangesi
ntoquar
tzi
tebymet
amor
phi
cact
ion?
a)sandst
one
b)l
i
mest
one
c)shal
e
d)gy
psum
Ans:
a
3.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngr
epr
esent
samet
amor
phi
crock?
i
)sl
ate
i
i
)shal
e
i
i
i)quar
tzi
te
Thecor
rectansweri
s
a)onl
y(i
i
i)
b)bot
h(i
)and(
ii
i)
c)bot
h(i
i
)and(
ii
i)
d)al
l(i
),(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
Ans:
b
4.Quar
ti
tzei
sa
a)si
l
ici
ousr
ock
b)ar
gil
l
aceousr
ock
c)cal
car
eousr
ock
d)aqueousr
ock
Ans:
a
5.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngi
sami
ner
al?
a)basal
t
b)gr
ani
te
c)quar
tz
d)sy
eni
te
Ans:
c
6.Sl
atei
sfor
medbymet
amor
phi
cact
ionon
a)shal
e
b)l
i
mest
one
c)sandst
one
d)gr
ani
te
Ans:
a
7.Sandst
onei
sa
i
)sedi
ment
aryr
ock
i
i
)aqueousr
ock
i
i
i)si
l
ici
ousr
ock
Thecor
rectansweri
s
a)onl
y(i
)
b)bot
h(i
)and(
ii
)
c)bot
h(i
)and(
ii
i)
d)al
l(i
),(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
Ans:
d
8.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngi
sar
ock?
a)quar
tz
b)mi
ca
c)gy
psum
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
9.Basedonthefol
lowi
ngrocksandmi
ner
als,
sel
ectt
hecor
rectst
atement
,quar
tz,
shal
e,basal
t,
grani
te,
marble,
gypsum,mica
a)basal
tandmar
blear
etheonl
ymet
amor
phi
crocks
b)t
her
eisnosedi
ment
aryr
ock
c)gr
ani
tei
stheonl
yigneousr
ock
d)quar
tzandmi
caar
emi
ner
als
Ans:
d
10.Aheav
yst
onei
ssui
tabl
efor
a)ar
ches
b)r
ubbl
emasonr
y
c)r
oads
d)r
etai
ningwal
l
s
Ans:
d
11.Thest
onesui
tabl
eforr
ubbl
emasonr
yshoul
dbe.
a)har
d
b)t
ough
c)heav
y
d)l
i
ght
Ans:
a
12.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngmet
amor
phi
crockshast
hemostweat
herr
esi
sti
ngchar
act
eri
sti
cs?
a)mar
ble
b)quar
tzi
te
c)sl
ate
d)l
i
mest
one
Ans:
b
13.Agoodbui
l
dingst
oneshoul
dnotabsor
bwat
ermor
ethan
a)5%
b)10%
c)15%
d)20%
Ans:
a
14.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
nghasmor
efi
rer
esi
sti
ngchar
act
eri
sti
cs?
a)mar
ble
b)l
i
mest
one
c)compactsandst
one
d)gr
ani
te
Ans:
c
15.Jumperi
sat
ool
usedf
or
a)t
est
ingofst
ones
b)quar
ryi
ngofst
ones
c)dr
essi
ngofst
ones
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
16.Thei
mpor
tantt
estt
obeconduct
edonast
oneusedi
ndocksandhar
bor
sis-
a)har
dnesst
est
b)wor
kabi
l
ityt
est
c)wei
ghtt
est
d)t
oughnesst
est
Ans:
c
17.Thepr
edomi
nantconst
it
uentwhi
chi
sresponsi
blef
orst
rengt
hingr
ani
tei
s
a)quar
tz
b)f
eldspar
c)mi
ca
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
18.Gr
ani
tei
snotsui
tabl
eforor
dinar
ybui
l
dingpur
posebecause
a)i
tcannotbepol
i
shed
b)i
tisnotaf
ir
epr
oofmat
eri
al
c)i
tiscost
ly
d)i
thasl
esscr
ushi
ngst
rengt
h
Ans:
c
19.Whi
chofthef
oll
owi
ngst
onei
sbestsui
tedf
orconst
ruct
ionofpi
ersandabut
ment
sofa
rai
l
waybri
dge?
a)gr
ani
te
b)sandst
one
c)l
i
mest
one
d)quar
tzi
te
Ans:
a
20.Thepr
epar
ationofsur
faceofst
onet
oobt
ainpl
ainedgesort
oobt
ainst
onesofr
equi
red
si
zeandshapeisknownas
a)quar
ryi
ngofst
ones
b)bl
ast
ingofst
ones
c)seasoni
ngofst
ones
d)dr
essi
ngofst
ones
Ans:
d
21.Cr
ushi
ngst
rengt
hofagoodbui
l
dingst
oneshoul
dbemor
ethan
a)50MPa
b)100MPa
c)150MPa
d)200MPa
Ans:
b
22.Speci
fi
cgr
avi
tyf
ormostoft
hebui
l
dingst
onesl
i
esbet
ween
a)1.
5to2.
0
b)2.
0to2.
5
c)2.
5to3.
0
d)3.
0to3.
5
Ans:
c
23.Spal
l
inghammeri
susedf
or
a)dr
ivi
ngwoodenheadedchi
sel
s
b)r
oughdr
essi
ngofst
ones
c)car
vingofst
ones
d)br
eaki
ngsmal
lpr
oject
ionofst
ones
Ans:
b
24.Cr
osscutsawi
susedf
or
a)cut
ti
ngsof
tst
ones
b)cut
ti
nghar
dst
ones
c)cut
ti
ngl
argebl
ocksofst
ones
d)dr
essi
ngst
ones
Ans:
b
25.Sapwoodconsi
stsof
a)i
nner
mostannul
arr
ingsar
oundt
hepi
th
b)por
ti
onoft
imberbet
weenhear
twoodandcambi
um l
ayer
c)t
hinl
ayer
sbel
owt
hebar
k
d)t
hinf
ibr
ewhi
chext
endsf
rom t
hepi
thout
war
dsandhol
dst
heannul
arr
ingst
oget
her
Ans:
b
26.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngt
reesy
iel
dshar
dwood?
a)deodar
b)chi
r
c)shi
shum
d)pi
ne
Ans:
c
27.Ther
adi
alspl
i
tswhi
char
ewi
deront
heout
sideoft
hel
ogandnar
rowert
owar
dst
hepi
thar
e
knownas
a)hear
tshakes
b)cupshakes
c)st
arshakes
d)r
indgal
l
s
Ans:
c
28.I
nwhi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngpai
rsbot
htr
eesy
iel
dsof
twood?
a)deodarandshi
shum
b)chi
randsal
c)sal
andt
eak
d)chi
randdeodar
Ans:
d
29.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngt
imber
sissui
tabl
eformaki
ngspor
tsgoods?
a)mul
ber
ry
b)mahogany
c)sal
d)deodar
Ans:
a
30.Asser
ti
onA:
Shi
shum i
susedf
ordecor
ati
vewoodwor
k.
ReasonR:
Shi
shum canbepol
i
shedt
oanexcel
l
entf
ini
sh.
Sel
ecty
ouransweraccor
dingt
othecodi
ngsy
stem gi
venbel
ow:
a)Bot
hAandRar
etr
ueandRi
sthecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA
b)Bot
hAandRar
etr
uebutRi
snott
hecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA
c)Ai
str
uebutRi
sfal
se
d)Ai
sfal
sebutRi
str
ue
Ans:
a
31.Thedi
seaseofdr
yroti
nti
mberi
scausedby
a)l
ackofv
ent
il
ati
on
b)al
ter
nat
ewetanddr
ycondi
ti
ons
c)compl
etesubmer
gencei
nwat
er
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
32.Pl
ywoodhast
headv
ant
ageof
’
a)gr
eat
ert
ensi
l
est
rengt
hinl
ongerdi
rect
ion
b)gr
eat
ert
ensi
l
est
rengt
hinshor
terdi
rect
ion
c)samet
ensi
l
est
rengt
hinal
ldi
rect
ions
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
33.I
nwhi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngdi
rect
ions,
thest
rengt
hoft
imberi
smaxi
mum ?
a)par
all
elt
ogr
ains
b)45°t
ogr
ains
c)per
pendi
cul
art
ogr
ains
d)samei
nal
ldi
rect
ions
Ans:
a
34.Themoi
stur
econt
enti
nawel
lseasonedt
imberi
s
a)4%t
o6%
b)10%t
o12%
c)15%t
o20%
d)100%
Ans:
b
35.Thet
runkoft
reel
eftaf
tercut
ti
ngal
lthebr
anchesi
sknownas
a)l
og
b)bat
ten
c)pl
ank
d)baul
k
Ans:
a
36.Theageofat
reecanbeknownbyexami
ning
a)cambi
um l
ayer
b)annul
arr
ings
c)medul
l
aryr
ays
d)hear
twood
Ans:
b
37.Plywoodi
smadebybondingtogethert
hinl
ayersofwoodi
nsuchawayt
hatt
heangl
e
betweengrai
nsofanyl
ayert
ograinsofadj
acentlayer
sis
a)0°
b)30°
c)45°
d)90°
Ans:
d
38.Thepl
ywood
a)hasgoodst
rengt
hal
ongt
hepanel
onl
y
b)canbespi
l
tint
hepl
aneoft
hepanel
c)hasgr
eat
eri
mpactr
esi
stancet
obl
owst
hanor
dinar
ywood
d)cannotbebentmor
eeasi
l
ythanor
dinar
ywoodofsamet
hickness
Ans:
c
39.Thepr
act
ical
li
mitofmoi
stur
econt
entachi
evedi
nai
rdr
yingoft
imberi
s
a)5%
b)15%
c)25%
d)35%
Ans:
b
40.Fi
rstcl
asst
imberhasanav
eragel
i
feof
a)l
esst
hanoney
ear
b)1t
o5y
ear
s
c)5t
o10y
ear
s
d)mor
ethan10y
ear
s
Ans:
d
41.Afi
rstcl
assbr
ickwheni
mmer
sedi
ncol
dwat
erf
or24hour
sshoul
dnotabsor
bwat
ermor
e
than
a)15%
b)20%
c)22%
d)25%
Ans:
b
42.Cr
ushi
ngst
rengt
hofaf
ir
stcl
assbr
ickshoul
dnotbel
esst
han
a)3.
5N/
mm2
b)7.
0N/
mm2
c)10.
5N/
mm2
d)14.
0N/
mm2
Ans:
c
43.Themai
nfunct
ionofal
umi
nai
nbr
ickear
thi
s
a)t
oimpar
tpl
ast
ici
ty
b)t
omaket
hebr
ickdur
abl
e
c)t
opr
eventshr
inkage
d)t
omaket
hebr
icki
mper
meabl
e
Ans:
a
44.Theper
cent
ageofal
umi
nai
nagoodbr
ickear
thl
i
esbet
ween
a)5t
o10%
b)20t
o30%
c)50t
o60%
d)70t
o80%
Ans:
b
45.Excessofal
umi
nai
nbr
ickear
thmakest
hebr
ick
a)i
mper
meabl
e
b)br
it
tl
eandweak
c)t
olosecohesi
on
d)t
ocr
ackandwar
pondr
ying
Ans:
d
46.Thenomi
nal
sizeoft
hemodul
arbr
icki
s
a)190mm x90mmx80mm
b)190mm x190mm x90mm
c)200mm x100mm x100mm
d)200mm x200mm x100mm
Ans:
c
47.Per
cent
ageofsi
l
icai
nagoodbr
ickear
thl
i
esbet
ween
a)5t
o10%
b)20t
o30%
c)50t
o60%
d)70t
o80%
Ans:
c
48.Excessofsi
l
icai
nbr
ickear
thr
esul
tsi
n
a)cr
acki
ngandwar
pingofbr
icks
b)l
ossofcohesi
on
c)enhanci
ngt
hei
mper
meabi
l
ityofbr
icks
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
49.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngi
ngr
edi
ent
soft
hebr
ickear
thenabl
est
hebr
ickt
oret
aini
tsshape?
a)al
umi
na
b)si
l
ica
c)i
ron
d)magnesi
a
Ans:
b
50.Whichoft
hefoll
owingpai
rsgi
vesacorr
ectcombi
nat
ionoft
heusef
ulandhar
mful
const
it
uentsr
especti
vel
yofagoodbri
ckeart
h?
a)l
i
mest
oneandal
umi
na
b)si
l
icaandal
kal
i
es
c)al
umi
naandi
ron
d)al
kal
i
esandmagnesi
um
Ans:
b
51.Thepr
ocessofmi
xi
ngcl
ay,
wat
erandot
heri
ngr
edi
ent
stomakebr
icki
sknownas
a)kneadi
ng
b)moul
ding
c)puggi
ng
d)dr
ying
Ans:
a
52.Adv
ant
ageofacl
ampcompar
edt
oaki
l
nforbur
ningbr
icksi
sthat
a)i
ttakesl
esst
imef
orbur
ning
b)i
tgi
vesmor
eout
putoff
ir
stcl
assbr
icks
c)i
thasl
essi
nit
ial
cost
d)i
tissui
tabl
ewhenbr
icksar
erequi
redi
nlar
genumber
s
Ans:
c
53.Thei
nter
nal
sizeofmoul
dusedi
nbr
ickpr
epar
ati
oni
s
a)equal
tot
hesi
zeofaf
ull
ybur
ntbr
ick
b)smal
l
ert
hant
hesi
zeofaf
ull
ybur
ntbr
ick
c)gr
eat
ert
hant
hesi
zeofaf
ull
ybur
ntbr
ick
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
54.Pugmi
l
lisusedf
or
a)pr
epar
ati
onofcl
ay
b)moul
dingofcl
ay
c)dr
yingofbr
icks
d)bur
ningofbr
icks
Ans:
a
55.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngbr
icksar
eusedf
orl
i
ningoff
urnaces?
a)ov
erbur
ntbr
icks
b)under
bur
ntbr
icks
c)r
efr
act
orybr
icks
d)f
ir
stcl
assbr
icks
Ans:
c
56.Thef
rogoft
hebr
icki
nabr
ickmasonr
yisgener
all
ykepton
a)bot
tom f
ace
b)t
opf
ace
c)shor
tersi
de
d)l
ongersi
de
Ans:
b
57.Numberofbr
icksr
equi
redf
oronecubi
cmet
reofbr
ickmasonr
yis
a)400
b)450
c)500
d)550
Ans:
c
58.Gl
azi
ngi
susedt
omakeear
thenwar
e
a)har
d
b)sof
t
c)por
ous
d)i
mper
vious
Ans:
d
59.Qui
ckl
i
mei
s
a)cal
cium car
bonat
e
b)cal
cium ox
ide
c)cal
cium hy
droxi
de
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
60.Qui
ckl
i
mei
s
i
)sl
owi
nset
ti
ng
i
i
)rapi
dinsl
acki
ng
i
i
i)goodi
nst
rengt
hThecor
rectansweri
s
a)onl
y(i
)
b)onl
y(i
i
)
c)bot
h(i
)and(
ii
)
d)bot
h(i
i
)and(
ii
i)
Ans:
c
61.Asser
ti
onA:
Pur
eli
met
akesal
ongt
imet
odev
elopadequat
est
rengt
h.
ReasonR:
Pur
eli
mehassl
owhar
deni
ngchar
act
eri
sti
cs.
Sel
ecty
ouransweraccor
dingt
othecodi
ngsy
stem gi
venbel
ow:
a)Bot
hAandRar
etr
ueandRi
scor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA.
b)Bot
hAandRar
etr
ueandRi
snotacor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA.
c)Ai
str
uebutRi
sfal
se.
d)Ai
sfal
sebutRi
str
ue.
Ans:
a
62.Hy
draul
i
cli
mei
sobt
ainedby
a)bur
ningofl
i
mest
one
b)bur
ningofkankar
c)addi
ngwat
ert
oqui
ckl
i
me
d)cal
cinat
ionofpur
ecl
ay
Ans:
b
63.Themai
nconst
it
uentwhi
chi
mpar
tshy
draul
i
cit
ytohy
draul
i
cli
mei
s
a)cal
cium oxi
de
b)si
l
ica
c)cl
ay
d)wat
er
Ans:
c
64.St
udyt
hef
oll
owi
ngst
atement
s.
i
)Hy
draul
i
cli
mei
ssui
tabl
eforwhi
tewashi
ng,
i
i
)Fatl
i
mei
ssui
tabl
eforwhi
tewashi
ng,
i
i
i)Hy
draul
i
cli
mei
ssui
tabl
eformaki
ngmor
tar
,
i
v)Fatl
i
mei
ssui
tabl
eformaki
ngmor
tar
.
Thecor
rectansweri
s
a)(
i)and(
iv)
b)(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
c)(
i)and(
ii
)
d)(
ii
i)and(
iv)
Ans:
b
65.Themai
ningr
edi
ent
sofPor
tl
andcementar
e
a)l
i
meandsi
l
ica
b)l
i
meandal
umi
na
c)si
l
icaandal
umi
na
d)l
i
meandi
ron
Ans:
a
66.Theconst
it
uentofcementwhi
chi
sresponsi
blef
oral
ltheundesi
rabl
epr
oper
ti
esofcement
i
s
a)di
cal
cium si
l
icat
e
b)t
ri
cal
cium si
l
icat
e
c)t
ri
cal
cium al
umi
nat
e
d)t
etr
acal
cium al
umi
nof
err
it
e
Ans:
c
67.LeChat
eli
er’
sdev
icei
susedf
ordet
ermi
ningt
he
a)set
ti
ngt
imeofcement
b)soundnessofcement
c)t
ensi
l
est
rengt
hofcement
d)compr
essi
vest
rengt
hofcement
Ans:
b
68.Themai
nconst
it
uentofcementwhi
chi
sresponsi
blef
ori
nit
ial
set
ti
ngofcementi
s
a)di
cal
cium si
l
icat
e
b)t
ri
cal
cium si
l
icat
e
c)t
ri
cal
cium al
umi
nat
e
d)al
loft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
69.Thei
nit
ial
set
ti
ngt
imef
oror
dinar
yPor
tl
andcementasperI
Sspeci
fi
cat
ionsshoul
dnotbe
l
essthan
a)10mi
nut
es
b)30mi
nut
es
c)60mi
nut
es
d)600mi
nut
es
Ans:
b
70.AsperI
Sspeci
fi
cat
ions,
themaxi
mum f
inal
set
ti
ngt
imef
oror
dinar
yPor
tl
andcement
shoul
dbe
a)30mi
nut
es
b)1hour
c)6hour
s
d)10hour
s
Ans:
d
71.Fort
est
ingcompr
essi
vest
rengt
hofcement
,thesi
zeofcubeusedi
s
a)50mm
b)70.
6mm
c)100mm
d)150mm
Ans:
a
72.Thenor
mal
consi
stencyofor
dinar
yPor
tl
andcementi
sabout
a)10%
b)20%
c)30%
d)40%
Ans:
c
73.Ear
lyat
tai
nmentofst
rengt
hinr
api
dhar
deni
ngcementi
smai
nlyduet
o
a)gy
psum
b)f
inergr
indi
ng
c)t
ri
cal
cium si
l
icat
e
d)t
ri
cal
cium al
umi
nat
e
Ans:
b
74.Af
terst
orage,
thest
rengt
hofcement
a)decr
eases
b)i
ncr
eases
c)r
emai
nssame
d)mayi
ncr
easeordecr
ease
Ans:
a
75.Accor
dingt
oISspeci
fi
cati
ons,thecompr
essi
vest
rengt
hofor
dinar
ypor
tl
andcementaf
ter
thr
eedaysshoul
dnotbelessthan
a)7MPa
b)11.
5MPa
c)16MPa
d)21MPa
Ans:
c
Bui
l
dingMat
eri
alsandConst
ruct
ionObj
ect
iveTy
peQuest
ions:
:
76.Addi
ti
onofpozzol
anat
oor
dinar
yPor
tl
andcementi
ncr
eases
a)bl
eedi
ng
b)shr
inkage
c)per
meabi
l
ity
d)heatofhy
drat
ion
Ans:
b
77.Gy
psum consi
stsof
a)H2SandC02
b)CaS04andH20
c)Li
meandH20
d)C02andcal
cium
Ans:
b
78.Fort
est
ingcompr
essi
veandtensi
l
estr
engt
hofcement
,thecementmor
tari
smadeby
mixi
ngcementandst
andardsandi
nthepr
opor
tionsof
a)1:
2
b)1:
3
c)1:
4
d)1:
6
Ans:
b
79.Thesl
umpr
ecommendedf
ormassconcr
etei
sabout
a)25mm t
o50mm
b)50mm t
o100mm
c)100mm t
o125mm
d)125mm t
o150mm
Ans:
a
80.Wi
thi
ncr
easei
nmoi
stur
econt
ent
,thebul
ki
ngofsand
a)i
ncr
eases
b)decr
eases
c)f
ir
sti
ncr
easest
oacer
tai
nmaxi
mum v
alueandt
hendecr
eases
d)f
ir
stdecr
easest
oacer
tai
nmi
nimum v
alueandt
heni
ncr
eases
Ans:
c
81.Whichoft
hef
oll
owi
ngcement
sissui
tabl
eforusei
nmassi
veconcr
etest
ruct
uressuchas
l
argedams?
a)or
dinar
yPor
tl
andcement
b)l
owheatcement
c)r
api
dhar
deni
ngcement
d)sul
phat
eresi
sti
ngcement
Ans:
b
82.Pr
operamountofent
rai
nedai
rinconcr
eter
esul
tsi
n
i
)bet
terwor
kabi
l
ity
i
i
)bet
terr
esi
stancet
ofr
eezi
ngandt
hawi
ng
i
i
i)l
esserwor
kabi
l
ity
i
v)l
essr
esi
stancet
ofr
eezi
ngandt
hawi
ngThecor
rectansweri
s
a)(
i)and(
ii
)
b)(
i)
and(
iv)
c)(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
d)(
ii
i)and(
iv)
Ans:
a
83.Themostcommonadmi
xtur
ewhi
chi
susedt
oaccel
erat
ethei
nit
ial
setofconcr
etei
s
a)gy
psum
b)cal
cium chl
ori
de
c)cal
cium car
bonat
e
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
84.Themaximum quant
it
yofcal
cium chl
ori
deusedasanaccel
erat
ori
ncementi
nper
cent
age
byweightofcementi
s
a)1
b)2
c)3
d)4
Ans:
b
85.Thebasi
cpur
poseofar
etar
deri
nconcr
etei
s
a)t
oincr
easet
hei
nit
ial
set
ti
ngt
imeofcementpast
einconcr
ete
b)t
odecr
easet
hei
nit
ial
set
ti
ngt
imeofcementpast
einconcr
ete
c)t
orendert
heconcr
etemor
ewat
ert
ight
d)t
oimpr
ovet
hewor
kabi
l
ityofconcr
etemi
x
Ans:
a
86.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngcement
scont
ainsmaxi
mum per
cent
ageofdi
cal
cium si
l
icat
e?
a)or
dinar
yPor
tl
andcement
b)l
owheatcement
c)r
api
dhar
deni
ngcement
d)sul
phat
eresi
sti
ngcement
Ans:
b
87.Themostcommonl
yusedr
etar
deri
ncementi
s
a)gy
psum
b)cal
cium chl
ori
de
c)cal
cium car
bonat
e
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
88.Thr
eebasi
crawmat
eri
alswhi
char
eneededi
nlar
gequant
it
iesf
orpr
oduct
ionofst
eel
are
a)i
ronor
e,coal
andsul
phur
b)i
ronor
e,car
bonandsul
phur
c)i
ronor
e,coal
andl
i
mest
one
d)i
ronor
e,car
bonandl
i
mest
one
Ans:
c
89.Compar
edt
omi
l
dst
eel
,casti
ronhas
i
)hi
ghcompr
essi
vest
rengt
h
i
i
)hi
ght
ensi
l
est
rengt
h
i
i
i)l
owcompr
essi
vest
rengt
h
i
v)l
owt
ensi
l
est
rengt
h
Thecor
rectansweri
s
a)(
i)and(
ii
)
b)(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
c)(
ii
i)and(
iv)
d)(
i)
and(
iv)
Ans:
d
90.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
nggr
adi
ent
sexer
tsmaxi
mum i
nfl
uenceonpr
oper
ti
esofst
eel
?
a)i
ron
b)car
bon
c)manganese
d)sul
phur
Ans:
b
91.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngi
sthepur
estf
orm ofi
ron?
a)casti
ron
b)wr
oughti
ron
c)mi
l
dst
eel
d)hi
ghcar
bonst
eel
Ans:
b
92.Theul
ti
mat
etensi
l
est
rengt
hofst
ruct
ural
mil
dst
eel
isabout
a)160N/
mm2
b)260N/
mm2
c)420N/
mm2
d)520N/
mm2
Ans:
c
93.Per
cent
ageofcar
boncont
enti
nmi
l
dst
eel
is
a)l
esst
han0.
25
b)bet
ween0.
25and0.
7
c)bet
ween0.
7and1.
5
d)gr
eat
ert
han1.
5
Ans:
a
94.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngst
ressesi
susedf
ori
dent
if
yingt
hequal
i
tyofst
ruct
ural
steel
?
a)ul
ti
mat
est
ress
b)y
iel
dst
ress
c)pr
oofst
ress
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
95.Therat
iooft
het
hicknessofwebt
othatoff
langeofst
eel
rol
l
edst
ruct
ural
beamsand
channel
sis
a)l
esst
han1
b)equal
to1
c)gr
eat
ert
han1
d)l
esst
han1i
nbeamsbutgr
eat
ert
han1i
nchannel
s
Ans:
a
96.Pai
ntswi
thwhi
tel
eadbasear
esui
tabl
eforpai
nti
ngof
a)woodwor
k
b)i
ronwor
k
c)bot
hwoodwor
kandi
ronwor
k
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
97.Asser
ti
onA:
Pai
ntswi
thwhi
tel
eadbasear
enotr
ecommendedf
orpai
nti
ngofi
ronwor
ks.
ReasonR:
Pai
ntswi
thwhi
tel
eadbasedonotcheckr
ust
ingofi
ron.
Sel
ecty
ouransweraccor
dingt
othecodi
ngsy
stem gi
venbel
ow:
a)Bot
hAandRar
etr
ueand,
Rist
hecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA.
b)Bot
hAandRar
etr
uebutRi
snott
hecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA
c)Ai
str
uebutRi
sfal
se
d)Ai
sfal
sebutRi
str
ue
Ans:
a
98.Theamountofwat
erusedf
oronekgofdi
stemperi
s
a)0.
2li
ter
b)0.
4li
ter
c)0.
6li
ter
d)0.
8li
ter
Ans:
c
99.Thev
ehi
cleusedi
ncaseofenamel
pai
ntsi
susual
l
y
a)l
i
nseedoi
l
b)wat
er
c)v
arni
sh
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
100.Asser
ti
onA:
Nor
mal
l
ytur
pent
ineoi
li
srecommendedast
hinnerf
ori
ndoorpai
nti
ng.
ReasonR:
Tur
pent
ineoi
li
scost
li
ert
hanot
hert
hinner
s.
Sel
ecty
ouransweraccor
dingt
othecodi
ngsy
stem gi
venbel
ow:
a)Bot
hAandRar
etr
ueandRi
sthecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA.
b)Bot
hAandRar
etr
uebutRi
snott
hecor
rectexpl
anat
ionofA.
c)Ai
str
uebutRi
sfal
se.
d)Ai
sfal
sebutRi
str
ue.
Ans:
b
101.Inbr
ickmasonr
ythebondpr
oducedbyl
ayi
ngal
ter
nat
eheader
sandst
ret
cher
sineach
coursei
sknownas
a)Engl
i
shbond
b)doubl
efl
emi
shbond
c)zi
gzagbond
d)si
ngl
efl
emi
shbond
Ans:
b
102.Thest
ret
cherbondi
nbr
ickmasonr
ycanbeusedonl
ywhent
het
hicknessofwal
li
s
a)90mm
b)180mm
c)190mm
d)280mm
Ans:
a
103.Thepr
essur
eact
ingont
hest
onesi
nst
onemasonr
yconst
ruct
ionshoul
dbe
a)al
ongt
hedi
rect
ionofbeddi
ngpl
anes
b)at45°t
othedi
rect
ionofbeddi
ngpl
anes
c)at60°t
othedi
rect
ionofbeddi
ngpl
anes
d)per
pendi
cul
art
othedi
rect
ionofbeddi
ngpl
anes
Ans:
d
104.Whi
choft
hef
oll
owi
ngshoul
dbeusedf
orhear
ti
ngoft
hickerwal
l
s?
a)header
s
b)st
ret
cher
s
c)br
ickbat
s
d)queencl
oser
Ans:
a
105.Aqueencl
oseri
sa
a)br
ickl
aidwi
thi
tsl
engt
hpar
all
elt
othef
aceordi
rect
ionofwal
l
b)br
ickl
aidwi
thi
tsbr
eadt
hpar
all
elt
othef
aceordi
rect
ionofwal
l
c)br
ickhav
ingt
hesamel
engt
handdept
hast
heot
herbr
icksbuthal
fthebr
eadt
h
d)br
ickwi
thhal
fthewi
dthatoneendandf
ull
widt
hatt
heot
her
Ans:
c
106.Mi
nimum t
hicknessofwal
lwher
esi
ngl
efl
emi
shbondcanbeusedi
s
a)hal
fbr
ickt
hick
b)onebr
ickt
hick
c)oneandahal
fbr
ickst
hick
d)t
wobr
ickst
hick
Ans:
c
107.Themosti
mpor
tantt
ool
inbr
ickl
ayi
ngf
orl
i
fti
ngandspr
eadi
ngmor
tarandf
orf
ormi
ng
j
oint
sis
a)t
rowel
b)squar
e
c)bol
ster
d)scut
ch
Ans:
a
108.Expansi
onJoi
ntsi
nmasonr
ywal
l
sar
epr
ovi
dedi
nwal
ll
engt
hsusat
ert
han
a)10m
b)20m
c)30m
d)40m
Ans:
d
109.Thet
ypeofbondpr
ovi
dedi
nbr
ickmasonr
yforcar
ryi
ngheav
yloadsi
s
a)si
ngl
efl
emi
shbond
b)doubl
efl
emi
shbond
c)Engl
i
shbond
d)z
igz
agbond
Ans:
c
110.Amor
tarj
ointi
nmasonr
ywhi
chi
snor
mal
tot
hef
aceofwal
li
sknownas
a)bedj
oint
b)wal
lj
oint
c)cr
ossj
oint
d)bondedj
oint
Ans:
c
111.Thesl
ender
nessr
ati
oformasonr
ywal
l
sshoul
dnotbemor
ethan
a)10
by20
c)30
d)40
Ans:
b
112.Thepr
opor
ti
onsofl
i
meandsandi
nthemor
tarnor
mal
l
yusedi
nbr
ickconst
ruct
ionar
e
a)1:
2
b)1:
4
c)1:
6
d)1:
8
Ans:
a
113.Numberofv
ert
ical
joint
sinast
ret
chercour
sei
sxt
imest
henumberofj
oint
sint
heheader
course,
wher
exisequalto
a)1/
2
b)1
c)2
d)1/
4
Ans:
a
114.Ascompar
edt
ost
ret
chercour
se,
thet
hicknessofj
oint
sinheadercour
seshoul
dbe
a)l
ess
b)mor
e
c)equal
d)equal
ormor
e
Ans:
a
115.Ascompar
edt
oEngl
i
shbond,
doubl
efl
emi
shbondi
s
a)st
ronger
b)mor
ecompact
c)cost
ly
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
116.Si
ngl
efl
emi
shbondconsi
stsof
a)doubl
efl
emi
shbondf
aci
ngandEng-
li
shbondbacki
ngi
neachcour
se
b)Engl
i
shbondf
aci
nganddoubl
efl
emi
shbondbacki
ngi
neachcour
se
c)st
ret
cherbondf
aci
nganddoubl
efl
emi
shbondbacki
ngi
neachcour
se
d)doubl
efl
emi
shbondf
aci
ngandheaderbondbacki
ngi
neachcour
se
Ans:
a
117.Thedi
ff
erent
ial
set
tl
ementi
ncaseoff
oundat
ionsonsandvsoi
l
sshoul
dnotexceed
a)25mm
b)40mm
c)65mm
d)100mm
Ans:
a
118.I
ncaseoffoundat
ionsonbl
ackcot
tonsoi
l
s,t
hemostsui
tabl
emet
hodt
oincr
easet
he
beari
ngcapaci
tyofsoi
l
sisto
a)i
ncr
easet
hedept
hoff
oundat
ion
b)dr
aint
hesoi
l
c)compactt
hesoi
l
d)r
epl
acet
hepoorsoi
l
Ans:
d
119.Thet
ypeoff
oot
ingwhi
chi
susedt
otr
ansmi
theav
yloadst
hroughst
eel
col
umnsi
s
a)r
aftf
oundat
ion
b)gr
il
lagef
oundat
ion
c)wel
lfoundat
ion
d)i
sol
atedf
oot
ing
Ans:
b
120.Themaxi
mum t
otal
set
tl
ementf
ori
sol
atedf
oundat
ionsoncl
ayeysoi
l
sshoul
dbel
i
mit
edt
o
a)25mm
b)40mm
c)65mm
d)100mm
Ans:
c
121.Thet
ypeofpi
l
ewhi
chi
sdr
ivenatani
ncl
i
nat
iont
oresi
sti
ncl
i
nedf
orcesi
sknownas
a)f
ri
cti
onpi
l
e
b)sheetpi
l
e
c)bat
terpi
l
e
d)anchorpi
l
e
Ans:
c
122.Themi
nimum dept
hoff
oundat
ioni
ncl
ayeysoi
l
sis
a)0.
5m
b)0.
7m
c)0.
9m
d)1.
2m
Ans:
c
123.Themaxi
mum t
otal
set
tl
ementf
orr
aftf
oundat
iononcl
ayeysoi
l
sshoul
dbel
i
mit
edt
o
a)25mm
b)25t
o40mm
c)40t
o65mm
d)65t
o100mm
Ans:
d
124.Thebear
ingcapaci
tyofawat
erl
oggedsoi
lcanbei
mpr
ovedby
a)compact
ingt
hesoi
l
b)dr
aini
ngt
hesoi
l
c)i
ncr
easi
ngt
hedept
hoff
oundat
ion
d)gr
out
ing
Ans:
b
125.Thet
ypeoff
loori
ngsui
tabl
eforusei
nchur
ches,
theat
res,
publ
i
cli
brar
iesandot
herpl
aces
wherenoi
sel
essf
loorcov
eri
ngisdesi
redi
s
a)cor
kfl
oor
ing
b)gl
assf
loor
ing
c)woodenf
loor
ing
d)l
i
nol
eum f
loor
ing
Ans:
a
126.Thever
ti
cal
dist
ancebet
weent
hespr
ingi
ngl
i
neandhi
ghestpoi
ntoft
hei
nner
cur
veofan
archi
sknownas
a)i
ntr
ados
b)r
ise
c)spandr
il
d)ext
rados
Ans:
b
127.Dept
horhei
ghtoft
hear
chi
sthe
a)per
pendi
cul
ardi
stancebet
weeni
ntr
a-dosandext
rados
b)v
ert
ical
dist
ancebet
weenspr
ingi
ngl
i
neandi
ntr
ados
c)per
pendi
cul
ardi
stancebet
weenspr
ingi
ngl
i
neandext
rados
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
128.Thetr
iangul
arspacefor
medbet
weent
heext
radosandt
hehor
izont
all
i
nedr
awnt
hrough
thecrownofanarchisknownas
a)haunch
b)spandr
il
c)v
oussoi
rs
d)skewbacks
Ans:
b
129.Thel
i
ntel
sar
epr
efer
redt
oar
chesbecause
a)ar
chesr
equi
remor
eheadr
oom t
ospant
heopeni
ngsl
i
kedoor
s,wi
ndowset
c.
b)ar
chesr
equi
rest
rongabut
ment
stowi
thst
andar
cht
hrust
c)ar
chesar
edi
ff
icul
tinconst
ruct
ion
d)al
loft
heabov
e
Ans:
d
130.I
ntheconst
ruct
ionofar
ches,
sandboxmet
hodi
susedf
or
a)cent
ri
ng
b)act
ual
lay
ingofar
chwor
k
c)st
ri
ki
ngofcent
ri
ng
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
131.Thetypeofarchgener
all
yconst
ructedoverawoodenl
i
ntel
orov
eraf
latar
chf
ort
he
purposeofcar
ryi
ngtheloadofthewallabov
eis
a)segment
alar
ch
b)poi
ntedar
ch
c)r
eli
evi
ngar
ch
d)f
latar
ch
Ans:
c
132.Thet
ypeofj
ointcommonl
yusedatt
hej
unct
ionofapr
inci
pal
raf
terandt
iebeam i
nti
mber
tr
ussessi
s
a)mor
ti
seandt
ennonj
oint
b)obl
i
quemor
ti
seandt
ennonj
oint
c)but
tjoi
nt
d)mi
tr
edj
oint
Ans:
b
133.Thet
ypeofr
oofsui
tabl
einpl
ainswher
erai
nfal
li
smeagr
eandt
emper
atur
eishi
ghi
s
a)pi
tchedandsl
opi
ngr
oof
b)f
latr
oof
c)shel
lroof
d)noneoft
heabov
e
Ans:
b
134.Pi
tchedandsl
opi
ngr
oof
sar
esui
tabl
efor
a)coast
alr
egi
ons
b)pl
ainr
egi
ons
c)cov
eri
ngl
argear
eas
d)al
loft
heabov
e
Ans:
a
135.Thet
ypeofr
oofwhi
chsl
opesi
ntwodi
rect
ionswi
thabr
eaki
nthesl
opeoneachsi
dei
s
knownas
a)gabl
eroof
b)hi
proof
c)gambr
elr
oof
d)mansar
droof
Ans:
c
136.Mansar
droofi
sar
oofwhi
chsl
opesi
n
a)t
wodi
rect
ionswi
thoutbr
eaki
nthesl
opeoneachsi
de
b)t
wodi
rect
ionswi
thbr
eaki
nthesl
opeoneachsi
de
c)f
ourdi
rect
ionswi
thoutbr
eaki
nthesl
opeoneachsi
de
d)f
ourdi
rect
ionswi
thbr
eaki
nthesl
opeoneachsi
de
Ans:
d
137.Thehor
izont
alt
imberpi
ecepr
ovi
dedatt
heapexofar
ooft
russwhi
chsuppor
tst
he
commonr
aft
eri
scal
l
ed
a)r
idgeboar
d
b)hi
praf
ter
c)eav
esboar
d
d)v
all
eyr
aft
er
Ans:
a
138.Theloweredgeoft
hepi
tchedr
oof
,fr
om wher
ether
ainwat
eroft
her
oofsur
facedr
ops
down,isknownas
a)hi
p
b)gabl
e
c)r
idge
d)eav
es
Ans:
d
139.Hi
gherpi
tchoft
her
oof
i
)resul
tsi
nst
rongerr
oof
i
i
)resul
tsi
nweakerr
oof
i
i
i)r
equi
resmor
ecov
eri
ngmat
eri
al
i
v)r
equi
resl
esscov
eri
ngmat
eri
al
Thecor
rectansweri
s
a)(
i)and(
ii
i)
b)(
i)and(
iv)
c)(
ii
)and(
ii
i)
d)(
ii
)and(
iv)
Ans:
a
140.Coupl
ecl
oser
oofi
ssui
tabl
eformaxi
mum spanof
a)2.
5m
b)3.
5m
c)4.
5m
d)5.
5m
Ans:
c
141.I
nacol
arbeam r
oof
a)t
her
eisnohor
izont
alt
iebeam
b)t
her
eisahor
izont
alt
ieatt
hef
eetofr
aft
ersonl
y
c)t
her
eisahor
izont
alt
ieatal
mostt
hemi
ddl
eofr
aft
ersonl
y
d)t
her
ear
etwohor
izont
alt
ies,
oneatt
hef
eetandot
heratt
hemi
ddl
eoft
her
aft
ers
Ans:
c
142.Thef
unct
ionofki
ngposti
naki
ngpostr
ooft
russi
s
a)t
osuppor
tthef
ramewor
koft
her
oof
b)t
orecei
vet
heendsofpr
inci
pal
raf
ter
c)t
opr
eventt
hewal
l
sfr
om spr
eadi
ngout
war
d
d)t
opr
eventt
het
iebeam f
rom saggi
ngati
tscent
re
Ans:
d
143.Thef
unct
ionofcl
eat
sinar
ooft
russi
s
a)t
osuppor
tthecommonr
aft
er
b)t
osuppor
tpur
li
ns
c)t
opr
eventt
hepur
li
nsf
rom t
il
ti
ng
d)al
loft
heabov
e
Ans:
c
144.Thet
erm st
ri
ngi
susedf
or
a)t
heunder
sideofast
air
b)out
erpr
oject
ingedgeofat
read
c)asl
opi
ngmemberwhi
chsuppor
tst
hest
epsi
nast
air
d)av
ert
ical
memberbet
weent
wot
reads
Ans:
c
145.Thev
ert
ical
post
spl
acedatt
het
opandbot
tom endsofaf
li
ghtsuppor
ti
ngt
hehandr
ail
are
knownas
a)bal
ust
ers
b)newal
post
s
c)bal
ust
rades
d)r
ail
i
ngs
Ans:
b
146.Themaxi
mum numberofst
epsi
naf
li
ghtshoul
dgener
all
yber
est
ri
ctedt
o
a)10
b)12
c)15
d)nol
i
mit
Ans:
b
147.Thenumberofst
epsi
naf
li
ghtgener
all
yshoul
dnotbel
esst
han
a)2
b)3
c)5
d)nol
i
mit
Ans:
b
148.Sum oft
readandr
isemustl
i
ebet
ween
a)300t
o350mm
b)400t
o450mm
c)500t
o550mm
d)600t
o650mm
Ans:
b
149.Mi
nimum wi
dthofl
andi
ngshoul
dbe
a)equal
towi
dthofst
air
s
b)hal
fthewi
dthofst
air
s
c)t
wicet
hewi
dthofst
air
s
d)onef
our
tht
hewi
dthofst
air
s
Ans:
a
150.I
nanygoodst
air
case,
themaxi
mum andmi
nimum pi
tchr
espect
ivel
yshoul
dbe
a)90°and0°
b)75°and30°
c)60°and10°
d)40°and25°
Ans:
d
BUILDING
CONSTRUCTION
&
MATERIALS
FOR THE COURSE OF

“CIVIL ENGINEERING”

By
MR. SHRIKANT D. BOBADE

Diploma in Civil Engineering,
B.E. in Civil Engineering,
M. Tech in Structural Engineering,
M. Tech in Highway & Transportation Engineering.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. BUILDING MATERIAL - RANGAWALA
2. BUILDING MATERIAL - SUSHIL KUMAR
3. BUILDING MATERIALS & CONSTRUCTION

- B.P.BINDRA
4. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
- B.C.RANGAWALA
5. BUILDING MATERIALS - A.KAMALA

CONTENTS
Chapter Name of the chapter No. of Pg. No.

No. periods
1. Stones 10 1
2. Bricks 10 16
3. Cement 10 43
4. Sand 10 54
5. Mortar 09 60
6. Concrete 10 70
7. Timber 09 80
8. Miscellaneous Building
Materials 20 95
9. Types of Buildings 05 120
10. Foundations 15 132
11. Masonry 05 156
12. Floors 07 194
13. Roofs 10 208
14. Damp proof & Fire proof
Construction 07 233
MODEL PAPER
REFERENCE BOOKS
INDEX
INDEX
A Concrete sheet piles

Cost of formwork
Appliances for lifting
Curing of concrete
stones
Curved roofs
Ashlar masonry
B D
Damp proofing
Bearing power of soil
Dead load
Black cotton soil
Doors and windows
Bonds in brickwork
Double roofs
Brick masonry Drainage of pitched and flat
Brick Partitions roofs
Built-up sections Dressing of stone surfaces
Bulking of sand
Buttresses
E
Earth rammers
Effects of dampness
C
External finishes
Causes of dampness
Cavity walls
Cement concrete F
construction
Fire protection in buildings
Cement concrete piles
Fire protection systems
Composite floors
Floors and floorings
Composite masonry
Footings
Concrete mixers
Formwork
Foundations for machines Methods of sound
Framed structures insulation
Methods of timbering
G
Grading of aggregates O
Grillage foundations Objects of foundations
Group of piles Ornamental brickwork
Guniting
P
I Partitions
Increasing the bearing Piers
power of soil Pile foundations
Pile hammers
J Pitched roofs
Joints in stone masonry Plastering
Junctions Pointed arch
Pointing
K Pre-cast concrete
King-post truss Proportioning concrete
Purlin roofs
L
Lightweight concrete Q
Live load Quality control of concrete
Load bearing piles Queen-post truss
Loads on foundations Quoins
R
M Raft foundations
Method of dropping a Reinforced brickwork
weight Retaining walls
Methods of damp-proofing
Roof coverings for pitched U
roofs
Uses of piles
Roofs
Rooter
V
Round bars
Ventilation
Rubble masonry
Ventilators in pitched roofs
S Vibrators
Sand piles
W
Scaffolding
Wall paper
Screw piles
Water-cement ratio
Shoring
Water proofing of flat roofs
Single roofs
Wedges
Stairs
Wells
Stone masonry
Window sills
Structures in brickwork
Workability
T
Z
Timber floors
Zig-zag Bond
Timber piles
Timber sheet piles
Tools used in brick
masonry
Tools used in stone
masonry
Trussed roofs
Types of floorings
Stones Page 1
CHAPTER-1
STONES
1.0 Introduction:
All the building structures are composed of different

types of materials. These materials are either called building
materials or materials of construction. It is very essential for a
builder, may be an architecture or engineer or contractor, to
become conversant thoroughly with these building materials.
The knowledge of different types of material, their properties
and uses for different purposes provides and important tool in
the hands of the builders in achieving economy in material
cost. The material cost in a building ranges 30 to 50 percent
cost of total cost construction. In addition to material
economy, the correct use of material results in better
structural strength, functional efficiency and esthetic
appearance
1.1 Classification of Rocks:
Building stones are obtained from rocks occurring in

nature and classified in three ways.
1. Geological classification
2. Physical classification
3. Chemical classification
I. Geological Classification:
According to this classification, the rocks are of the

following types.
Page 2 Building Materials & Construction
a. Igneous rocks: Rocks that are formed by cooling of Magana

(molten or pasty rocky material) are known as igneous rocks.
Eg: Granite, Basalt and Dolerite etc.
b. Sedimentary rocks: these rocks are formed by the deposition

of production of weathering on the pre-existing rocks.
Examples: gravel, sandstone, limestone, gypsum, lignite etc.
c. Metamorphic rocks. These rocks are formed by the change

in character of the pre-existing rocks. Igneous as well as
sedimentary rocks are changed in character when they are
subject to great heat and pressure. Known as metamorphism.
Examples: Quartzite, Schist, Slate, Marble and Gneisses.
II. Physical Classification:
This classification based on general structure of rocks.

According to this, the rocks are classified into three types
a. Stratified Rocks: These rocks posses planes of stratification
or cleavage and such rocks can be easily split along these
planes
Ex: sedimentary rocks
b. An stratified rocks: The structure may be crystalline
granular or compact granular. Examples: Igneous rocks and
Sedimentary rocks affected by movements of the earth.
c. Foliated Rocks: These rocks have a tendency to split up in a
definite direction only. Ex: Metamorphic rocks.
III. Chemical Classification:

According to this classification rocks are classified into three
types.
Stones Page 3
a. Siliceous rocks: In these rocks, silica is predominates. The

rocks are hard; durable and not easily effected by weathering
agencies. Ex: Granite, Quartzite, etc.
b. Argillaceous Rocks: In these rocks, clay predominates. The

rocks may be dense and compact or may be soft.
Ex: slates, Laterites etc.
c. Calcareous rocks: In these rocks, calcium carbonate

predominates. The durability to these rocks will depend upon the
constituents present in surrounding atmosphere. Ex: Lime Stone,
marble etc.
1.2 Uses of stones:

1. Structure: Stones are used for foundations, walls, columns,
lintels, arches, roofs, floors, damp proof course etc.
2.Face works. Stones are adopted to give massive appearance
to the structure. Wall are of bricks and facing is done in stones
of desired shades. This is known as composite masonry.
3. Paving stones: These are used to cover floor of building of
various types such as residential, commercial, industrial etc.
They are also adopted to form paving of roads, foot paths etc.
4. Basic material: Stones are disintegrated and converted to
form a basic material for cement concrete, morum of roads,
calcareous cements, artificial stones, hallow blocks etc.
5.Misalliances: Stones are also used for (i) ballast for
railways (ii) flux in blast furnace (iii) Blocks in the
construction of bridges, piers, abutments, retaining walls,
light houses, dams etc.
1.3 Qualities of a good building stone:
The following are the qualities or requirements of a good building

stone.
1. Crushing strength: For a good building stone, the crushing

strength should be greater than l000kg per cm2.
2. Appearance: Good building stone should be a uniform

colour, and free from clay holes, spots of other colour bands
etc capable of preserving the colour for longtime.
3. Durability: A good building stone should be durable. The

factors like heat and cold alternative wet and dry, dissolved
gases in rain, high wind velocity etc affect the durability.
4. Fracture: For good building stone its fracture should be

sharp, even and clear.
5. Hardness: The hardness greater than 17, treated as hard used

in road works. It is between 14 to 17, medium hardness, less
14 said be poor hardness.
6. Percentage wear: For a good building stone, the percentage

wear should be equal to or less then 3 percent.
7. Resistance to fire: A good building stone be fire proof.

Sandstone, Argillaceous stone resists fire quite well
8. Specific gravity: For a good building stone the specific

gravity should be greater then 8.7 or so.
9. Texture: A good building stone should have compact fine

crystalline structure should be free from cavities, cracks or
patches of stuff or loose material.
Stones Page 5
10. Water absorption: For a good building stone, the percentage

absorption by weight after 24 hours should not exceed 0.60.
11. Seasoning: Stones should be well seasoned before putting

into use. A period of about 6 to 12 months is considered to be
sufficient for proper seasoning.
12. Toughness Index: Impact test, the value of toughness less

than 13 – Not tough, between 13 and 19 – Moderate, greater
than 19- high
1.4 Characteristics of stones

In order to ensure suitable selection of stone of
particular work, one must be conversant with its composition,
characteristics, uses and place of availability.
1.4.1 Granite
1. Igneous rock
2. Composed of quart, felspar and mica and minerals
3. Available in grey, green, brown and pink and red
4. Hard and durable
5. High resistance to weathering
6. The texture varies with its quality
7. Specify gravity 2.7 and compressive strength 700 to 1300

kg/cm2
8. Used for ornamental, road metal, railway ballast, aggregate

for concrete; for construction of bridges, piers and marine
works etc.
1.4.2 Balast
1. Igneous rock
2. It is compact, hard and heavy
3.Available in red, yellow grey, blue and greenish black
colour
4. Specific gravity is 3 and compressive strength varies 1530
to 1890 kg/cm2.
5. Used for ornamental, rail road ballast, aggregates for
concrete etc.
1.4.3 Sand Stone:

1. Sedimentary rock
2. It is available in variety of formations fine grained, coarse
grained compact or porous
3. Available in white, green, blue, black, red and yellow.
4. Specific gravity 2.65 to 2.95
5. Compressive strength is 650kgs / cm2
6. Used for ashlar works
1.4.4 Lime Stone:

1. Sedimentary rock: It is available in a variety of forms
which differ from one another in colour Compaction, texture,
hardness and durable
a. Compact lime stone
b. Granular lime stone
c. Magnesia lime stone
d. Kanker lime stone
f. Used for paving, road metal, etc
Stones Page 7
1.4.5 Marble
1. Metamorphic rock
2. Available in white, blue, green, yellow black and red colour
3. High compactness,
4. Suitable for decorative works, wall lining columns, pile,
table slabs, hearths, tiled floors, steps of stair case etc.
1.4.6 Slate:
1. Metamorphic rock
1. Non absorbent, compact fine grained and produce metallic
ringing sound when struck
2. Available in black, dark blue, grey, reddish brown etc.
3. Used for providing damp proof course, paving dados etc
1.5. Selection of stones

In contemplating the use of stone for various
engineering works, the selection of the nature and quality of
stone is governed by the purpose in view, cost of stone, its
ornamental value and durability Suitability various types of
stones for different purposes and situation is briefly discussed
below
a. For face work, in general marble, granite and close-grained

sand stone are used in the form of thin slabs (veneers) where
the structure subjected to adverse weather effects.
b. For pillars, balustrade, pedestals, columns statues and door

and window sill and paving stone, granite marble and
compact lime stone can be recommend because they can take

good polish.
c. For ornamental works such as moulding and carvings, fine-

grained sand stone, fine grained marble and fine grained
granite are used.
d. For bridges, piers, docks, break-waters and other marine

structures the stone should be very hard, heavy, strong and
durable granite and gneiss are recommended for this purpose
e. For road metal, stones should be hard, tough, resistant to

abrasion and durable. Basalt and course-grained granite are
generally recommended for this purpose.
f. For railway ballast, the stone should be hard, dense, durable,

tough and easily workable sandstone, compact lime stone,
trap and quartzite are commonly used
g. In situation like steps, doors sills, pavings etc where there is a

regular flow of traffic, stone should be hard, dense, easily
workable and durable. Marble, slates and sand stones are
commonly use in such places.
h. In fire proof construction, compact sand stone should always

be prefferred.
1.6 Artificial stones: These are also known as cast stones or

reconstructed stones. Artificial stones may take up various
forms such as
a. Cement concrete: This is the mixture of cement, fine

aggregates, coarse aggregates and water. It may be cast in site
Stones Page 9
or pre-cast if steel is used with cement concrete, it is known as

reinforced cement concrete.
b. Mosaic tiles: Pre-Cast concrete tiles with marble chips at

top surface are known as tiles. They are available in different
shades and widely adopted at present.
c. Terrazo : This is a mixture of marble chips and cement. It

is used for bathrooms residential buildings, temples etc.
Advantages of artificial stones:
1. Cavities may be kept in artificial stones to convey pipes,

electric wires etc.
2. Grooves can be kept in artificial stone while it is being cast

which are useful for fixing various fittings.
3. It can cast in desired shape
4. It can be made in a single piece and hence trouble of getting

large blocks of stone for lintels, beams etc is avoided.
5. It can be made stronger than natural stone
6. It is cheap and economical
7. It is more durable than natural stone
8. Natural bed is absent in artificial stones and hence, the

question of taking precautions with respect to the natural bed
of stones does not arise.
1.7 Aggregates - Grading: Aggregates is derived from igneous,

sedimentary and metamorphic rocks or is manufacture from
clays, slag etc. The properties of concrete are directly related
to those of its constituents and should be hard, strong,
durable, and free from clay, loam, vegetables and other such
foreign matters. The presence of clay or dirt coating prevents
the adhesion of cement on the surface of aggregates and
ultimately retards the setting and hardening of cement and
reduces the strength, durability and soundness of concrete.
Depending upon their size, the aggregates are classified as (i)

Fine Aggregative (ii) coarse aggregates.
(i) Fine Aggregates: The material, most of when passes through

4.75mm I.S. sieve size, is termed as fine aggregates. It should
not contain more than 1 to 8% of fine particles, which may be
obtained from sea, river, lake or pit may be used as fine
aggregates but care should be taken all its impurities must be
removed
(ii) Coarse Aggregates: The material whose particles are of such

size as are retained on 4.75mm, I.S sieve are called coarse
aggregates. The size of the coarse aggregates used depends
upon the nature of work. The maximum size may be 23mm
for mass concrete such as dams etc. and 63mm for plain
concrete. Crushed hard stone and gravel is the common
materials used as coarse aggregates for structural concretes.
Coarse aggregates usually obtained by crashing granite,
gneiss, crystalline lime stone and good variety of sandstone
etc.
Grading of Aggregates:
Grading of aggregates consists of proportionating the

fine and coarse aggregates in such a ratio, so as to get
strongest and densest mix with the least amount of cement.
Stones Page 11
Grading the aggregates is so graded as to have minimum

voids when mixed with all ingredients, and water should
render a concrete mass of easy workability.
The grading of aggregates are done by the following methods
(i) By trail – In this method, proportionating of aggregates

as to give heaviest weight for same volume, yield the
densest concrete
(ii) By finesse modules method (sieve analysis method): in

this method, the samples of both coarse and fine
aggregates are passed through a set of nine standard sieve
and the percentage of sample retained on each of the said
sieves is determined. The total of these percentages
divided by 100 gives the finesses modulus of sample
(iii) By minimum voids method: This method is based on the

fact, that so obtain dense concrete the quantity of cement
should also be slightly in excess of voids more that the
fine aggregates. In this method the voids in the fine and
coarse aggregates are separately found out with the help of
graduated cylinder and water. The percentage of voids I
aggregate, “X” given by the equation.
X = (V1 – V2) x 100
V2
Where v1, volume of water filled
Where v2, volume of aggregates.
(iv) By arbitrary standards: It is a commonly adopted

method of propitiating the aggregates in a concrete mix
for small works of moderate importance. This method is

not recommended for large works or important works in
this method, the volume of cement, sand and coarse
aggregates are taken in the proportion of 1:n:2n
respectively. The quantity of water to be used a varied suit
the workability descried.
Ex: 1:1:2 M250 rich mix for columns, beams
1:1:3 – M200 Water retaining structures etc
1:3:6 – M150 slab’s columns roads etc
1:3:6 – M100 – foundations,
1:4:8 - For mass concrete.
* * *
Stones Page 13
SYNOPYSIS
1. Building stones obtained from rocks occurring in nature is

classified into
a. Geological classification
b. Physical classification
c. Chemical classification
2. According or geological classification rocks are classified as
a. Igneous rocks
b. Sedimentary rocks
c. Metamorphic rocks
3. According to physical classification the rocks are classified
into
a. Stratified rocks
b. Unstratified rocks
c. Foliated rocks
4. According to chemical classification the rocks are
a. Silicious rocks
b. Argillaceous rocks
c. Calcareous rocks
5. A good building stone should have the following qualities
a. Crushing strength
b. Appearance
c. Durability
d. Fracture
e. Hardness
f. Percentage wear
g. Resistance to fire
h. Specific gravity
i. Texture
j. Water absorption
k. Seasoning
l. Toughness index
6. The stones are used for
a. Structural work
b. Face work
c. Paving work
d. Basic materials
e. Other purposes like ballast for railways; flux in blast
furnace etc
7. The artificial stones are cast stones or reconstructed stones
Ex. 1. Cement concrete
2. Mosaic tiles
3. Terrazo
8. The artificial stones are used for to convey pipes, electric
wires, fixing various fittings, cast to any shape, stones for
lintels or beams etc.
9. Depending upon their size, the aggregates are classified
a. Fine aggregates
b. Coarse aggregates
10. The grading of aggregates are done by
a. By trail
b. By fineness modulus method
c. By minimum voids method
d. By arbitrary method
Stones Page 15
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. Name the classification of stones.

2. Name the types of rocks according to geological classification.
3. Define igneous rocks.
4. Define sedimentary rocks.
5. Define metamorphic rocks.
6. Name any four building stones.
7. Name any four good qualities of stones.
8. Name any two uses of stones.
ESSAY TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Explain the classification of stones.

2. Explain in detail about the geological classification of stones.
3. Explain the qualities of good building stone.
4. Explain the uses of stones as building materials.
5. Explain physical and chemical classification of stones.
6. Explain the uses of the following building materials.
a) Marble b) Granite c) Basalt d) Sandstone
7. Explain the grading of aggregates.
* * *
CHAPTER-2
BRICKS
Bricks are obtained by moulding clay in rectangular blocks of uniform

size and then by drying and burning these blocks. As bricks are of
uniform size, they can be properly arranged, light in weight and hence
bricks replace stones.
2.1 Composition - Manufacture Process.
Composition – Following are the constituents of good brick earth.
Alumina: - It is the chief constituent of every kind of clay. A good brick

earth should contain 20 to 30 percent of alumina. This constituent
imparts plasticity to earth so that it can be moulded. If alumina is present
in excess, raw bricks shrink and warp during drying and burning.
Silica-A good brick earth should contain about 50 to 60 percent of silica.

Silica exists in clay either as free or combined form. As free sand, it is
mechanically mixed with clay and in combined form; it exists in
chemical composition with alumina. Presence of silica prevents crackers
shrinking and warping of raw bricks. It thus imparts uniform shape to the
bricks. Durability of bricks depends on the proper proportion of silica in
brick earth. Excess of silica destroys the cohesion between particles and
bricks become brittle.
Lime – A small quantity of lime is desirable in finely powdered state to

prevents shrinkage of raw bricks. Excess of lime causes the brick to melt
and hence, its shape is last due to the splitting of bricks.
Bricks Page 17
Oxide of iron- A small quantity of oxide of Iron to the extent of 5 to 6

percent is desirable in good brick to imparts red colour to bricks. Excess
of oxide of iron makes the bricks dark blue or blackish.
Magnesia- A small quantity of magnesia in brick earth imparts yellow

tint to bricks, and decreases shrinkage. But excess of magnesia decreases
shrink leads to the decay of bricks.
The ingredients like, lime, iron pyrites, alkalies, pebbles, organic

matter should not present in good brick earth
Manufacture of bricks:
The manufacturing of brick, the following operations are involved
1. Preparation of clay
2. Moulding
3. Drying
4. Burning
(i) Preparation of clay :- The preparation of clay involves

following operations
a) Unsoiling :- Top layer of 20cm depth is removed as it contain

impurities.
b) Digging: - Clay dug out from ground is spread on level

ground about 60cm to 120cm heaps.
c) Cleaning:-Stones, pebbles, vegetable matter etc removed and

converted into powder form.
d) Weathering:- Clay is exposed to atmosphere from few weeks

to full season.
e) Blending:- Clay is made loose and any ingradient to be added

to it is spread out at top and turning it up and down in vertical
direction.
f) Tempering:- Clay is brought to a proper degree of hardness,

then water is added to clay and whole mass is kneaded or
pressed under the feet of men or cattle for large scale,
tempering is usually done in pug mill as shown in the fig 2.1
Bricks Page 19
Fig 2.1 Pug Mill
Process:- Clay with water is placed in pug mill from the top. When the
vertical staff is rotated by using electric pair, steam or diesel or turned by
pair of bullocks. Clay is thoroughly mixed up by the actions of
horizontal arms and knives when clay has been sufficiently pugged, hole
at the bottom of tub, is opened cut and the pugged earth is taken out from
ramp for the next operation of moulding.
Moulding: Clay, which is prepared form pug mill, is sent for the next
operation of moulding. Following are the two ways of moulding.
Hand Moulding: Moulds are rectangular boxes of wood or steel, which

are open at top and bottom. Steel moulds are more durable and used for
manufacturing bricks on large scale as shown in fig 2.2. Bricks prepared
by hand moulding are of two types.
Fig 2.2 Wooden mould & Steel mould
a) Ground moulded bricks
b) Table moulded bricks
(a) Ground moulded bricks: ground is first made level and fine sand is
sprinkled over it. Mould is dipped in water and placed over the
ground to fill the clay. Extra clay is removed by wooden or metal
strike after the mould is filled forced mould is then lifted up and raw
Bricks Page 21
brick is left on the ground. Mould is then dipped in water every time
lower faces of ground moulded bricks are rough and it is not possible
to place frog on such bricks.
Ground moulded bricks of better quality and with frogs on their

surface are made by using a pair of pallet boards and a wooden block
(b) Table-moulded bricks: Process of moulding these bricks is just

similar to ground bricks on a table of size about 2m x 1m.
(1) Machine moulding: This method proves to be economical when

bricks in huge quantity are to be manufactured at the same spot. It is
also helpful for moulding hard and string clay. These machines are
broadly classified in two categories
(a) Plastic clay machines
(b) Dry clay machines
a) Plastic clay machines: This machine containing rectangular opening

of size equal to length and width of a brick. Pugged clay is placed in
the machine and as it comes out through the opening, it is cut into
strips by wires fixed in frames, so there bricks are called wire cut
bricks.
b) Dry clay machines: In these machines, strong clay is first converted

into powder form and then water is added to form a stiff plastic paste.
Such paste is placed in mould and pressed by machine to form hard
and well shaped bricks. These bricks are behavior than ordinary hand
moulded bricks. They carry distinct frogs and exhibit uniform

texture.
(2) Drying: The damp bricks, if burnt, are likely to be cracked and
distored. Hence moulded bricks are dried before thay are taken for
the next operation of burning. Bricks are laid along and across the
stock in alternate layers. The drying of brick is by the following
means
(i) Artificial drying – drying by tunnels usually 1200C about 1 to 3

days
(ii) Circulation of air- Stacks are arranged in such a way that

sufficient air space is left between them free circulation of air.
(iii)Drying yard- special yards should be prepared slightly higher

level prevent the accumulation of rain water
(iv)Period for frying – usually about 3 to 10 days to bricks to

become dry
(v) Screens – screens are necessary, may be provided to avoid direct

exposure to wind or sun.
(3) Burning: This is very important operation in the manufacturing of

bricks to impart hardness, strength and makes them dense and
durable. Burning of bricks is done either in clamps or in kilns.
Clamps are temporary structures and they are adopted to manufacture
Bricks Page 23
bricks on small scale. Kilns are permanent structures and they are
adopted to manufacture bricks on a large scale. A typical clamp is as
shown in fig 2.3
Fig 2.3 Clamp
(1) A trapezoidal shape in plan with shorter is slightly in excavation and

wider end raised at an angle of 150 from ground level
(2) A brick wall with mud is constructed on the short end and a layer of
70cm to 80cm thick fuel (grass, cow dung, ground nuts, wood or
coal) laid on the floor.
(3) A layer consists of 4 or 5 courses of raw bricks laid on edges with

small spaces between them for circulation of air
(4) A second layer of fuel is then placed, and over it another layer of raw
bricks is putap. The total height of clamp in alternate layers of brick
is about 3 to 4 m
(5) When clamp is completely constructed, it is plastered with mud on

sides andtop and filled with earth to prevent the escape of heat
(6) The period of burning is about one to two months and allow the same
time for coding
(7) Burnt bricks are taken out from the clamp
Advantages:
(i) The bricks produced are tough and strong because burning and
cooling are gradual
(ii) Burning in clamps proves to be cheap and economical
(iii) No skilled labour and supervision are required for the

construction of clamps
(iv) There is considerable saving of clamps fuel

Bricks Page 25
Disadvantages:
(i) Bricks are not of required shape
(ii) It is very slow process
(iii) It is not possible to regulate fire in a clamp
(iv) Quality of brick is not uniform
Kilns: A kiln is a large oven, which is used to burnt bricks by
1) Intermittent kilns
2) Continuous kilns
1) Intermittent kilns: These intermittent in operation, which means that

they are loaded, fired, cooled and unloaded.
a) Intermittent up-draught kilns
b) Intermittent down-draught kilns
a) Intermittent up-draught kiln: This is in the form of rectangular with

thick outside walls as shown in the fig 2.4. wide doors are provided at
each end for loading and unloading of kilns. A temporary roof may be
installed to protect from rain and it is removed after kiln is fired. Flues
are provided to carry flames or hot gases through the body of kiln.
Fig 2.4 Intermittent kiln
(i) Raw bricks are laid in row of thickness equal to 2 to 3 bricks and
height 6 to 8 bricks with 2 bricks spacing between rows
(ii) Fuels are filled with brush wood which takes up a free easily
(iii) Loading of kiln with raw bricks with top course is finished with
flat bricks and other courses are formed by placing bricks on
edges
(iv) Each door is built up with dry bricks and are covered with mud or
clay
(v) The kiln is then fired for a period of 48 to 60 hours draught rises
in the upward direction from bottom of kiln and brings about the
burning of bricks.
Bricks Page 27
(vi) Kiln is allowed to cool down and bricks are then token out
(vi) Same procedure is repeated for the next burning
Bricks manufactured by intermittent up drought kilns are better than

those prepared by clamps but bricks burnt by this process is not uniform,
supply of bricks is not continuous and wastage of fuel heat.
(b) Intermittent down-draught kilns:
These kilns are rectangular or circular in shape. They are

provided with permanent walls and closed tight roof. Floor of the kiln
has opening which are connected to a common chimney stack through
flues. Working is same as up-draught kiln. But it is so arranged in this
kiln that hot gases are carried through vertical flues upto the level of roof
and they are then released. These hot gases move down ward by the
chimney draught and in doing so, they burn the bricks.
Advantages:
(i) Bricks are evenly burnt
(ii) Performance of this kiln is better than that of up-draught

kiln
(iii) This kiln is suitable for burning of structural clay tiles,

terra cota because of close control of heat.
2. Continuous kilns:
These kilns are continuous in operations. This means that

loading, firing, cooling and unloading are carried out simultaneously in
these kilns. There are three types of continuous kilns.
a) Bull’s trench kiln
b) Hoffman’s kiln
c) Tunnel kiln
a) Bull’s trench kiln: This kiln may be of rectangular, circular or oval

shape in the plan as shown in fig 2.5. It is constructed in a trench
excavated in ground either fully under ground partially projecting above
ground openings is provided in the outer walls to act as flue holes.
Dampers are in the form of iron plates and they are used to divide the
kilns in suitable sections and most widely used kiln in India.
Fig 2.5 Bull’s trench kiln

Bricks Page 29
The bricks are arranged in such a way that flues are formed. Fuel
is placed in flues and it is ignited through flue holes after covering top
surface with earth and ashes to prevent the escape of heat usually two
movable iron chimneys are employed to form draught. These chimneys
are placed in advance of section being fired. Hence, hot gases leaving the
chimney warm up the bricks in next section. Each section requires about
one day to burn. The tentative arrangement for different sections may be
as follows
Section 1 – loading
Section 2 – empty
Section 3 – unloading
Section 4 – cooling
Section 5 – Burning
Section 6 – Heating
b) Haffman’s kiln: this kiln is constructed over ground and hence, it is

sometimes known as flame kiln. Its shape is circular to plan and it is
divided into a number of compartments or chambers. A permanent roof
is provided; the kiln can even function during rainy season. Fig 2.6
shows plan and section of Hoffman’s kiln with 12 chambers
Fig 2.6 Hoffman’s kiln
Chamber 1 - loading
Chamber 2 to 5 – drying and pre-heating

Bricks Page 31
Chambers 6 and 7 - burning
Chambers 8 to 11 - cooling
Chamber 12 – unloading
The initial cost in stalling this kiln is high, the following advantages
(i) Good quality of bricks are produced
(ii) It is possible to regulate heat inside the chambers through fuel
holes
(iii) Supply of bricks is continuous and regular
(iv) There is considerable saving in fuel due to pre heating of raw
bricks by flue gases
c) Tunnel kiln: This type of kiln is in the form of tunnel, which may be
straight, circular or oval in the plan. Raw bricks are placed in trolleys
which are then moved from one end too the other end of tunnel. Raw
bricks get dried and pre-heated as they approach zone of fire. In zone of
fire, bricks are burnt to the required deque and they are then pushed
forward for cooling. When bricks are sufficiently cooled, they are
unloaded. The kiln proves to be economical when the bricks are
manufactures on a large scale. As temperature is under control, uniform
bricks of better quality are produced.

COMPARISON BETWEEN CLAMP-BURNING AND KILN-BURNING
No. Item Clamp-burning Kiln-burning

1. Capacity About 20000 to 100000 Average 25000 bricks
bricks can be prepared can be prepared per day.
at a time.
2. Cost of fuel Low as grass, cow dung, Generally high as coal
litter, etc. may be used.dust is to be used.
3. Initial cost Very low as no structuresMore as permanent
are to be built. structures are to be
constructed.
4. Quality of Percentage of good Percentage of good
bricks quality bricks is small quality bricks is more
about 60% or so. about 90% or so.
5. Regulation It is not possible to Fire is under control
of fire control or regulate fire throughout the process of
during the process of burning.
burning
6. Skilled Not necessary through- Continuous skilled super
supervision out the process of burn- vision is necessary.
ing.
7. Structure Temporary structure. Permanent structure.
8. Suitability Suitable when bricks are Suitable when bricks
to be manufactured on are to be manufactured on
a small scale and when a large scale and when
the demand of bricks is there is continuous
not continuous. demand of bricks.
9. Time of burn- It requires about 2 to Actual time for burning of
ing and cool- 6 months for burning one chamber is about 24
ing. and cooling of bricks. hours and only about 12
days are required for
cooling of bricks.
10. Wastage of There is considerable Hot flue gas is used to dry
heat. wastage of heat from and pre-heat raw bricks.
top and sides and hot Hence wastage of heat is
flue gas is not properly the least.
utilised.
Bricks Page 33
2.2 Classification:
Bricks can broadly be divided into two categories.
(i) Unburnt or sundried bricks
(ii) Burnt bricks
(i) Un burnt or Sun dried bricks- UN burn or sun dried with the
help of heat received from sun after the process of moulding.
These bricks can only be used in the constructions of temporary
and cheap structures. Such bricks should not be used at places
exposed to heavy rains.
(ii) Burnt Bricks: The bricks used in construction works are burnt
bricks and they are classified into the following four categories.
a. First Class bricks: These bricks are table moulded and of

standard shape. The surface and edges of the bricks are
sharp, square, smooth and straight. The comply all the
qualities of good bricks and used for superior work of
permanent nature.
b. Second class bricks: These bricks are ground moulded

and they are burnt in kilns. The surface of bricks is some
what rough and shape is also slightly irregular. These
bricks are commonly used at places where brick work is
to be provided with a coat of plaster.
c. Third class bricks: These bricks are ground moulded and

they burnt in clamps. These bricks are not hard and they
have rough surfaces with irregular and distorted edges.
These bricks give dull sound when struck together. They

are used for unimportant and temporary structures and at
places where rainfall is not heavy.
d. Fourth class bricks: These are over burnt bricks with

irregular shape and dark colour. These bricks are used as
aggregate for concrete in foundation, floors, roads, etc
because of the fact that the over burnt bricks have
compacted structure and hence, they are some times
found stronger than even first class bricks.
2.3 Qualities of Good Brick:
(i) Bricks should be table moulded, well burnt in kilns, copper

coloured, free from cracks and with sharp and square edges.
(ii) Bricks should be uniform shape and should be of standard

size.
(iii) Bricks should give clear ringing sound when struck each
other.
(iv) Bricks when broken should show a bright homogeneous and

compact structure free from voids.
(v) Bricks should not absorb water more than 20 percent by

weight for first class bricks and 22 percent by weight for
second class bricks, when soaked in coldwater for a period of
24 hours.
Bricks Page 35
(vi) Bricks should be sufficiently hard no impression, should be

left on brick surface, when it is scratched with finger nail.
(vii) Bricks should be low thermal conductivity and they should be

sound proof.
(viii) Bricks should not break when dropped flat on hard ground
from a height of about one meter.
(ix) Bricks, when soaked in water for 24hours, should not show
deposits of white salts when allowed to dry in shade.
(x) No brick should have crushing strength below 55kg/cm2
2.4 Special Types: Bricks are made in a wide range of shapes and to
suit the requirements of the location where they are to be used.
Special form of bricks may be needed due to structural
consideration or for ornamental decoration as defined by the
architect. Specially moulded bricks avoid the cumbersome
process of cutting and rounding the rectangular bricks to the
desired shape. Some of the special types of bricks commonly
used are given below.
a. Squint Bricks: These bricks are made in a variety of shapes and

are used to the construction of a cute and obtuse squint quoins as
shown in the fig2.7.
Fig 2.7 Types of Special Bricks
b. Bull Nosed Bricks: These bricks are used to form rounded

quoins.
Bricks Page 37
c. Perforated Bricks: These bricks may be standard size bricks

produced with perforations running through their thickness.
Perforated bricks are easy to burn and their light weight makes it
possible to cut down the weight of the structure and effect in
foundations. The aperture of the perforations is such that it gives
maximum amount of ventilation. But does not permit the entry of
rats or mice. These bricks are used for constructing load bearing
walls of low buildings, panel walls for multistoried buildings and
for providing partition walls.
d. Hallow Bricks: These bricks are made of clay and are provided
with one or more cavities. Hallow bricks are light in weight and
are used to increase insulation against heat and dampness. They
are used for the construction of load bearing walls, partition walls
or panel walls to multistoried buildings.
e. Circular Bricks: These bricks have internal and external faces

curved to meet the requirement of the particular curve and radius
of the wall. These bricks are used for wells, towers etc
f. Plinth cornice and String Course Brick: These bricks are

moulded in several patterns with the object of adding
architectural beauty to the structure and at the same time to
helping to throw the rack water off the face of the walls.
g. Coping Bricks: These bricks are manufactured in a variety of

shapes to set the thickness of the wall and are throated on the
underside to throw off rain water as shown in the fig2.7
h. Paving Bricks: These bricks are specially made for paving the
surface of streets and highways. These bricks are usually made
from shale, fire clay on a mixture of the two. They are unaffected
by weather and ordinary traffic wear. They are loaded on the bed
of sand which in term rests on foundation of stone or concrete.
The bricks are laid by grouting with cement mortar or asphalt.
They are machine moulded and are burnt in a continuous kiln to
ensure high degree of vitrification.
2.5 Tests for bricks :
A brick is generally subjected to following tests to find out its

suitability of the construction work.
ii. Absorption
iii. Crushing strength or compression strength
iv. Hardness
v. Presence soluble salts
vi. Shape and size
vii. Soundness
viii. Structure
1) Absorption: A good should not absorb not more than 20 percent

of weight of dry brick
2) Compressive strength: crushing or compressive strength of

brick is found out by placing it in compression testing machine. It
is pressed till it breaks. Minimum crushing strength of brick is
Bricks Page 39
35kg/cm2 and for superior bricks, it may vary from 70 to 140

kg/cm2.
3) Hardness: No impression is left on the surface the brick is

treated to be sufficiently hard
4) Presence of soluble salts: The bricks should not show any grey
or white deposits after immerted in water for 24 hours
5) Shape and size: It should be standard size and shape with sharp
edges
6) Soundness: The brick should give clear ringing sound struck

each other
7) Structure: The structure should be homogeneous, compact and

free from any defects
2.6 Grading of Bricks
As per IS10719557 and 1970 code specifications,
a. Bricks with compressive strength not less than 140kg/cm2 –

Grade A-A class.
b. Bricks with compressive strength not less than 105kg/cm2 – First

class bricks - Grade A.
c. Bricks with compressive strength not less than 70kg/cm2 –

Second class bricks – Grade B.
d. Bricks with compressive strength not less than the average value
35kg/cm2 – class III bricks – Grade C.
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. Brick is a building material composed of following materials

a. Alumina
b. Silica
c. Lime
d. Oxide of iron
e. Magnesia
2. The manufacture of bricks is carried out by the following
operations
a. Preparation of clay
b. Moulding
c. Drying
d. burning
3. Bricks are classified as
1. Un-burnt or sun dried bricks
2. Burnt bricks
a. First class bricks
b. Second class bricks
c. Third class bricks
d. Fourth class bricks
4. A good brick should
Table moulded, well burnt, uniform shape size, should
give clear ringing sound, should be hard, water absorption not more
than 20% for 24 hours.
5. The special types of bricks commonly used are
Bricks Page 41
a. Squint bricks
b. Bult nosed bricks
c. Perforated bricks
d. Hallow bricks
e. Circular bricks
f. Coping bricks
g. Paving bricks
6. As per IS1077-1957 & 1970
1. Grade A – A class < 140kg/cm2

2. Second class bricks – grade B < 70kg/cm2
3. First class bricks – grade A < 105kg/cm2
4. Class III bricks – grade C average 35kg/cm2
1. What are the constituents of good brick earth?

2. What are the harmful ingradients in brick earth?
3. Name the operations involved in the manufacture of brick.
4. What are the types of bricks?
5. Name the types of special bricks.
6. Name any four uses of bricks.
7. What are the important qualities of brick?
8. What is the use of frog?
9. What are the uses of fire bricks?
10. What are the uses of hallow bricks?
11. What is the size and weight of standard brick?
12. What is meant by blending?
13. What is tempering?
1. Explain the manufacturing process of bricks in detail.

2. Explain the classification of bricks.
3. Explain the qualities of bricks.
4. Explain the special types of bricks.
5. Explain the composition of good brick in detail (function of each
constituent).
6. Explain the tests to be conducted to a brick.
* * *
Cement Page 43
CHAPTER -3
CEMENT
Cement in its broadest term means any substance which acts as a

binding agent for materials natural cement (Roman Cement) is obtained
by burning and crushing the stones containing clay, carbonates of lime
and some amount of carbonate of magnesia. The clay content in such
stones is about 20 to 40 percent. Natural cement resembles very closely
eminent hydraulic lime. It is not strong as artificial cement, so it has
limited use in practice.
Artificial cement is obtained by burning at very high temperature

a mixture of calcareous and argillaceous materials in correct proportion.
Calcined product is known as clinker. A small quantity of gypsum is
added to clinker and it is then pulverized into very fine powder is known
as cement. Cement was invented by a mason Joseph Aspdin of leeds in
England in 1824. The common variety of artificial cement is known as
normal setting cement or ordinary cement or Portland cement.
3.1 Ingradeints – Functions

Ordinary Portland cement contains two basic ingredients,
namely argillaceous and calcareous. In argillaceous materials,
clay predominates and in calcareous materials, calcium carbonate
predominates. Good ordinary cement contains following
ingradients.
1. Lime (cao) ………. 62%
2. silica (Sio2) ………. 22%

3. Aluminca(Al2 u3) ………. 5%
4. Calcium sulphate (CaSo4) ………. 4%
5. Iron Oxide (Fe2 O3) ………. 3%
6. Magnescia (Mgo) ………. 2%
7. Sulphur ………. 1%
8. Alkalies ………. 1%
Functions of Ingradients:
1. Lime: Lime is the important ingredient of cement and its proportion is
to be maintained carefully. Lime in excess makes the cement unsound
and causes the cement to expand and disintegrate. On the other hand, if
lime is in deficiency the strength of the cement is decreased and it causes
cement to set quickly
2. Silica: This also an important ingredient of cement and it gives or

imparts quick setting property to imparts strength to cement.
3.Alumina: This ingredient imparts quick setting properly to cement.

Express alumina weakens the cement.
4. Calcium Sulphate: This ingredient is in the form of gypsum and its

function is to increase the initial setting time of cement.
5. Magnesia: The small amount of this ingredient imparts hardness and

colour to cement.
Cement Page 45
6. Sulphur: A very small amount of sulphur is useful in making sound

cement. If it is in excess, it causes the cement to become unsound.
7. Alkalies: Most of the alkalies present in raw material are carried away
by the flue gases during heating and only small quantity will be left. If
they are in excess in cement, efflorescence is caused.
3.2 Types of Cement

In addition to ordinary cement, the following are the other
varieties of cement.
a. Acid Resistance Cement: This is consists of acid
resistance aggregates such as quartz, quartzite’s, etc,
additive such as sodium fluro silicate (Na2SiO6) and
aqueous solution of sodium silicate. This is used for acid-
resistant and heat resistant coating of installations of
chemical Industry. By adding 0.5 percent of unseed oil or
2 percent of ceresil, its resistance to water is increased
and known as acid water resistant cement.
b. Blast Furnace Cement: For this cement slag as obtained
from blast furnace in the manufacture of pig iron and it
contains basic elements of cement, namely alumina, lime
and silica. The properties of this cement are more or less
the same as those of ordinary cement and prove to be
economical as the slag, which is waste product, is used in
its manufacture.
c. Coloured Cement: Cement of desired colour may be
obtained by intimately mixing mineral pigments with
ordinary cement. The amount of colouring may vary from

5 to 10 percent and strength of cement if it is exceeds 10
percent. Chromium oxide gives brown, red or yellow for
different proportions. Coloured cements are used for
finishing of floors, external surfaces, artificial marble,
windows
d. Expanding Cement : This type of cement is produced by
adding an expanding medium like sulpho – aluminate and
a stabilizing agent to ordinary cement. Hence this cement
expands where as other cement shrinks. Expanding
cement is used for the construction of water retaining
structures and also for repairing the damaged concrete
surfaces.
e. High alumina Cement: This cement is produced by
grinding clinkers formed by calcining bauxite and lime.
The total content should not be less than 32 percent and
the ratio by weight of alumina to lime should be between
0.85 and 1.30.
Advantages
1. Initial setting time is about 31/2 hours therefore, allows more time
for mixing and placing operations.
2. It can stand high temperatures.
3. It evolves great heat during setting therefore not affected by frost.
4. It resists the action of acids in a better way.
5. It lets quickly and attains higher ultimate strength.

Cement Page 47
Disadvantages:
1. It is costly
2. It cannot be used in mass construction as it evolves great heat and as
it sets soon.
3. Extreme care is to taken to see that it does not come in contact with
even traces of lime or ordinary cement.
f. Hydrophobic Cement: This type of cement contains admixtures,

which decreases the wetting ability of cement grains. The usual
hydrophobic admixtures are acidol napthene soap, oxidized
petrolatum etc when hydrophobic cement is used, the fire pores
in concrete are uniformly distributed and thus the frost resistance
and the water resistance of such concrete are considerably
increased.
g. Low Heat Cement: Considerable heat is produced during the

setting action of cement. In order to reduce the amount of heat,
this type of cement is used. It contains lower percentage of tri
calcium aluminates C3A and higher percentage of dicalcium
silicate C2s. This type of cement is used for mass concrete works
because it processes less compressor strength.
h. Pozzuolona Cement: Pozzuolona is a volcanic powder and the

percentage should be between 10 to 30.
Advantages
1. It attains compressive strength with age.
2. It can resist action of sulphates.
3. It evolves less heat during setting.

4. It imparts higher degree of water tightness.
5. It imparts plasticity and workability to mortar and concrete
prepared from it.
6. It offers great resistance to expansion
7. It possesses higher tensile strength
Disadvantages:
1. Compressive strength in early days is less.
2. It possesses less resistance to erosion and weathering action.
i. Quick Setting Cement: This cement is prepared by adding a

small percentage aluminum sulphate which reduce the
percentage of gypsum or retarded for setting action and
accelerating the setting action of cement. As this cement hardness
less than 30 minutes, mixing and placing operations should be
completed. This cement is used to lay concrete under static water
or running water.
j. Rapid Hardening cement: This cement has same initial and

final setting times as that of ordinary cement. But it attains high
strength in early days due to
1. Burning at high temperature.
2. Increased lime content in cement composition.
3. Very fine grinding.
Advantages:
1.Construction work may be carried out speedily.
Cement Page 49
2.Formwork of concrete can be removed earlier.

3. It is light in weight.
4. It is not damaged easily.
5. This cement requires short period of curing.
6. Use of this cement also higher permissible stresses in the
design.
7. Structural member constructed with this cement may be
loaded earlier.
k. Sulphate Resisting Cement: In this cement percentage of

tricalcium aluminates is kept below 5 to 6 percent and it results in
the increase in resisting power against sulphate. This cement is
used for structure which are likely to be damaged by sever
alkaline condition such as canal linings, culverts, siphons etc.
l. White Cement: This is a variety of ordinary cement and it is

prepared form such raw materials which are practically free from
colouring oxides of Iron, manganese or chromium. For burning
of this cement, oil fuel is used instead of coal. It is used for floor
finish; plaster work, ornamental works etc.
3.3. Uses of Cement:

1. Cement mortar for masonry work, plaster, pointing etc
2. Concreter for laying floors, roofs and constructing lintels,
beams, weather sheds, stairs, pillars etc.
3. Construction of important engineering structure such as

bridges, culverts, dams, tunnels storage reservoirs, light
houses, deckles etc.
4. Construction of water tanks, wells, tennis courts, septic tanks,
lampposts, roads, telephone cabins etc.
5. Making joints for drains, pipes etc.
6. Manufacture of pre cast pipes, piles, garden seats, artificially
designed urns, flowerpots, etc dustbins, fencing posts etc.
7. Preparation of foundations, watertight floors, footpaths etc.
3.4. Admixtures – Uses.

These are the ingredients or substance, which are added to
concrete to improve its properties like strength, hardness, water
resisting power, workability etc. Many admixtures like alum etc are
commonly used for this purpose.
* * *
Cement Page 51
SYNOPYSIS
1. Ordinary cement conatins

i) Lime (Cao) -62%
ii) Silica (Sco2) – 22%
iii) Alumina (Al2O3) – 5%
iv) Calcium Sulphate (CaSo4) – 4%
v) Iron Oxide (Fe2O3) – 3%
vi) Magnesia (MgO) – 2%
vii) Sulphur & Alkalies – 1% each
2. The main types cements are

i) Acid resistance cement
ii) Blast furnace cement
iii) Coloured cement
iv) Expanding cement
v) High alumina cement
vi) Hydrophobic cement
vii) Low heat cement
viii) Pozzolona cement
ix) Quick setting cement
x) Rapid hardening cement
xi) Sulphate resistance cement
xii) White resistance cement
3. The cement is used for

i) Masonary work
ii) Floors, roofs of concrete
iii) Bridges, culverts, dems, tunnels etc

iv) Water tanks, wells , septic tanks, roads, telephone
cable etc
v) Making joints for drains, pipes
vi) Manufacture of pipes, piles etc
vii) Preparation of foundation, water tight floors etc.
4. Addition of admixture in cement concrete increases strength,
harness, water resisting power, work ability etc.
* * *
Cement Page 53
1. Name the important ingradients of cement

2. Name any four uses of cement
3. What are the important types of cement
4. What are the uses acid-resistant cement?
5. What is use of rapid hardening cement?
6. Explain the following
a) Quick setting cement b) white cement
7. What is the use of sulphate resisting cement?
8. What is meant by blast furnace cement?
1. Name and explain the ingradients functions in the cement

2. Explain the qualities of cement
3. Explain the varieties of cement
a) Rapid hardening cement
b) High alumina cement
5. Explain in detail the uses of cement
* * *
CHAPTER -4
SAND
Sand is an important building material used in the preparation of mortar,

concrete, etc.
4.1 Sources of Sand: Sand particles consist of small grains of silica

(Si02). It is formed by the decomposition of sand stones due to
various effects of weather. The following are the natural sources
of sand.
a. Pit Sand: This sand is found as deposits in soil and it is obtained

by forming pits to a depth of about 1m to 2m from ground level.
Pit sand consists of sharp angular grains, which are free from
salts for making mortar, clean pit sand free from organic and clay
should only be used.
b. Rive Sand: This sand is obtained from beds of rivers. River sand
consists of fine rounded grains. Colour of river sand is almost
white. As the river sand is usually available in clean condition, it
is widely used for all purposes.
c. Sea Sand: This sand is obtained from sea shores. Sea sand
consists of rounded grains in light brown colour. Sea sand
consists of salts which attract the moisture from the atmosphere
and causes dampness, efflorescence and disintegration of work.
Due to all such reasons, sea sand is not recommendable for
Sand Page 55
engineering works. However be used as a local material after

being thoroughly washed to remove the salts.
4.2 Characteristics of sand:
1. It should be chemically inert
2. It should be clean and coarse. It should be free from

organic matter.
3. It should contain sharp, angular and durable grains.
4. It should not contain salts, which attract the moisture from

atmosphere.
5. It should be well graded (i.e.) should contain particles of

various sizes in suitable proportions.
4.3. Grading of Sand:
According to the site of grains, sand is classified as fine,

coarse and gravelly
Sand passing through a screen with clear opening of

1.5875mm is known as fine sand. It is generally used for masonry
works.
Sand passing through a screen with clear openings of

7.62mm is known as gravely sand. It is generally used for
plastering.
Sand passing through a screen with clear opening of

3.175mm is known as coarse sand. It is generally used for
masonary work..
4.4 Bulking of Sand:
The presence of moisture in sand increases the volume of

sand. This is due to fact that moisture causes film of water around
the sand particles which result in the increase of volume of sand.
For a moisture content of 5 to 8 percent, the increase in volume
may be about 5 to 8 percent, depending upon the grading of sand.
The finer the material, the more will be the increase in volume
for a given moisture content. This phenomenon is known as
bulking of sand.
When moisture content is increased by adding more

water, sand particles pack near each other and the amount of
bulking of sand is decreased. Thus the dry sand and the sand
completely flooded with water have practically the same volume.
For finding the bulking of sand, a test is carried out with

following procedure as in the fig 4.1.
Sand Page 57
Fig 4.1. Bulking of Sand
I. A container is taken and it is filled two third with the sample of

sand to be tested.
II. The height is measured, say 20cm.
III. Sand is taken out of container
IV. The container is filled with water
V. Sand is then slowly dropped in the container and it is thoroughly

stirred by means of a rod.
VI. The height of sand is measured say 16cm, then bulking of sand =
20 – 16 4
= -------------- = ------ or 25%
16 16
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. The sand is important building material used in the preparation of

mortar, concrete etc
2. The sources of sand are
a. Pit sand
b. Rever sand
c. Sea sand
3. The sand should be
a. Chemically inert
b. Clean and coarse
c. Sharp, angular and durable
d. Not contain salts
e. Well graded
4. According to the size of grains, sand is classified as fin, coarse
and gravelly.
5. The presence of moisture in sand increases the volume of sand
known as bulking of sand.
Sand Page 59
1. What are the main types of sand according to the natural source?
2. What is meant by bulking of sand?
3. What are the important characteristics of sand?
1. Explain the sources of sand.

2. Explain the characteristics of sand.
3. Explain how bulking of sand is found using the experiment.
4. Explain the grading of sand.
5. Explain the bulking of sand.
* * *
CHAPTER 5
MORTAR
The term mortar is used to indicate a paste prepared by adding

required quantity of water to a mixture of binding material like cement or
Lime and fine aggregates like sand. The two components of mortar
namely the binding material and fine aggregates are some times referred
to as matrix the durability, quality and strength of mortar will mainly
depends on quantity and quality of the matrix. The combined effect of
the two components of mortar is that the mass is able to bind the bricks
or stones firmly
5.1 Properties – Uses:
The important properties of a good mortar mix are

mobility, placeability and water retention. The mobility is used to
indicate the consistency of mortar mix, which may range from
stiff to fluid
The mobility of mortar depends upon composition of
mortar and mortar mixes to be used for masonry work, finishing
works, etc are made sufficiently mobile.
The placeability or the ease with which the mortar mix
can be placed with minimum cost in a thin and uniform layer
over the surface depends on the mobility of mortar. The
placeablity of mortar mix should be such that a strong bond is
developed with the surface of the bed.
Mortar Page 61
A good mortar mix should posses the ability if retaining

adequate humidity during the transportation and laying over the
porous bed.
If water retention power of mortar mix is low it separates
into layers during transportation and when it comes contact with
the porous bed like brick, wood, etc, it gives away its water to
that surface. Thus the mortar becomes poor in a amount of water
and remaining water proves to be insufficient for its hardening.
Hence required strength of mortar will not be achieved with such
a mortar mix will.
Properties of good mortar

1. It should be capable of developing good adhesion with the
building units such as bricks, stones etc.
2. It should be capable of developing the designed stresses.
3. It should be capable of resisting penetration of rainwater.
4. It should be cheap.
5. It should be durable.
6. It should be easily workable.
7. It should not affect the durability of materials with which it
comes into contact.
Uses:
1. To bind the building units such as bricks, stones etc.
2. To carry out painting and plaster works on exposed surfaces
of masonry
3. To form an even bedding layer for building units
4. To form joints of pipes

5. To improve the appearance of structure.
5.2 Types of Mortar

The mortar are classified on the bases of the following
1. Bulk density
2. Kinds of binding material
3. Nature of application
4. Special mortars
5.2.1 Bulk density:

According to bulk density of mortar in dry state, the mortars are
two types
a. Heavy mortars bulk density is more than 1500kg/m3 and
prepared from heavy quartz
b. Lightweight mortars – bulk density is less than 1500/mg3
and prepared from light porous sands.
5.2.2. Kinds of binding Material

According to the kinds of binding material, several factors
such as expected working conditions, hardening temperature,
moisture conditions, etc should be considered. The mortars are
classified into four categories.
a. Lime Mortar - in this motor, lime is used as binding material.
Lime may be fate lime or Hydraulic lime. Fat lime mortar 1:2 to
1:3 and hydraulic lime mortarmay be1:2 by VOLUME.
Mortar Page 63
b. Cement mortar: In this mortar, cement is used as binding

material. Depending upon the strength required and importance
of work, the proportion of cement to sand varies from 1:2 to 1:6
or more.
c. Gauged Mortar or composite mortar:
The process of adding cement to lime mortar to improve the

quality of lime mortar is known as gauging. It makes lime mortar
economical, strong and dense. The usual proportion of cement to
lime by volume is about 1:6 to 1:8
d. Gypsum mortar:
These mortars are prepared from gypsum binding material such

as building gypsum and anhydrite binding materials.
5.2.3 Nature of Application:

According to the nature of application, the mortars are
classified into two categories.
A. Brick laying mortars: Mortars for brick laying are intended to

be used for brick works and walls. Depending up on the working
conditions and type of construction, the composition of masonry
mortars with respect to the kind of binding materials is decided.
B. Finishing Mortars: these mortars include common plastering

work and mortars for developing architectural or ornamental
effects. Generally cement or lime is used as binding material.
5.2.4. Special Mortars:

A. Fire resistant mortar- This mortar is prepared by adding 1:2
ratio of aluminous cement with crushed powder of fire bricks
used for fire brick lining furnaces, fire places, ovens etc.
B. Light weight mortar – This mortar is prepared by adding

sawdust, wood powder to lime or cement mortar for sound
proof and heat proof construction
C. Packing Mortar – To pack of oil wells, special mortars

possessing the properties of high homogeneity, water
resistance, predetermined setting time, ability to form solid
water proof plugs in cracks and voids of rocks, resistance to
subsoil water pressure etc. have to be formed with cement
sand, cement loam and cement sand loam mortars.
D. Sound absorbing mortars: To reduce the noise level, sound

absorbing mortars with Portland cement, lime, gypsum, slag
Portland cement etc as the binding materials employed in its
composition. The aggregates re selected from lightweight
porous material such as pumice, cinders etc.
E. X-ray shielding mortar: This type of mortar is used for

providing the plastering coat to walls and celling of x-ray
cabinets. This is heavy mortar with bulk density over
2200kg/m3 is used. The aggregates are obtained from heavy
rock and suitable admixture are added to enhance protective
property of such a mortar.
Mortar Page 65
5.3. Preparation of cement mortar

For preparing mortar, water is added to intimate mixtures
of binding material and sand. The water to be used for this
purpose should be free from clay, earth and other impurities.
Water which is fit for drinking should only be used for preparing
mortar.
Cement mortar may be prepared by manual mixing or by

mechanical mixing. Mechanical mixing is preferred when mortar
is required in large quantities to be used in continuous order.
a. Mixing in mechanical mixer: In this case, cement and

sand in desired proportion are fed in the mixer and mixed
dry. Water is then added gradually and the wet mixing a
continued for at least one minute to obtain the mortar of
desired consistency. It is necessary to ensure that only the
quantity of mortar which can be used within half an hour of
its mixing should be prepared at a time. This is essential as
after 30 minutes the mortar begins to set.
b. Manual mixing: In this case, specified quantity of sand is

spread and leveled on clean dry masonry platform.
Required quantity of cement bags are emptied over the sand
layer. The ingredients are then mixed thoroughly by turning
them over the sand layer. The ingredients are then mixed
thoroughly by turning them over and over. Backward and
forward several times with the help of spade. Dry mixing is
continued till the mix have attains a uniform colour. A

batch of dry mix is then put in the shallow masonry tank
and just sufficient quantity of water is added to bring the
mortar to the consistency of a paste. The quantity of dry
mix taken in each batch should be such the mortar formed
each time is consumed within half an hour.
Precautions in using mortar

1. Consumption of mortar – the consumption of mortar
should be as early as possible
Line mortar – with in 36 hours after its
preparation
Cement mortar – within 30 minutes
Gaged mortar – within 2 hours.
2. Frost action - Setting action of mortar is affected by the presence
of frost and not advisable in frosty weather.
3. Soaking of building units: Building units should not be soaked
before application of mortar. If this precaution is not taken, water
of mortar will be absorbed by the building units and mortar will
become weak.
4. Sprinkling of water: The construction work carried out by
mortar should be kept dam or wet by sprinkling water for about 7
to 10 days to avoid rapid drying of mortar.
5. Workability: Mortar should not contain excess water and it
should be stiff as can be conveniently used. Joints should be well
formed and excess mortar from joints should be neatly taken off
by a trowel. Surface formed by mortar for building units to rest
should be even.
Mortar Page 67
SYNOPYSIS
1. The mortar is a paste prepared by adding required quantity of

water to a mixture of cement and fine aggregates
2. A good mortar mix should have
a. Mobility
b. Placeability
c. Cheap
d. Durable
e. Parable
3. The mortar is used for
a. to bind bricks, stones
b. to plastering
c. to form joints
d. to improve the appearance
4. The types of mortars
a. Lime mortar
b. Cement mortar
c. Composed mortar
d. Gypsum mortar
5. According to nature of application mortars are classified’
a. Brick laying mortars
b. Finishing mortars
6. The special mortars used generally are
a. Fire resistant mortars
b. Light weight mortars
c. Packing mortars
d. Sound absorbing mortars

e. X-ray shielding mortars
7. The preparation of cement mortar by
a. Manual mixing – for smaller works
b. Mechanical mixing – in larger quantities to be
used in continuous order
8. Precautions using mortar are
a. Consumed within the specified time
b. Frosty weather affect the setting time
c. Building units should not be soaked before application
of mortar
d. Apply sprinking of water for a period of 7 to 10 days
e. Mortar should not contain excess water and should be
stiff as can be conviently used.
Mortar Page 69
1.Define mortar.
2.What are the important properties of mortar?
3.Write any four important uses of mortar.
4.Name the types of mortar.
5.What are the precautions to be taken while preparing a cement
mortar?
1.Explain the properties of mortar.
2.Explain the procedure for preparation of mortar.
3.Write all the uses of mortar.
* * *
CHAPTER-6
CONCRETE
Cement concrete is a mixture of cement, sand, pebbles or crushed rock

and water. When placed in the skeleton of forms and allowed to cure,
becomes hard like a stone. Cement concrete is important building
material because of the following reasons.
1. It can be moulded into any size and shape of durable structural

member.
2. It is possible to control the properties of cement concrete.
3. It is possible to mechanise completely its preparation and placing

processes.
4. It possesses adequate plasticity for mechanical working.
The cement concrete has the following properties
1. It has high compressive strength
2. It is free from corrosion
3. It hardens with age and continues for a long time after concrete
has attained sufficient strength
4. It is proved to be economical than steel
5. It binds rapidly with steel and it is weak in tension, steel

reinforcement is placed in cement concrete at suitable places to
take up tensile concrete or simply R.C.C.
6. It forms a hard surface, capable of resisting abrasion stresses.

This is called reinforced cement.
Concrete Page 71
7. It has tendency to be porous to avoid this proper grading &

consolidation of the aggregates, minimum water-cement ratio
should be adopted.
6.1 Constituents - Requirements.
The main constituents of concrete are
a) Cement / Lime: Before introduction of ordinary Portland

cement, lime was used as cementing material. At present most
of the cement concrete works in the building construction is
done with ordinary Portland cement. But other special varieties
of cement such as rapid hardening cement, high alumina
cement are used under certain circumstances. The cement
should comply with all standard specifications
b) Fine Aggregates: The material, which is passed through

4.7625mm B.S.test sieve, is termed as fine aggregates. Usually
natural river sand is used as fine aggregates. But places where
natural sand is not available economically, finely crushed stone
may be used as fine aggregates.
c) Coarse Aggregates: The material retained on 4.7625mm size

B.S.test sieve is termed as coarse aggregates. Broken stone is
generally used as coarse aggregates. For thin slabs, and walls,
the maximum size of coarse aggregates should be limited to
one third the thickness of the concrete section
d) Water: Water to be used in the concrete work should have the

following properties.
1) It should be free from oils

2) It should be free from acids or alkalies
3) It should be free from Iron, Vegetables matter or other

substance, which is likely to have adverse effect on
concrete.
4) It should be fit for drinking purpose
Function of Water
1. It acts as lubricant for fine and coarse aggregates.
2. It acts chemically with cement to form binding paste with coarse

aggregates and reinforcement.
3. It is necessary to flux the cementing material over the surface of

the aggregates.
4. It is employed to damp the concrete in order to prevent them

absorbing water vitally necessary for chemical action
5. It enables the concrete mix to blow into moulds.
6.2. Uses and types
Uses of Concrete:
1:2:2 - For heavy loaded R.C.C columns and R.C.C arches of long
spans
1:2:2 - For small pre cast members of concrete like fencing poles,
telegraph poles etc. watertight construction.
1:2:3 - For water tanks, bridges, sewers etc.
1:2½:3½ - For foot path, concrete roads

Concrete Page 73
1:2:4 - For general work of RCC such as stairs, beams, columns,

slabs, etc
1:4:8 /
1:5:10 For mass concrete for heavy walls, foundation footings

etc.
6.3 Preparation of concrete mix:
There are two types of concrete mixing
(i) Hand mixing
(ii) Machine mixing
1. Hand Mixing: This method of mixing concrete is resorted to when

the quantity if concrete to be used in a work is insufficient to warrant the
necessity of machine. This is used with advantage in places where
machinery cannot be used on account of their non-availability or in
works near a hospital where the noise of machine is not desirable. Hand
mixing is done on a clean, hard and impermeable surface. Cement and
sand are first mixed dry with the help of shovels until the mixture attains
a uniform colour. Aggregative are then added to this mixture and the
whole mixture is then turned by shovels until the stone pieces uniformly
spread throughout. After this, desired are quantity of water is poured into
the heap from a can fitted with a rose. The mass is then turned until a
workable mixture is obtained. It is advised to add 10% extra cement to
guard against the possibility of inadequate mixing by this method.
2. Machine Mixing: - The machine used for mixing concrete is termed
as concrete mixer. Two types of concrete mixers are in common are
1. Continuous mixers
2. Batch mixers
Continuous mixers are employed in massive construction

where large and continuous flow of concrete is desired. The
process of feeding the mixing is more or less automatic. The
machine requires careful supervision so as to obtain the concrete
mix of desired consistency.
In batch type of concrete mixer. The desired proportion of

materials are fed into the hopper of a drum in which the materials
get mixed by the series of blades or baffles inside the mixer.
Batch mixers are further two types 1. Tilting drum type 2.
closed drump type. In the first type, components are fed in the
revolving drum in a tilted position and after sometime the
concrete mix is discharged by tilting the drums in the opposite
direction. In the latter type the drum remains rotating in one
direction and emptied by means of hopper which tilts to receive
the discharge.
While using the mixer, coarse aggregates should be fed

first, sand and cement should be put afterwards. In this revolving
state, the components get mixed while water is poured with the
help of can. The concrete should be for atleast 2 minutes, the time
being measured after all the ingredients including water have
been fed into the drum. The batch type concrete mixer is as
shown in the fig 6.1.
Concrete Page 75
Fig 6.1 Batch type Concrete Mixer
6.4 Compaction - Methods:
Concrete should be placed and compacted immediately

after mixing. The concrete should be placed within 30 to 40
minutes to prevent the danger of concrete getting its initial set,
before laying the concrete, the shuttering should be cleaned of all
of dust or debris. Crude oil or grease etc is usually applied to the
shuttering before concreting to prevent the shuttering absorbing
the water from the concrete or getting struck to it. In placing the
concrete, care should be taken to see that it should not be thrown
from heights. Concrete should be laid in layers 15 to 30 cm (6” to
12”) in thickness and each layer should be properly compacted
before laying the next one.
Compaction of concrete should be proceed immediately
after placing. The function of compaction of concrete is to expel
the air bubbles in the mass and make it impermeable in addition
to its securing the desired strength. The concrete mass should be
consolidated or compacted till the cream of the cement starts
appearing on the surface. Over compaction may lead to
segregation of concrete while-under-compaction may leave air
voids in concrete and results in honey combing. Compaction may
be done by hand or mechanical device.
(i) Hand compaction: The hand compaction may be

done by rodding, tamping or hammering. Tamping is
usually adopted for compacting concrete for slabs or
other such surfaces. Rodding is done for thin vertical
members. Hammering is done for massive plain
concrete works and for compacting an almost dry
concrete the surface is beaten with heavy flat bottom
rammers till the thin film of mortar start appearing on
the surface.
(ii) Mechanical compaction: Mechanical compaction is

done by the use of vibrators. Vibrators are of three
types 1. Internal 2. External 3. Surface. Internal
vibrators are commonly used in large works for flat
surface compaction. In this the vibrator is immersed
in the full depth of concrete layer. The vibrator should
be kept in one position for about 3 minutes and then
removed and placed another position. External
Concrete Page 77
vibrators are placed against the form work and are

only adopted for thin section of members or in places
where internal vibrators cannot be used with ease.
Surface vibrators are generally employed in concrete
road construction. Compaction of concrete by use of
vibrators permits the use of stiff concrete mix of high
strength and ensure better compaction than that
obtained by the method of hand compaction
6.5 Curing of concrete:
Curing of concrete is one of the essential requirement of process

of concreting. Curing is process of keep the set concrete damp for
some days in order to enable the concrete gain more strength
Purposes:
(i) Curing protects concrete surfaces from sun and wind
(ii) Presence of water is essential to cause the chemical action

which a companies the setting of concrete
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. Concrete is a mixture of cement, sand, pebbles or crushed rock

and water
2. Concrete is uses for
i) Heavy loaded RCC columns, arches etc
ii) Pre-cast members
iii) Water tanks, bridges, sewers etc
iv) Foot path, concrete roads etc
v) Foundation footings
3. The preparation of concrete may be
i) By hand mixing
ii) Machine mixing
4. Machine mixing may be carried out commonly by
i) Continuous mixers
ii) Batch mixers
5. The function of consolidation or compaction is to expel the air
bubbles in the mass and make it impermeable in addition to its
securing desired depth
6. Compaction may be done by
i) rodding – vertical members like columns
ii) tamping – slabs
iii) hammering – massive plain concret works
7. Mechanical compaction may be done by
i) Internal vibrators
ii) External vibrations
iii) Surface vibrations
8. Curing of concrete is the process of keep the set concrete damp
for some days in order to enable the concrete gain more strength
9. By curing the concrete should get
i) Strength
ii) Durability and impermeability
iii) Resistance to abrasion
Concrete Page 79

1. What are the ingradients of concrete?
2. What are requirements of materials in concrete
a) Cement b) Sand c) C.A. d) Water
3. Write any four important uses of concrete
4. What are the types of concrete?
5. What is meant by compaction?
6. What is the importance of compaction?
7. What is meant by curing?
8. What is use of curing of concrete?

1. Explain the requirements of constituents of concrete
2. Write the uses of concrete
3. Explain the preparation of concrete by
1. Hand mixing 2. Machine mixing
4. What is meant by curing of concrete? Explain importance of
curing.
5. What is compaction of concrete? Explain the importance of
compaction.
* * *
CHAPTER 7
TIMBER
Timber denotes wood, which is suitable for building or carpentry or

various other engineering purposes like for construction of doors,
windows, roofs, partitions, beams, posts, cupboards, shelves etc
Uses of timber:
(i) Used in the form of piles, posts, beams, lintels, door/window

frames and leaves, roof members etc
(ii) Used for flooring, ceiling, paneling and construction of

partition walls
(iii) Used for form work for concrete, for the timbering of
trenches, centring for arch work, scaffolding, transmission
poles and fencing
(iv) Used in wagon and coach building, marine installations and

bridges
(v) Used in making furniture of agriculture implements, sports

goods, musical instruments, well curbs, mortar bodies, carts
and carriages, railway sleeps, packing cases etc
7.1 Classification of trees
Depending upon their mode of growth trees may be divided in

the following two categories
(i) Endogeneous trees – These trees grow inwards and fibrous

mass is seen in their longitudinal sections. Timber from
Timber Page 81
these trees has very limited engineering applications Ex:

bamboo, cane , palm etc
(ii) Exogeneous trees: These increases in bulk by growing

outwards and used for engineering purposes.
Exogeneous trees are further sub divided into two groups

a) conifers b) deciduous
a) Conifers or evergreen trees: These trees having pointed,

needle like or scale like leaves and yield soft wood
b) Deciduous trees: The trees having flat broad leaves and

leaves of those trees fall in autumn and new ones appear
in spring season. Timber for engineering purpose is
mostly derived from deciduous trees. These trees yield
hard wood.
Ex: ash, beach, oak, sal, teak, shishum and wallnut
Comparison of softwood and hard wood
S.No. Item Soft wood Hard wood

1. Annual rings Distinct Indistinct
2. colour light dark
3. fire resistance poor more
4. modullary rays Indistinct distinct
5. Structure resinous and non-resinous
split easily & close grained
6. weight light heavy
7. strength strong for direct equally strong
Pull & weak for for resisting
Resisting thrust tension,compr
or shear -ession & shear
Structure of tree: From the visibility aspect, the structure of a tree can
be divided into two categories
1. Macro structure
2. Micro structure
I. Macro structure: The structure of wood visible to the naked

eye or at a small magnification is called macro structure. Fig
7.1 shows the macro structure of exogenous tree.
Fig 7.1 Micro structure of exogenous tree
(i) Pith: The innermost central portion or core of the tree

is called pith or medulla
(ii) Heart wood: The inner annual rings surrounding the

pith is known as heart wood. It imparts rigidity to tree
Timber Page 83
(iii) Sap wood: The cuter annual rings between heart

wood and cambium layer is known as sap wood
(iv) Cambium layer: Thin layer of sap between sap wood

and inner bark is known as cambium layer
(v) Inner bark: The inner skin or layer covering the

cambium layer is known as inner bark
(vi) Outer Bark: The outer skin or cover of the tree is

known as outer bark
(vii) Medullary rays: The thin radial fibres extending

from pith to cambium layer are known as medullary
rays
II. Micro structure: The structure of wood apparent only at

great magnifications is called micro structure under micro
scope, it becomes evident that the wood consists of living and
lead cells of various sizes and shapes.
7.2 Defects in Timber:
Defects occurring in timber are grouped into the following

divisions.
a) Defects due to conversion: During the process of converting

timber to commercial form, the following defects may occur.
(i) Chip mark: mark or sign placed by chip on finished

surface of timber
(ii) Diagonal grain: Due to improper sawing of timber

(iii) Torn grain: Due to falling of tool small impression is
formed
(iv) Wane: Presence of original rounded surface on the

manufactured piece of timber
b) Defects due to fungi: The attack of timber by fungi when

moisture content of timber is above 20% and presence of air and
warmth for the growth of fungi the following defects are caused
(i) Blue stain: Sap of wood is stained to bluesh colour
(ii) Brown rot: Decay or disease of timber by removal of

cellulose compounds from wood and wood assumes the
brown colour
(iii) Dry rot: Convert the wood into dry powder form
(iv) Heart rot: This is formed when branch has come out of a
tree and the tree becomes weak and gives out hallow
sound when struck with a hammer
(v) Sap stain: The sap wood looses its colour because of feed
on cell contents of sap wood.
(vi) Wet rot: Caused chemical decomposition of wood of the

timber and timber converts to grayish brown powder
known as wet rot.
(vii) White rot: Attack lignin of wood and wood assumes the
appearance of white mass
Timber Page 85
c) Defects due to insects:
(i) Beetles: Small insects form holes of size about 2mm diameter
and attack sap wood of all spacies of hard woods. Tunnels are
formed in all directions in sapwood by the larvae of these beetles
and converted into fine flour like powder. They do not disturb
outer cover and looks sound.
(ii) Marine borers: These make holes or bore tunnels in wood

for taking shelter. The wood attacked by marine borers loses
colour and strength
(ii) Termites: White ants are very fast in eating away the wood
from the core of the cross section. They make tunnels inside
in different directions and usually donot disturb the outershell
or cover
d) Defects due to natural forces:
The main natural forces responsible for causing defects in timber

are abnormal growth and rapture of tissues
(i) Burls: Irregular projections appear on the body of timber

because of shock at younger age
(ii) Callus: Soft tissue or skin which covers the wound of

tree.
(iii) Chemical stain: Discoloured due to the chemical action

caused
(iv) Coarse grain: Annual rings are widened, tree grows

rapidly hence timber possesses less strength
(v) Dead wood: Timber obtained from dead standing tree
(vi) Druxiness: White decayed spots by fungi
(vii) Foxiness: Due to poor ventilation during storage or by

commencement of decay due to over maturity indicated
by red or yellow tinge in wood
(viii) Knots: Bases of branches or limbs which are broken or

cut off from the tree as shown in the fig 7.2.
Fig 7.2 Knot
(ix) Rind galls: Rind means bark and gall indicates abnormal
growth and pecullar curved swellings found on the body
of a tree.
(x) Shakes: These are cracks which partly or completely

separate the fibres of wood as shown in fig. 7.3.
Timber Page 87
Fig 7.3 Different types of shakes
(xi) Twisted fibres: or Wandering hearts: caused by twisting

of young trees by fast blowing wind as shown in fig 7.4.
Fig 7.4
(xii) Upsets or ruptures: Indicate wood fibres which are
injured by crushing or compression as shown in fig 7.5.
Fig 7.5
7.3 Wood based products:
Timber which is prepared scientifically in a factory is termed as

industrial timber and such timber possesses desired shape,
appearance strength
(a) Veneers: These are thin sheets or slices of 0.40 to

6mm wood of superior quality. Indian timbers, which
are suitable for veneers, are mahagony, oak,
Timber Page 89
rosewood, sissoo, teak etc. The process of preparing a

sheet of veners is known as veneering. Veneers are
used to produce plywoods batten boards and lamin
boards.
(b) Plywoods: Plywoods are boards, which are prepared

from thin layers of wood or veneers. Three or more
veneers in odd number are pressed using adhesives.
The plywoods are used for various purposes such as
ceilings, doors, furniture, partitions, panelling walls,
packing cases, railway coaches, formwork for
concrete etc. Thickness may vary from 6 to 25mm.
(c) Fibre boards: These are rigid boards and they are
also known as pressed wood or reconstructed wood.
The thickness varies from 3mm to 12mm. These are
available in lengths from 3 to 4.5m and width varying
from 12 to 18m. These are used for
(i) For internal finish of rooms such as wall

panelling; suspended ceilings.
(ii) To construct form work for cement concrete.
(iii) To construct partitions.
(iv) To prepare flush doors, tops of tables etc.
(v) To provide an insulating material of heat and

sound.
(vi) To work as paving or flooring material.

(d) Impreg timbers: Timber which is fully or partially
covered with resin is known as impreg timber. The
usual resin employed is phenol formaldehyde which is
soluble in water. Impreg timber is available under
trade names such as formica, sungloss, sunmica etc
and it is used for moulds, furniture, decorative
artuicles etc.
(e) Compeg timbers: The process of preparing compreg

timbers is same as that of impreg timbers except that
curing is carried out under pressure. The strength and
durability of compreg timbers is more as compared to
the impreg timbers.
7.4. Characteristics of good timbers:
1. Appearance: A freshly cut surface of timber should exhibit

hard and of shining appearance.
2. Colour: A colour should preferably be dark
3. Defects: A good timber should be free from series defects

such as knots, flaws, shakes etc
4. Durability: A good timber should be durable and capable of

resisting the action of fungi, insects, chemicals, physical
agencies, and mechanical agencies.
5. Elasticity: The timber returns to its original shape when load

causing its deformation is removed
6. Fibres: The timber should have straight fibres

Timber Page 91
7. Fire resistance: A dense wood offers good resistance to fire
8. Hardness: A good timber should be hard
9. Mechanical wear: A good timber should not deteriorate

easily due to mechanical wear or abrasion
10. Shape: A good timber should be capable of retaining its

shape during conversion or seasoning
11. Smell: A good timber should have sweet smell. Unpleasant

smell indicates decayed timber
12. Sound : A good timber should give a clear ringing sound

when struck
13. Strength: A good timber should be sufficiently strong for

working as structural member such as joist, beam, rafter etc.
14. Structure: The structure should be uniform
15. Toughness: A good timber should be tough (i.e.) capable of

offering resistance to shocks due to vibration
16. Water permeability: A good timber should have low water

permeability, which is measured by the quantity of water
filtered through unit surface area of specimen of wood.
17. Weathering effects: A good timber should be able to stand
reasonably the weathering effects (dry & wet)
18. Weight: The timber with heavy weight is considered to be
sound and strong.
19. Working conditions: Timber should be easily workable. It
should not clog the teeth of saw.
SYNOPYSIS
1. Timber is building material used for the construction of doors,

windows, roofs, partitions, beams, cupboards etc.
2. The classification of trees depending upon their mode of
growth
i) Endegeneous trees-bamboo, can, palma
ii) Exogeneous trees-
a. Confers deodar, keel, cher, fir, pine, spruce,
ledar etc
b. Deceduous trees-ash, beach, oak, sal, teak,
shishum and wallnut
3. From the visibility aspect the structure of a tree can be divided
into two categories
i) Macro structure
ii) Micro structure
4. The defects occurring in a timber are classified into
i) Defects due to conversion chip mark, diagonal grain, torn
gain, wane
ii) Defects due to fungi, blue shain, brown rot, dry rot, heart
rot, sap stain, wet rot, white rot etc
iii) Defects due to insects beetles, marine borers, termites etc
iv) Defects due to natural forces burls, callus, chemical stain,
coarse grain, dead wood, druxenous, knots, shakes etc
5. The wood based products are
i) Veneers
Timber Page 93
ii) Plywood
iii) Fibre boards
iv) Impreg timbers
v) Compreg timbers
6. A good timber should have
i) Shinning appearance
ii) Dark colour
iii) Free from defects
iv) Durable to action of fungi, insects, chemicals etc
v) Fire resistance
vi) Should hard
vii) Mechanical wear
viii) Sweet smell
ix) Should give char ringing sound
x) Structure should be uniform
xi) Should have low water permeability
* * *
1.Give the examples to the exogenous trees

2.Give the examples to the endogeneous tress
3.Define the following a) pith b) heart wood
4.Name any four defects in timber
5.What are the important qualities of timber?
6.Name any four wood based products
7.What is plywood?
8.What is meant by seasoning?
1. Explain the classification of trees.

2. Explain different defects in timber
3. What are the important qualities of timber and explain.
4. Explain the wood based products
5. What are the advantages of plywoods?
* * *
Mislaneous Buildings Materials Page 95
CHAPTER 8
MISLANEOUS BUILDINGS MATERIALS
8.1 Metals: Metals are employed for various engineering purposes

such as structural members, roofing materials, damp proof
courses, pipes, tanks, doors, windows etc out of all the metals,
iron is the most popular metal and it has been used in
construction activity since pre-historic times. For the purpose of
study metals are grouped in the following two categories
(i) Ferrous metals: Ferrous metals contain iron as their main

constituent
Ex: Cast iron, wrought iron, steel
(ii) Non-ferrous metal: Non ferrous metal does not contain

iron as their main constituent
Ex: Aluminium, copper etc
Important varieties of iron ores:
The following are the important commercial varieties of iron

ores, which are commonly used, in the manufacturing process
(1) Haematite – Red oxide of iron (Fe2O3) 65 to 70% of iron
(2) Limonite – 2Fe2O3, 3H2O ( 60% of iron)
(3) Magnetite – Fe3O4 (70 to 73% of iron)
(4) Pyrite – FeS2 (45 to 47% of iron)
(5) Siderite – FeCO3 (40% of iron)

8.1.1 Pig Iron: The crude impure iron, which is extracted from iron
ores, is known as pig-iron and it forms the basic material for the
manufacture of cast-iron, wrought iron and steel.
The pig iron is manufactured by the following operations
(i) Dressing: Crushed into pieces 25mm, impurities of clay,

loam and other earthy matter removed by washing,
magnetic separators are used for magnetic impurities
(ii) Calcination and roasting: Water and carbon dioxide are

removing from ores by calcinations. By roasting, making
the ares hot and very dry after removal of sulphur
(iii)Smelting: smelting is carried out in a special type furnace

known as blast furnace. The raw material consists of iron
ores, the fluxing materials like limestone and fuel like
coal, charcoal is allowed to through throat portion of the
furnace. By the reduction, the pig iron collects in the
hearth of furnace. The slag formed is removed and hot
gases dust escapes through outlet, which is provided in
the throat portion of furnace as shown in fig 8.1.
Fig 8.1 Blast Furnace
8.1.2 Cast iron:
Cast iron is manufactured by remelting pig iron with coke and

limestone. This remelting is done in a furnace known as cupola
furnace, which is more or less same as blast furnace. Its shape is
cylindrical with diameter about 1m and height of about 5m as
shown in fig 8.2. The raw materials are led from the top and the
furnace is fired. The impurities of pig iron are removed to some
extent by oxidation. The molten cast iron is led into moulds of
required shapes to form what are known as cast iron castings and
slag is removed from the top of cast iron at regular intervals.
Fig 8.2 Cupola Furnace

Composition of cast iron:
(1) Cast iron contains about 2 to 4 percent of carbon.
(2) Manganese makes cast iron-brittle and hard, so it may be kept

below 0.75 percent.
(3) Phosphorous makes brittle and percentage may be 1 to 1.5

percent.
(4) Silicon decreases shrinkage and ensures softer and better

castings and it may be less than 2.5 percent.
(5) Sulphur makes cast iron brittle and hard and should be kept
below 0.10 percent.
Properties of casi-iron:
(1) If placed in salt water, it becomes soft.
(2) It can be hardened by heating and sudden cooling.
(3) It cannot be magnetized.
(4) It does not be rust easily.
(5) It is fusible.
(6) It is hard, but brittle also.
(7) It is not ductile and cannot be adopted to absorb shocks and

impacts.
(8) Melting temperature is about 12500 C.
(9) It shrinks on cooking.

(10) Its structure is granular and crystalline with whitish or grayish
tinge.
(11) Its specific gravity is 7.5.
(12) It lacks plasticity and hence it is unsuitable for forging work.
(13) It is weak in tension (1500kg/cm2) and strong in compression

(6000kg/cm2).
(14) Two pieces of C.I. cannot be connected by the process of riveting

or welding (They are to be connected by nuts and bolts).
Uses cast iron:
(1) For making cisterns, water pipes, gas pipes and sewers, manhole
covers and sanitary fittings.
(2) For making ornamental castings like brackets, gates, lampposts

etc.
(3) For making parts of machinery which are not subjected to shock
loads.
(4) For manufacture of compression members.
(5) For preparing rail chairs, carriage wheels etc.
8.1.3 Wrought Iron: Wrought iron is almost pure and it hardly

contains carbon more than 0.15 percent. But the process of its
manufacture is laborious and tedious. Wrought iron is
manufactured by four operations
a. Refining
b. Pudding
c. Shinging
d. Rolling
Properties of wrought iron:
1) It can be easily forged and welded
2) It can be used to form temporary magnets
3) It is ductile, melleable and tough
4) It is moderately elastic
5) It is unaffected by saline water
6) It resists corrosion in a better way
7) Its melting point is about 15000C
8) Its specific gravity is about 7.8
9) Its ultimate compressive strength is about 2000 kg/cm2
10) Its ultimate tensile strength is about 4000kg/cm2.
Uses of wrought iron:
It is used for rivets, chains, ornamental iron work, railway

couplings, water and steam pipes, bolts and nuts, horse shoe bars, hand
rails, straps for timber roof trusses, boiler tubes, roofing sheets etc.
8.1.4 Steel : As per as carbon content is concerned, steel forms an

intermediate stage between cast iron and wrought iron. Cast iron
contains carbon from 2 to 4 percent and wrought iron contains 0.15
percent. In steel the carbon content varies from 0.25 to 1.5 percent. The
steel is manufactured by the following processes.
1) Bessemen process
2) Cementation process
3) Crucible steel process
4) Duplex process
5) Electric process
6) L.D. Process
7) Open-hearth process
Physical properties of steel:
i) Carbon content: Variation in carbon percentage produces steel

of different grades. Carbon always assists in increasing the
hardness and strength of steel and decreases the ductility of steel.
ii) Presence of impurities:
a) Silicon content is about 0.30 to 0.40 percent, elasticity and

strength of steel are considerably increased.
b) Sulphur content between 0.02 to 0.10 percent, no appreciable

effect on ductility or strength however mealleability and weld
ability decreases.
c) Phosphorous content below 0.12 percent reduces shock

resistance, ductility and strength of steel.
d) Manganese content 0.3 to 1.00 percent, the steel becomes

very brittle and hence, it loses its structural value
iii) Heat treatment processes: It is possible to alter the properties of

steel by heating and cooling under controlled conditions. The
following are the purposes of heat treatment
i) To alter magnetic properties of steel

ii) To change the structure of steel
iii) To increase resistance to heat and corrosion
iv) To increase surface hardness
v) To make steel easily workable
vi) To vary strength and hardness
The principal processes involved in the heat treatment of steel
1) Annealing- To make steel soft
2) Case hardening-The core of specimen remains tough and

ductile
3) Cementing- The skin of the steel is saturated with carbon

(880 to 9500C)
4) Hardening- It is reverse process of annealing to make hard

5) Normalising-To restore steel to normal condition and it is
adopted when structure of steel is seriously disturbed for any
reason
6) Tempering-This process is applied to steel, which are treated

with hardening process
iv) Magnetic properties of steel: Steel widely used in electrical

machinery, generates, transformers etc. For making steel suitable
for such use, its magnetic properties are given supreme
importance and these properties are obtained by carefully
adjusting its chemical composition.
i) Carbon – carbon content as low as possible and

should not exceed 0.10 percent.
ii) Silicon-presence of silicon results in considerable

increase of electrical losses and hence it highly
undesirable.
iii) Sulphur and phosphorous: Combines content of

sulphur and phosphorous exceeds 0.3 percent,
magnetic properties of steel are greatly affected.
iv) Manganese: If manganese content exceeds 0.3

percent, it proves to be injurious to the magnetic
properties of steel.
Uses of steel:
1. Mild steel 0.10% Motar body, sheet metal, tin
carbon plates etc
2. Medium carbon steel 0.25% Boiler plates, structural steel,
0.45% rails, tyres etc
0.60% Hammers, large stampaing
dies etc
3. High carbon steel 0.75% Sledge hammers, springs,
stamping dies etc
0.95% Minor drills, smith & tools,

Masons tools
1.00% Chisels, hammers, saws, wood,
working tools
1.10% Axes, cutlery, drills, knives,

picks, punches etc.
8.1.5 Non Metals:
I. Aluminium:- Aluminium is important non metal occurs in

abundance on the surface of earth in various forms such as
oxides, sulphates, silicates, phosphates etc. Bauxite (Al2 O3,
2H2O) is hydrated oxide of aluminium produced commercially.
Aluminum is extracted from bauxite are as follows.

1. Bauxite is purified.
2. It is then dissolved in fused cryolite which is double fluoride of
aluminium and sodium, Al F2, 3NaF.
3. This solution is then taken to an electric furnace and aluminium
is separated out by electrolysis.
Properties:
1. It is good conductor of heat and electricity
2. It is a silvery white metal with bluish tinge and it exhibits luster
on a freshly broken surface.
3. It is rarely attacked by nitric acid, organic acid or water. It is
highly resistant to corrosion.
4. It is light in weight, malleable and ductile
5. It is very soft.
6. It melts at about 6580C.
7. It possesses great toughness and tensile strength
8. It readily dissolves in hydrochloric acid
9. Its specific gravity is about 2.70.
Uses:
1. This metal is used for making parts of aeroplane, utensils, paints,
electric wires, window frames, glazing bars, correlated sheets,
structural members, focts, posts, panels, balustrades, etc.
II. Copper:
The important ores of copper are cuprite Cu2O, Copper
glance Cu2S, copper pyrites CuFeS2, Malachete CuCo3,
Cu(OH)2 and Azuritc @CuCo3, cu(OH)2.
Properties:
1. It becomes brittle just below its melting point
2. It can be worked in hot or cold condition but it cannot be
welded.
3. It has a peculiar red colour
4. It is a good conductor of heat and electricity

5. It is attacked by steam at white heat.
6. It is not attacked by dry air, but moist air gases a green
coating to copper surface.
7. It is not attacked by water at any temperature
8. It is melleable, ductile and soft
9. Its specific gravity is 8.90.
Uses:-
1. The market forms of copper are ingots, sheets, tubes and wires.
2. It is extensively used for making electric cables, alloys,
household utensils, electroplating, lighting conductors, dowels in
stone masonry, etc.
8.2. Plastics:
Plastic is one the recent engineering materials, which has
appeared in the market all over the world. Plastic is an organic substance
and it consists of natural or synthetic binder or resins with or without
moulding compounds. Plastics are the compounds of carbon with other
elements such as hydrogen, nitrogen and oxygen.
Properties:
1. Appearance: Some Plastics are completely transparent in
appearance
2. Chemical resistance: Plastics offer great resistance to moisture,
chemicals and solvents.
3. Dimensional Stability: This property of plastic favours quite
satisfactorily with that of other common engineering materials.
4. Ductility: Plastic lacks ductility. Hence its member may fail
without warning
5. Electrical Insulation: Plastic posses excellent electric insulating
property
6. Durability: Please are quite durable.
7. Finishing: Any surface treatment may be given to plastic. It is
also easy to have technical control during its manufacture.
8. Fire Resistance: Plastic are organic in nature and hence, all

plastics are combustible.
9. Fixing: Plastics can be easily fixed in position they can be bolted,

clamped, drilled, glued, screw threaded or simply push filled in
position.
10. Humidity: The properties of plastic are governed to some extent

by humidity.
11. Maintenance: It is easy to maintain plastic surfaces.
12. Melting Point: Most of the plastics have low melting point is
about 500C.
13. Optical Property: Several types of plastics are transparent and

translucent.
14. Sound Absorption: Acoustical boards are prepared by

impregnating fiberglass with phenolic resins.
15. Strength: Plastic are reasonably strong. The strength of plastics

may be increased by reinforcing with various fibrous materials.
16. Thermal property: Thermal conductivity of plastics is low

compared to with wood.
17. Weather Resistance: Only certain varieties of plastics can be

exposed to weather.
18. Weight: Low Specific gravity. The length weight of the plastic
reduces the transport costs and facilitates fixing.
Uses of Plastics:
1. Bath and Sink units
2. Cistern ball floats
3. Corrugated and plain sheets
4. Decorative laminate and mouldings
5. Electrical conducts
6. Electrical insulations
7. Films of water proofing, damp proofing
8. Floor tiles
9. Foams for thermal insulation
10. Jiontless flooring
11. Lighting fixtures
12. Overhead water tanks
13. Paints and varnishes
14. Pipes to carry cold water
15. Roof lights
16. Wall tiles
17. Safety glass
18. Water resistant adhesives etc.
8.3. Adhesives:
An adhesive is a substance, which is used to join two or

more parts so as to form a single unit.
Advantages:
1. A wide variety of combination is joining is possible
2. It can be used for bonding the surfaces of glass, metal, plastics
and wood.
3. It creates a massive effect
4. It is possible to prevent corrosion between different metals joined
by adhesive.
5. It produces adequate strength
6. Permeable joint can be made impermeable for water and gas by
the application of adhesives
7. The process of applying adhesives is easy, economical and
speedy.
Disadvantages
1. It is not possible to adopt any adhesive for all substances.
2. The adhesive substances does not become strong immediately
after its application
3. The adhesive substances does not generally remain stable at high
temperatures.
8.4 Asbestos:
Asbestos is naturally occurring fibrous mineral substance.
It is composed of hydrous silicates of calcium and magnesium
(CaSio3,3MgSio3) It also contains small amounts of Iron Oxide

and alumina Natural asbestos can be divided into two groups.
1. Acid resistances asbestos.
2. Non Acid resistance asbestos.
Properties:
1. Holes can be drilled and screws can be fitted on its surface.
2. It can be cut into pieces
3. It is an excellent insulator of heat and electricity.
4. It is fire proof and acid proof
5. It is flexible soft and Non-proof
6. It is smooth like glass and silk
7. It prossesses a good adsorption capacity
8. Its colour is brown, grey or white
9. Its melting point is 1200C to 15500C
10. Its specific gravity is 3.10
11. Its quality is critically affected by the length of fibers
12. Its molecules are strong bound together only in one direction and
that is why it possesses very high tensile strength along the fibers.
Uses:
1. Asbestos cement products have become very popular at present
2. Asbestos felt can be prepared by coating asbestos fibers with
bitumen and it is used as damp proof layer.
3. It is used as covering material for magnetic coils
4. It is used as lining material of fuse box and switch box
5. It is used for insulating boilers, furnaces, etc.
6. It is used for preparing five proof cloths, ropes etc
7. It is used to form asbestos paint.
8.5 Glass:
Glass is a mixture of a number of metallic silicates, one of which
is usually that of an alkali metal. It is a amorphous, transparent or
translucent. It may also be considered as a solidified super cooled
solution of various metallic silicates having infinite viscosity. For the
purpose if classification glass may be graped into the following three
categories.
1. Soda-lime glass. Na2, CaO, 6SiO2
2. Potash-lime glass. K20, CaO, 6SiO2
3. Potash – Lead glass. K20, PbO, 6SiO2
Properties:-
1. It absorbs, refracts or transmits light.
2. It can take up high polish and may be used as substitute for every
costly gems.
3. It has no definite crystalline structure.
4. It has no sharp melting point.
5. It is affected by alkalies
6. It is an excellent electrical insulator
7. It is available in beautiful colours.
8. It behaves more as solid than most solids in the sense that it is
elastic
9. It is capable of being worked in many ways
10. It is extremely brittle.
11. It is not usually affected by air or water
12. It is possible to intentionally after some of its properties such as

fusibility, hardness, refractive power or to suit different purposes.
13. It is not easily attacked by ordinary chemical reagents.
14. It is possible to objects glasses with diversified properties. The
glasses may be clear, colourless, deffused and stained.
15. It is possible to weld pieces of glass by fusion
16. It is transparent and translucent.
17. When it is heated, it becomes soft and soft with rise in
temperature.
18. It is possible to make glass lighter than cork or softer than cotton
or stronger then steel by using advancement of science.
Uses:
1.Soda lime glass: It is used in the manufacture of glass tubes,
laboratory apparatus, plate glass, window glass etc.
2. Potash lime glass: It is used in the manufacuter of glass
articles, which have to with stand high temperatures.
3.Potash – Lead glass: It is used in the manufacture of artificial
gems, electric bulbs, lenses, prisms etc.
4.Comman Glass: It is mainly used in the manufacture of
medicine bottles.
8.6 Plaster of paries.

When finely ground gypsum rock is heated to a
temperature between 1000c and 1400c, three fourth of the
combined water passes offas gas stream. The remaining product
is known as ‘Plaster of Paris’ if pure gypsum has been used and
‘Hard wall Plaster’ of the gypsum rock contains impurities.
Uses: 1.Plaster of Paris is used for cast of nonmetal plasterwork

2. It produces hard surface, sharp contours.
8.7 Lenoleum:
It is a mixture of oxidized unseed oil, pulverized cork,
wood flour, pigments and colours, all spread in a uniform layer
on canvas the surface of which may be painted in different
patterns, the surface is then, afterwards water-proofed with the
help of an oil paint.
It is available in different gauges(i.e thickness 6.7, 6.0,
4.5, 3.2, 2.0 and 1.6mm) and is easily cleaned with soap water. It
is not affected by oil but slightly affected by acids. Linoleum is
made in rolls as well as in tiles. Linoleum is used for floor
coverings of hospitals, canteens, residences, offices and industrial
buildings.
8.8 Wall paper:

Wall paper are now widely used for developing
decorative finished of interior walls and they are made
exclusively from paper or combined with other materials. They
may be unprimed, primed, embossed, metal-coated etc. They are
available in single or multicolour patterns printed on the face
surfaces. Varnished wall paper can be polished after hanging to
develop the effect of veneer panelled wall. Certain types of wall
papers are washable. Wall paper with sound absorbing properties

are also available Metal-coated wall papers are prepared from
wall papers coated with a primer of metallic powder and then
patterns are printed or embossed in the surface.
8.9 a) Bitumen: Bitumen is the binding material, which is prevent in
asphalt. This is also called far obtained from partial distillation of
crude petroleum
1. It is chemically a hydro-carbon
2. Insoluble in water
3. Soluble in carbon disulphide
4. Black or brown in colour
The following are the forms of bitumen
1. Bitumen emulsion
2. Blow bitumen
3. cut-back bitumen
4. plastic bitumen
5. straight run bitumen
b) Tar: Tar is a dark black liquid with high viscosity. According
to its source, tar is classified into following categories
1) Coal Tar
2) Mineral Tar
3) Wood Tar
1) Coal Tar: Usually obtained as a bye-product during the
manufacture of coal gas. Coal tar is used for making macadam
roads, preserving timber etc.
2) Mineral tar: This variety of tar is obtained by distilling
bituminous shales. It contains less volatile matter
3) Wood tar: This type of tar is obtained by distillation of pines
and similar other resinous trees. It contains creosote oil hence, it
possesses strong preservative property.
Uses:
1. Rooting, damp proofing felts
2. Fill eracks in masonary structures, for stopping leakages etc
8.10 Thermocole:
It is used for thermal insulation and sound insulation.
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. The ferrous metals used for various engineering purposes cast

iron, wrought iron and steel
2. The non-ferrous metals which are generally used in engineering
structures are Aluminium, cobalt, copper, lead, magnesium,
nickel, tin, zinc etc
3. The important ores of iron are hematite, lemonite, magnetite,
pyrite and siderite.
4. The manufacture of pig iron involved following operations
(i) Dressing
(ii) Calcination and roasting
(iii) Smelting
5. Cast iron contains 2 to 4 percentage of carbon, wrought iron the
carbon content does not exceed 0.15 percent and where as in
steel, carbon percentage should be 0.15 to 1.5 percent
6. Aluminium is extracted from bauxite and used for making the
parts of aeroplane, utensils, paints, electric wires, window
frame, structural members etc.
7. Copper is a non-ferrous metal used for sheets, tubes, wires,
cables, alloys, household utensils, electroplating, lightening
conductors etc.
8. Plastics are the compounds of carbon with other elements such
as hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen used for the following.
Electrical conducts, insulators, floor tiles, thermal insulation,
corrugated and plain sheets, banth and sink units etc
9. Adhesive is a substance used to join two or more parts so as to
form single unit have following uses
(i) To join glass, metal, plastic, wood
10. Asbestors is naturally occurring fibrous mineral substance used
for the following
(i) Damp proof layer
(ii) Covering material for magnetic coils
(iii) Lining material for fuse box and switch box
(iv) Insulating boilers, furnaces etc
(v) Fire proof cloths, ropes etc
11. Glass is a mixture of metallic silicates used for the following
glass tubes, laboratory apparatus, window glass, artificial gems,
electric bulbs, prisms, medicine bottles
12. Plaster of paris is used fro the following purposes
(i) Ornamental works
(ii) Produces hard surface, sharp contours
13. Linoleum is mixture of oxidized unseed oil pulverized cork,
wood flour, pigments and colour, all spread in a uniform layer
on canvas the surface of which may be painted in different
patterns, the surface is then, afterwards water-proofed with the
help of an oil paint.

1.Name important metals used in building construction
2.Name important non-metals used in the building construction
3.What are the uses of cast iron?
4.What are the uses of wrought iron?
5.What the properties of steel?
6.Name any four uses of steel.
7.What are the properties of plastics?
8.Name any four uses of plastics.
9.What are the uses of glass?
10. What are the uses of adhesives?
11. Name any four uses of asbestos.
12. What is the use of thermocole?
13. What is the importance of plaster of paris in the building
construction industry?
14. Name the uses of linoleum
15. What are the uses of wall paper?
16. Write the uses of bitumen & tar
17. What are the uses of plasticrete?
1.Explain the properties and uses of steel
2.Explain the following
a. Plastics b. asbestos
3.Explain the properties and uses of cast iron
4.Explain the following
a. Plaster of paris b. Linoleum
* * *
CHAPTER – 9
TYPES OF BUILDINGS
9.1 Classification:
According National Building code of India, 1970 the
buildings on the basis of occupancy are classified into following
groups
GROUP A: Residential buildings:
All those buildings in which sleeping accommodation is provided for
residing permanently or temporary with or without looking or
dinning or both facilities are termed as residential building
Ex: Apartments, Flats, Bungalows, Dormitories, private houses,
Hotels, Hostels, Cottages, Hole day camps, clubs, hotels, Inns etc
These buildings are further subdivided into 5 groups
A1 - Lodging Houses
A2 - Family Private Dwellings
A3 - Dormitories
A4 - Flats
A5 - Hotels
GROUP B: Educational buildings:
All those buildings which are meant for education from nursery to
university are included in this group
Ex: schools, colleges, universities, training institutes etc
GROUP C: Institutional Buildings:
This group includes any building or part thereof, which is used for
the purposes such as medical, health, recovering health after illness,
Types of Buildings Page 121
physical or mental diseases, care of infants or aged persons, panel

detention etc. These buildings normally provide sleeping
accommodation for the occupants.
GROUP D: Assembly Buildings:
This group includes any building or part or a building where groups
of people assemble or gather for amusement; recreation, social,
religious, patriotic or similar purpose for example theatres, cinema
halls, museums, gymnasiums, restaurants, places of worship, dance
halls, club rooms, passenger stations, public transportation services,
open air theatres, swimming pools etc.
GROUP E- Business Buildings:
This group includes any building or part or a building which is used
for purposes such as transaction of business, keeping of accounts and
records etc; dispensaries and clinics, banks, city halls, court halls,
libraries etc.
GROUP F – Mercantile Buildings:
This group includes any building or part of a building which is used
for shops, stores, market, for safe and display of products or waves
either whole sale or retail.
GROUP G – Industrial Buildings:
This group includes any building or part of a building or structure in
which product of different kinds and properties are fabricated,
assembled or processed. For example, laboratories, assembly plants,
laundries, gas plants, power plants, refineries, diaries etc.
GROUP H – Storage Building:
This group includes those building structures which are primarily
used for the storage structures which are primarily used for the
storage or sheltering of goods, waves or merchandise vehicles or
animals, for example warehouses, cold storages, freight depots, store
houses, transit sheds, truck terminals, garages etc.
GROUP J – Hazardous Building:
This group includes those building structures which are used for the
storage, handling, manufacture or processing of materials which are
liable to burn with extreme rapidity and prove hazards to health;
building or building contents. Hazards may be due to fire; poisonous
fumes or gases, explosions, ignitions etc from materials subjected to
various operations. Buildings used for storage of gases under high
pressure or for storage and handling of highly flammable liquids or
explosives, fireworks etc are included in this group.
9.2 Component parts of building

The building basically consists of three parts namely,
1) Foundation
2) Plinth and
3) Super structure as shown in the fig 9.1
Fig 9.1 Component parts of building

i) Foundation: It is the lowest artificially prepared part
below the surface of the surrounding ground which is
indirect contact with sub-strata and transmits all the loads
to the ground (or sub-soil)
ii) Plinth: It is the middle part of the structure, above the
surface of the surrounding ground up to the surface of the
floor immediately above the ground. Its function in the
building is same as of sub-structure in the case of the
bridge.
iii) Super structure: It is that part of the structure which is
constructed above the plinth level (i.e., ) ground level
A building in general made of the following structural components
1. Foundation
2. Plinth
3. Walls and piers in super structure
4. Ground, basement and upper floors
5. Doors and windows
6. Sills, Lintels and weather shades
7. Roofs
8. Steps and stairs
9. Finishes for walls
10.Utility fixtures
Each of these components is an essential part of a building and
requires due consideration in design and construction for their functional
performance. The basic functional requirements of these components
discusses in the following paragraphs.
1. Foundations:
The foundation is the most critical part of any structure and most
of the failure is probably due to faulty foundations rather than any other
cause. The purpose of foundation is to transmit the anticipated loads
safety to the soil
Basic requirements:
1. To distribute the total load coming on the structure over a large
bearing area so as to prevent it from any movement.
2. To load the bearing surface or area at a uniform rate so as to
prevent any unequal or relative settlement.
3. To prevent the lateral movement of the structure
4. To secure a level or firm natural bed, upon which to lay the

courses of masonary and also support the structure.
5. To increase the suitability of the structure as a whole, so as to
prevent it from overturning or sliding against such as wind, rain,
frost etc.
2. Plinth: This is the portion of structure between the surface of the
surrounding ground and surface of the floor, immediately above the
ground. As per Byelaws, the plinth should not be less than 45cm. The
basic requirements of plinth area
1) To transmit the load of the super-structure to the
foundation
2) To act as a retaining wall so as to keep the filling portion
below the raised floor or the building
3) To protect the building from damp or moisture
penetration into it
4) It enhances the architectural appearance of the building
3. Walls and piers in super structure: The primary function of walls is
to enclose or liquid space. A load-bearing wall in the super structure
should satisfy the following requirements.
Strengths, stability, weather resistance, fire resistance, heat
insulation, sound insulation, privacy and security.
4. Ground basement and upper floors: The main function of a floor is
to provide support of occupants, furniture and equipment of a building
and the function of providing different floors is to devoid the building
into different levels for the purpose of creating more accommodation
within the limited space. The floor should satisfy the following
functional requirements.
1. Strength and stability
2. Durability and dampness
3. Heal insulation
4. Sound insulation and fire resistance
5.Doors and windows: The main function of doors in a building is to
serve us a connecting link between internal parts and also to allow the
free movement outside the building. Windows are generally provided for
the proper ventilation and lighting of a building.
The following are the functional requirements
1. Weather resistance
2. Sound and thermal insulation
3. Damp prevention and terminate-proofing
4. Fire resistance and durability
5. Privacy and security
6. Sills. Lintels and weather shades:
Windowsills are provided between the bottom of window
frame and wall below, to protect the top of wall from wear and
tear. The actual frame of door or window is not strong enough to
support the weight of the wall above the strong enough to support
the weight of the wall above the openings and a separate
structural element has, therefore to be introduced. This is known
as lintel and is similar to a beam. Weather shades on ehhajjas are
generally combined with lintels of windows to protect from the
weather elements such as sun, rain, frost etc.
7. Roofs:
A roof is the uppermost part of the building whose main function
is to enclose the space and to protect the same from the effects of
weather elements such as rain, sun, wind, heat, snow etc. A good
roof is just as essential as a safe foundation. The functional
requirements of the roof are as follows.
i) Strength and stability- strong and stable enough to take
up anticipated loads
ii) Weather resistance – resistance to wind, rain, sun,
snow etc
iii) Heat insulation - should provide adequate insulation
against heat
iv) Sound insulation – should provide adequate deque of
insulation against sound from external sources.
v) Fire resistance – Should offer the adequate deque of
fire resistance.
vi) Day lighting – The provides day light in buildings
with large floor area i.e., industrial buildings through
window in the roof.
8.Steps and Stairs: A stair is a structural consists of number of steps
leading from one floor to another. The main functions of stairs are
i. To provide means of communication between the various floors
for everyday use
ii. To escape from upper floors in the case of fire
To perform these functions, the stairs should satisfy the following
requirements indesign and construction.
i) Strength and stability- Strong and stable enough to carry
the anticipated loads.
ii) Fire resistance- The stairs should be made of the fire
resisting material and they provide safe means of escape
in the event of fire.
iii) Sound Insulation: If it is necessary to insulate the stairs
from the sound either through the proper design and use
of insulating materials or separating stair structure from
the building structure.
iv) Weather resistance- The stairs, if exposed to open air,
should offer sufficient resistance to weather elements
such as rain, heat etc.
v) Comfort and convience: proper design and proper
location of steps in a building offer several advantages
such as comfort and efficiency in vertical movement,
natural light and ventilation; safety in emergency etc.
9.Finishes for walls: The finishes of several types such as pointing,
plastering, painting, types such as pointing, plastering, painting,
distempering, decorative colour washing etc applied on the walls. The
main function of these finishes are
a. Protect structure from the sun, rain, snow etc.
b. Provide a true, even and smooth finished surface and also to
improve the asthetic appearance of the structure.
c. Rectify rather cover, to some extent, the poor or defective
workmanship
d. Cover up the unsound and porous materials used in the
construction
10.Utility Fixtures: These are the built in items of an unmovable nature,
which add considerably to the utility of a building and hence
termedas utility fixtures. The most common of such built-in

fixtures are: cupboards, shelves, smokeless chulas etc. These
features are generally provided in the recesses for storing
valuable articles, clothes etc. The recesses in wall structure
reduce its strength, so they are avoided in the modern
construction of houses.
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. According to national building code of India; 1970 the buildings are

classified as
(i) Group A – Residential Buildings
(ii) Group B – Educational Buildings
(iii) Group C – Institutional Buildings
(iv) Group D – Assembly Buildings
(v) Group E – Business Buildings
(vi) Group F – Mercantile Buildings
(vii) Group G – Industrial Buildings
(viii) Group H – Storage Buildings
(ix) Group J – Herzardous buildings
2. A building basically consists of
(i) Foundation
(ii) Plinth
(iii) Super structure
3. A Building in general made of the following structural members
(i) Foundation
(ii) Plinth
(iii) Walls and piers in super structure
(iv) Ground, basement and structure
(v) Ground, basement and upper floors
(vi) Doors and windows
(vii) Sills, lintels and weather shades
(viii) Roofs
(ix) Steps and stairs
(x) Finishes for walls
(xi) Utility fixtures
1.Define substructure.
2.Define superstructure.
3.What are the structural components of a building?
4.Define plinth.
5.Name any four types classification based on N.B.C.
1.Explain the structural components of building.
2.Explain the classification of buildings.
* * *
CHAPTER – 10
FOUNDATIONS
Every structure consists of two parts. (1) Foundation and (2) Super
structure. The lowest artificially prepared parts of the structure which are
in direct contact with the ground and which transmit the loads of the
structure to the ground are known as Foundation or Substructure. The
solid ground on which the foundation rest is called the “foundation bed”
or foundation soil and it ultimately bears the load and interacts with the
foundations of buildings.
10.1 Objects of foundations:
Foundations are provided for the following purposes
1) To distribute the total load coming on the structure on large
area.
2) To support the structure
3) To give enough stability to the structures against various
distributing forces such as wind, rain etc.
4) To prepare a level surface for concreting and masonry work.
The general inspection of site of work serves as a good for
determine the type of foundation, to be adopted for the proposed
work and in addition, it helps in getting the data w.r.to the
following items.
i) Behavior of ground due to variations in depth of water
table
ii) Disposal of storm water at site
iii) Nature of soil by visual examination
iv) Movement of ground due to any reason etc.
Foundations Page 133
10.2 Bearing capacity: The ability of the foundation material,

weather soil or rock to carry loads safely.
Methods of determine the bearing capacity of soil:
The bearing capacity of soil is determined by any one of the
following methods
(i) Method of loading
(ii) Method of dropping a weight
I. Method of loading
Procedure to carry out the test:
1. A square pit of required size is excavated upto 5 times the
side of steel plate to be used. At the centre of pit, square hole
is dig, which is same ratio to that of breadth to depth of pit.
2. The bottom of the hole is made level
3. The steel plate is put up in the hole and then platform is
prepared as shown in fig 10.1.
Fig 10.1 Method of loading

4. The amount of initial load is decided according to the type of
the soil to be tested
5. A level is planted to note the setting of steel plate w.r.to the
permanent benchmark.
6. The load is to be kept on platform till the settlement of the
ground ceases or stops
7. The load is increased by a suitable amount, usually 0.5 tonnes
and the procedure is continued
8. The recording of results is carried out in the following
proforma.
Date and
time of Load Increase in Total settlement Remarks
taking settlement
reading
0.5 a a
tonne b a+b
c a+b+c
- - settlement
ceases
a1 a+b+c+a1
1.0 b1 a+b+c+a1+b1
tonne c1 a+b+c+a1+b1+c1 settlement
ceases
9. The settlement of the ground will be fairly is proportion to the
load upto a certain limit, when the bearing power of soil
exceeded, the settlement will be out of the proportion.
10. The bearing capacity and safe bearing capacity of soil are
calculated by using the following
Bearing capacity of soil in tones/m2

Maximum load
= --------------------------------
Area of steel plate
Safe bearing capacity of soil in tones/m2
Bearing capacity of soil
= ---------------------------------------
Factor of safety
Note:
1) This method can also be used for confirming the known bearing
power of a soil
2) The loading should applied without shock
3) Dial gauges or deflect meters to record the settlement instead of

level & staff for the accuracy upto 0.02mm
4) The zero corrections should be deducted from the observed

settlement to get actual settlements zero correction is the
settlement due to adjustment of soil particles under the action of
loading
5) The bearing capacity of sandy soil and gravelly soil is affected to

the extent of 50% by presence of water table. Water should be
pumped out before placing the steel plate
6) The results obtained by this method are fairly accurate and

reliable.
II. Method of dropping a weight:

In this method, a substance of known weight is dropped
from a known height as shown in 10.2. The depth of impression
made by the weight on the soil is noted. Then the bearing
capacity of the soil is worked out as follows.
Fig 10.2 Method of Dropping Weight

Ultimate resistance of soil
wxh
R= -------------
d
where R – Resistance of soil

A – cross section area of the substance
h - Height
w - weight of substance
? Safe bearing capacity of soil per unit are

=R/Axf
Where f – factor of safety
The results obtained by this method are approximate and hence,
this method is used for minor engineering structures or at places where
first method would be impractible.
10.3 Types of soils – Bearing Capacity: Ultimately the load of the

structure is coming on the soil and hence, it is of utmost importance to
know the strength and behavior of the soil. The term bearing power or
bearing capacity of soil is used to indicate the maximum load per unit
area, which the soils resist safely without displacement. Dividing the
ultimate bearing capacity of a soil by a factor of safety, the safe bearing
capacity of a soil is obtained. Max. safe bearing capacity of different
types of soils are given in table 10.1.
S.No. Type of Soil Max. safe bearing
capacity t/m2
1. Soft, wet clay or muddy clay 5
2. Black cotton soil 15
3. Soft clay 10
4. Moist clay, and sand clay
Mixture 15
5. Medium clay 25
6. Compact clay 45
7. Fine, loose and dry sand 10
8. Medium, compact and dry sand 25
9. Compact sand 45
10. Loose gravel 25
11. Compact gravel 45
12. Soft rocks 45
13. Laminated rock such as sand stone &
Lime stone 165
14. Hard rocks such as granite, diorite, trap 330
Table 10.1
10.4 Types of foundations:

Depending upon their nature and depth, foundations have been
categorized as follows
(i) Open foundations or shallow foundations
(ii) Deep foundations
I. Open foundations or shallow foundations: This is most common

type of foundation and can be laid using open excavation by
allowing natural slopes on all sides. This type of foundation is
practicable for a depth of about 5m and is normally convenient
above the water table. The base of the structure is enlarged or
spread to provide individual support. Since the spread foundations
are constructed in open excavations, therefore they are termed as
open foundations. This type of foundation is provided for structure
of moderate height built on sufficiently firm dry ground. The
various types of spread footings are:
1. Wall footing
2. Isolated footing
3. Combined footing
4. Inverted arch footing
5. Continuous footing
6. Cantilever footing
7. Grillage footing
1. Wall Footing: These footings can be either simple or stepped.

The base course of these footings can be concrete or entirely of
one material simple footing are used for light structures. They
have only one projection beyond the width of the wall. The
base width of the concrete base course should be equal to twice
the width of wall. The depth of concrete bed is atleast twice the
projection as shown in fig 10.3. The depth of concrete bed is
calculated by
p
T = m where t – depth of concrete bed
f
m – offset of concrete bed in cm

p – Load coming on soil kg/cm2
f – 0.03 x ultimate crushing strength of concrete in 28 days
The depth of the footing is calculated by the following formula
2
p § 1 sin I ·
H = ¨¨ ¸¸ where
w © 1 sin I ¹
H - Minimum depth of footing in metre

p - Safe bearing capacity of soil in kg/m2
w - Unit wt. Of soil in kg/m3
I - Angle of repose of the soil
the depth of footing is generally limited to 0.9m the width of
footing should be calculated by divided the total load in kg/m run
by the allowable bearing capacity of soil in kg/m2.
Fig 10.3
2. Isolated Footings: These are used to support individed
columns. They can be of stepped type or have projections in the
concrete base. In case of heavy loaded columns steel
reinforcement is provided in both directions in concrete with
15cm offsets as shown in the fig10.4.
Fig 10.4 Types of Isolated Footings
3. Combined Footing: A combined footing supports two or more

columns in a row A Combined footing may be rectangular or
trapezoidal constructed with reinforced concrete. The location
of centre of gravity of column loads and centroid of the footing
should coincide. The combined footing is as shown in fig10.5.
Fig 10.5 Combined Footings

4. Inverted Arch Footing: This type of construction is used on
soft soils to reduce the depth of foundation loads above an
opening are transmitted from supporting walls through inverted
arches to the soil. In this type the end columns must be stable
enough to resist the outward pressure caused by arch actions.
The inverted arch footing is as shown in fig10.6.
Fig 10.6 Inverted Footing

5. Continuous Footing: In this type of footing a single

continuous R.C slab is produced as foundation of two or three
or more columns in a row. This type of footing is suitable at
locations liable to earthquake activities. This also prevents
differential settlement in the structure. In order to have better
stability a deeper beam is constructed in between the columns
as shown in fig10.7.
Fig 10.7 Continuous Footing
6. Strap or cantilever footing: Strap footing consists of two or

more individual footings connected by a beam called strap or
cantilever footing or pump handle foundation. This type of
foundation may be used where the distance between the
columns is so great that combined trapezoidal footing becomes
quite narrow with high bending moments strap or cantiliver
footing is as shown in fig 10.8.
Fig 10.8 Strap or cantilever footing
7. Grillage footing : This type of footing is used to transmit

heavy loads from steel columns to foundation soils having low
bearing power. This type of foundation avoids deep excavation
and provides necessary area at the base to reduce the intensity
of pressure of the foundation soil is not stiff and there is a
plenty of water with spring, the sides are protected by sharing.
The grillage footing is a s shown in fig 10.9.
Fig 10.9 Grillage Footing

8. Raft Foundation: A raft or mat is a combined footing that
covers the entire area beneath a structure and supports all the
columns. When the allowable soil pressure is low or the
structure loads are heavy the use of spread footings would
cover more than one half of the area and it may be prove more
economical to use raft foundation. There are also used where
the soil mass contains compressible lenses so that the
differential settlement would be difficult to control usually
when the hard soil is not available within 1.5 to 2.5m, a raft
foundation is adopted. The raft is composed of reinforced.
Concrete beam with relatively thin slab underneath fig 10.10
shows different types of raft.
Fig 10.10 Different types of Raft Foundations

II Deep foundations:
These foundations carry loads from a structure through weak
compressible soil or fills onto the stronger and less compressible
soils or rocks at depth. These foundations are in general used as
basements, buoyancy rofts, eaissions, cylinders, shaft and piles.
a) Basements: There are constructed in place in an open excavation.

They are hallow slab structure designed to provide working or
storage space below ground level. The structural design is
governed by their functional requirements.
b) Buoyancy rafts: They are hallow substructures designed to

provide a buoyant substructure beneath with the net loading on
the soil reduce to the desired low intensity.
c) Coissions: They are hallow substructures designed to be

constructed on or near the surface and then sunk as single units to
their required level.
d) Cylinders: They are small single cell coissions
e) Shaft foundations: They are constructed within deep excavation

supported by lining constructed in place subsequently filled with
concrete.
f) Pile foundations: Pile foundation is a construction for the

foundation supported on piles. A pile is an element of
construction composed of timber, concrete, or steel or a
combination of them. Pile foundation may be defined as a
column support type of a foundation, which may be cast in-situ or
Pre-cast. This type of construction is adopted when the loose soil
extends to a great depth. The load of the structure is transmitted
by the piles to hard stratum below or it is resisted by the friction
developed on the sides of pipes.
(i) Classification based on the function
a) Bearing piles- Penetrate through soft soil and their

bottom rest on a hard stratum
b) Friction piles- The frictional resistance is equal to load

coming on the piles as shown in the fig 10.11.
Fig 10.11 Friction file & Bearing Pile
c) Screw piles-Used for gravely ground sand, mixed gravel

ground etc as shown in fig 10.12.
Fig 10.12 Different types of screw piles

d) Uplift piles- when the structure subjected to uplift
pressure.
e) Butter pile – To resist large horizontal or inclined forces
f) Sheet pile-used as bulk heads or a impervious cutoff
(ii) Classification based on materials and composition
a) Cement concrete piles-Posses excellent compressive
strength
1) Precast
2) Cast-in-site
a) Under reamed piles
b) Bored compaction piles as shown in fig 10.13.
Fig 10.13. Pre-cast concrete Pile

b) Timber piles-Small bearing capacity, not suitable for
hard soil and economical
c) Steel piles-With stand impact stresses and resist lateral
forces
d) Sand piles-Not suitable for loose or wet soils or where is
a danger of scour. Easy to construct and irrespective of
water table.
e) Composite piles- combination of two different materials
are used to form composite file and suitable where the
upper part of pile to project above the water table.
Economical and easy to construct as shown in fig 10.14.
Fig 10.14 Under-reamed Piles
10.5Requirements of a good foundation:

Following are the three basic requirements to be fulfilled by a
foundation to be satisfactory
1) Location : The foundation should be located that it is able
to resist any unexpected future influence which may
adversely affect its performance. This aspect requires
careful engineering judgement.
2) Stability: The foundation structure should be stable or safe
against any possible failure
3) Settlement: The foundation structure should not settle or
deflect to such an extent so as to impair its usefulness.
10.6Causes of failure of good foundation:
The different causes for foundation failure are given below
1. Non uniform settlement of sub soil and masonry
2. Horizontal movement of the soil adjacent to structure
3. Alternate swelling and shrinkage in wet and dry cycles of

the season
4. Lateral pressure due to lateral movement of earth tending

to over turn the structure
5. Action of weathering agencies like sun, wind or rain
6. Lateral escape of the soil beneath the foundation of the

structure
7. Roots trees and shrubs which penetrate the foundation
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. Foundations is the lowest – artificially prepared parts of structure
which are in direct contact with ground and which transmit the loads
of the structure to the ground
2. The object of providing the foundation is
(i) To distribute the total load coming onto the structure on large
area
(ii) To support the structure
(iii)To give stability to the structure
(iv)To prepare a level surface for concreting and masonry work
3. The bearing capacity of soil is used to indicate maximum load per
unit area which the soil will resist safely without displacement
4. Depending upon their nature and depth, the foundations are
(i) Shallow foundation
(ii) Deep foundation
5. The shallow or open foundation are the following types usually about
5m and above water table
(i) Wall footing
(ii) Isolated footing
(iii) Combined footing
(iv) Inverted footing
(v) Continuous footing
(vi) Cantilever footing
(vii) Grillage footing
6. Deep foundations carry loads from a structure through weak
compressible soils or fills are classified as
(i) Basements
(ii) Buoyancy rafts
(iii) Caissons
(iv) Shaft foundations
(v) Pile foundations
7. Classification based on the function
(i) Bearing piles
(ii) Friction piles
(iii) Screw piles
(iv) Uplift piles
(v) Batter piles
(vi) Sheet piles
8. Classification based on materials and composition
(i) Cement concrete piles a. Pre-cast b. Cast-in-site
(ii) Timber piles
(iii) Steel piles
(iv) Sand piles
(v) Composite piles
9. A good foundation should have the basic requirements
(i) Location
(ii) Stability
(iii) Settlement
10. The causes for the failure of foundations
(i) Non uniform settlement
(ii) Horizontal movement of the soil
(iii) Alternate swelling and shrinkage
(iv) Lateral pressure due to lateral movement of earth
(v) Action of weathering agencies
(vi) Lateral escape of the soil beneath the foundation of
structure
(vii) Roofs of trees and shrubs

1. What are the main types of foundations?
2. What is the purpose of foundation?
3. What is meant by bearing capacity of soil?
4. Name the methods of determining the bearing capacity of soil?
5. Define safe bearing capacity.
6. Name any two causes of failure of foundations.
7. Name any two requirements of a good foundation
8. What is shallow foundation?
9. What is meant by deep foundation?
10. Name any four types of shallow foundations.
11. What is the purpose of raft foundation?
12. What is the grillage footing?

1. Explain the requirements of good foundation.
2. What is bearing capacity and explain any one method to find the
bearing capacity of soil?
3. Explain the causes for the foundation failures.
4. Explain the types of shallow foundations in brief.
5. What are deep foundations? Name the types.
6. Explain the functions of foundation.
* * *
CHAPTER – 11
MASONRY
Masonry is defined as the art of construction in which building

units, such as clay bricks, sand-lime, bricks, stones, Pre-cast hallow
concrete blocks, concrete slabs, glass bricks, combination of some of
these building units etc are arranged systematically and bonded together
to form a homogeneous mass in such a manner that they can with stand
point to other loads and transmit then through the mass without fail or
disintegration.
Masonry can be classified into the following categories.
1. Stone masonry
2. Brick masonry
3. Hallow block concrete masonry
4. Reinforced masonry
5. Composite masonry
These can be further sub-divided into varies types depending upon
workmanship and type of materials used.
Definitions of terms:
1. Course: A course is a horizontal layer of bricks stones
2. Bed: the surface of a stone perpendicular to the line of

pressure of (lower surface of bricks or stones in each course)
Masonry Page 157
3. Back: The inner surface of wall not exposed is called back.

The material forming back is known as backing
4. Face: The exterior of the wall exposed to weather is known

as face. The material used in the facing of wall is known as
facing’
5. Hearting: It is the interior portion of a wall between facing

and backing
6. Head: It is a brick or stone, which lies with its greatest length

at right angles to the face of the work.
7. Stretcher: It is a brick or a stone which lies with its congest

side parallel to the face of the work
8. Bond: The method of arranging bricks so that the individual

units are tied together
9. Spalls: The chips of stones used for filling the interstics in

stone masonry
10. Quoins: The stones used for the corners of walls of structure
11. Bat: It is a portion of a brick cut across the width.
12. Closer: It is the portion of a brickcut in such a manner that its

one long face remains uncut
13. Queen closer: it is the portion of a brick obtained by cutting a

brick length-wise into two portions
14. King closer: It is the portion of brick obtained by cutting off
the triangular piece between the centre of one end and the
centre of one side.
15. Bevelled closer: It is the portion of a brick in which the

whole length of the brick is bevelled for maintaining half
width at one end and full width at the other
16. Frog: It is an indentation or depression on the top face of a

brick made with the object of forming a key for the mortar.
17. Sill: It is a horizontal stone, concrete or wood, employed for

the purpose of shedding off rain water from the face of wall
immediately below the window opening
18. Corbel: It is the extension of one or more course of stone or

brick from the face of a wall to serve as a support for wall
plates
19. Templates: Pieces of stones placed under the end of a beam

to distribute load over a greater area.
20. Coping: It is the course placed upon the exposed top of an

external wall to prevent the seepage of water
21. Buttress: It is a sloping or stepped masonry projection from a

tall wall intended to strengthen the wall against the thrust of a
roof as shown in fig 11.1
Masonry Page 159
Fig 11.1 Definitions of terms

11.1 Stone masonry: The construction of stones bonded together with
mortar is termed as stone masonry where the stones are available in a
abundance in nature, on cutting and dressing to the proper shape, they
provide an economical material for the construction of various building
components such as walls, columns, footings, arches, lintels, beams etc.
Uses of stone masonry:

Stone masonry construction is used in
(i) Building foundations, dams, monumental
structures
(ii) Building walls, piers, columns, pillars, light
houses and architectural works.
(iii) Arches, domes, lintels and beams
(iv) Roofs, flems, paving jobs
(v) Railway, bullest, black boards and electrical
switch boards
11.1.1 Selection of stone for stone masonry:
The selection of stones for stone masonry depends upon
a. Availability
b. Ease of working
c. Appearance
d. Strength and stability
e. Polishing characteristics
f. Economy
g. Durability
Masonry Page 161
The table 11.1 given broadly outlines the different types of stones
used for different purposes
S.No. Purpose Stones used
1. Heavy engineering works Granite, gneiss
Ex: stocks, break waters, light houses,
bridges, piers
2. Buildings situated in industrial towns Granite and compact
sandstone
3. Pavements, railway ballast, doorsits and Granite slabs and
steps slate
4. Electrical switch board Marble slabs and
slate
5. Fire resistance works Compact sandstone
6. Carving and ornamental works Marble and laterite
7. Face work and architectural purposes Marble, granite closer
gained sand stone

11.2 Tools required for stone masonry construction:
Fig 11.2 Tools for Stone Masonry

a) Trowel : This is used to lift and spread mortar
b) Square: This is made of flat steel having each arm about
0.5m long
c) Plumb rule and bob: This is used to check the vertically of
walls
d) Spirit level: this is used to chick the horizontality of walls
e) Line and pin: This is used to maintain the alignment of the
work in progress
f) Bevel: The instrument used to set right angles
g) Pick axe: This is employed for dressing of rough stone and
split the stones in the quarry
h) Crowbar: This is used to make stones in query
i) Chisels: They are used to dress stones
Masonry Page 163
j) Spall hammer: This is heavy hammer used for rough

dressing of stones
k) Mallet: The wooden hammer used for driving of wooded
headed chisels
l) Iron hammer: This is used for carving of stones
m) Scabbling hammer: This is used to break small projections
of stones
n) Pitching tool: This is used to make the stones of required size
o) Gauge: this is employed to dress stones for spring course,
comice, coping etc
p) Claw tool: This is employed for dressing the surface of
stones
q) Nicker: This is employed to draw fine chisel lines on the
stone surface
r) Jumper: They are used for boring holes
s) Wedge and feathers: They are employed for cutting the
stones after they have been bored with jumper.
t) Gad: A small steel wedge used for splitting of stones
u) Drag: This is employed to level a stone surface
v) Punch: This is employed to dress roughly the stones
w) Handsaw: This is used to cut soft stones
x) Cross-cut saw: This is used to cut hard stones
y) Frame saw: This is used to cut large blocks of stones.
11.3 Types of Stone Masonry:
Based on the arrangement of the stone in the construction and
degree of refinement in the surface finish, the stone masonry can be
classified broadly in the following two categories
1. Rubble masonry
2. Ashlar masonry
General principles in the stone masonry construction

1. The stones to be used for stone masonry should be hard, tough
and durable.
2. The pressure acting on stones should be vertical
3. The stones should be perfectly dressed as per the requirements
4. The heads and bond stones should not be of a dumb bell shape.
5. In order to obtain uniform distribution of load, under the ends of
griders, roof trusses etc large flat stones should be used
6. The beds of the stones and plan of the course should be at right
angles to the slope in the case of sloping retaining wall
7. Wood boxing should be filled into walls having fine dressed
stone work to protect it during further construction
8. The mortar to be used should be good quality and in the specified
faces.
9. The instruction work of stone masonry should be raised
uniformly.
10. The plumb bob should be used to check the vertically of erected
wall
11. The stone masonry section should always be designed to take
compression and not the tensile stresses
12. The masonry work should be properly cured after the completion
of work for a period of 2 to 3 weeks
13. As per as possible broken stones or small stones chips should not
used
Masonry Page 165
14. Double scaffolding should be used for working at higher level

15. The masonry hearting should be properly packed with mortar and
chips if necessary to avoid hallows
16. The properly wetted stones should be used to avoid mortar
moisture being sucked
1) Rubble masonry: In this category, the stones used are either

undressed or roughly dressed having wider joints. This can be further
subdivided as uncoursed, coursed, random, dry, polygonal and bint.
(i) Uncoursed rubble masonry: This is the cheapest, roughest and

poorest form of stone masonry. The stones used in this type of
masonry very much vary in their shape and size and are directly
obtained from quarry. Uncoursed rubble masonry can be divided into
the following.
a) Uncoursed random rubble
b) Uncoursed squared rubble
a) Uncoursed random rubble masonry: The weak corners and
edges are removed with mason’s hammer. Generally, bigger
stone blocks are employed at quoins and jambs to increase the
strength of masonry.
Fig 11.3 Uncoursed random rubble masonry

b) Uncoursed squared rubble: In this type the stone blocks are
made roughly square with hammer. Generally the facing stones
are given hammer-dressed finish. Large stones are used as
quoins. As far as possible the use of chips in bedding is avoided
as shown in 11.4.
Fig 11.4 Uncoursed squared rubble masonry

Masonry Page 167
(ii) Coursed random rubble: This type of masonry is commonly used

in the construction of low height walls of public buildings, residential
buildings, abutment and piers of ordinary bridges. The stones of 5 to
20cm size are used in each course as shown in fig 11.5.
Fig 11.5 Coursed Random Rubble

(iii)Coursed squared rubble: This type of masonry is made up of
hammer squared stones facing with bonded backing of uncoursed
random rubble masonry. The stones employed in each course are of
equal height. The backing and facing construction, should be carried
simultaneously. In order to avoid thick mortar joints, small chips may
be used as shown in the fig 11.6.
Fig 11.6 Coursed Squared Rubble Masonry

(iv)Built to regular course: In this type of stone masonry the uniform
height stones are used in horizontal layers not less than 13cm in
height. Generally, the stone beds are hammered or chisel dressed to a
depth of atleast 10cm from the face. The stones are arranged in such
a manner so that the vertical joints of two consecutive curse donot
coincide with each other as shown in fig 11.7.
Masonry Page 169
Fig 11.7 Built to regular courses

(v) Polygonal rubble masonry: In this type of masonry the stones are
roughly dressed to an irregular polygonal shape. The stones should
be so arranged as to avoid long vertical joints in face work and to
break joints as much as possible. Small stone chips should not be
used to support the stones on the facing as shown in fig 11.8.
Fig. 11.8 Polygonal rubble masonry

(vi) Plint rubble masonry: This type of masonry is used in the areas
where the flint is available in plenty. The flint stones varying in
thickness from 8 to 15cm and in length from 15 to 30cm are
arranged in the facing in the form of coursed or uncoursed masonry
as shown in fig 11.9.
Fig 11.9 Plint Rubble Masonry

Masonry Page 171
(vii) Dry rubble masonry: This type of masonry is used in the

construction of retaining walls pitching earthen dams and canal
slopes in the form of random rubble masonry without any mortar.
The hallow spaces left around stones should be tightly packed with
smaller stone pieces as shown in fig 11.10.
Fig 11.10 Dry Rubble Masonry
2. Ashlar Masonry: This type of masonry is built from accurately

dressed stones with uniform and fine joints of about 3mm thickness
by arranging the stone blocks in various patterns. The backing of
ashlar masonry walls may be built of ashlar masonry or rubble
masonry. The size of stones blocks should be in proportion to wall
thickness. The various types of masonry can be classified under the
following categories as shown in fig 11.11 to fig 11.13 .
(i) Ashlar fine
(ii) Ashlar rough
(iii) Ashlar rock or quarry faced

(iv) Ashlar facing
(v) Ashlar chamfered
(vi) Ashlar block in course
Fig 11.11 Ashlar Fine Masonry
Fig 11.12 Ashlar chamfered Masonry
Fig 11.13 Ashlar Facing

Masonry Page 173
11.5 Brick masonry:
Brick masonry is a unified mass obtained by systematic

arrangement of laying bricks and bonding together with mortar. Brick is
a building unit of hard inorganic clay material of size which can be
conviently handled. The brick masonry is used in foundations, walls,
columns, buttresses, retaining structures window sells, jambs, corbels,
copings ornamental brickwork, circular brickwork, fire places, flumes,
tall chimneys, cavity walls, thresholds, culverts, steps, floors, arches etc.
The strength of brick masonry works depends upon the quality of bricks
and type of mortar used.
Generally mortars are following types used for brick masonry
(i) Mud mortar
(ii) Cement mortar
(iii) Cement lime mortar
(iv) Lime surkhe mortar
General principles in brick masonry construction:
1. A good brick masonry should utilize bricks, which are sound,

hard, well burnt and tough with uniform colour, shape and size.
2. The bricks should be compact, homogenious, free form holes,

cracks, flaws, air-bubbles and stone lumps and soaked in water
for atleast two hours before use
3. In the brickwork, the bricks should be laid on their beds with the
frogs pointing upwards
4. The brick courses should be laid truly horizontal and should have
truly vertical joints
5. As far as possible the use of brick – bats should be discouraged
6. As far as possible the brick wall should be raised uniformly less

than 1.5m in day with proper bond.
7. When the mortar is green the face joints should be racked to a

depth of 12 to 19mm in order to have a proper key for plastering
or pointing.
8. In order to ensure continuous bond between the old and the new,
the wall should be stopped with a toothed end.
9. Finished brickwork should be cured for a period of 2 to 3 weeks

for lime mortar and 1 to 2 weeks for cement mortar
10. In order to carryout the brickwork at higher level, a single

scaffolding is used.
11.6 Types of brick bonds:
Bonding is a process of arranging bricks and mortars to tie them

together in a mass of brickwork. It should have a minimum of vertical
joints in any part of the work.
Characteristics of brick bond or rules for bonding:
1. The brick masonry should have bricks of uniform shape and size
Masonry Page 175
2. For satisfactory bondage the lap should be one-fourth of the brick

along the length of the wall and half brick across thickness of the
wall
3. The brick bats use should be discouraged
4. The vertical joints in the alternate courses should coincides with

the centre line of the stretcher
5. The alternate courses the centre line of header should coincide

with the centre line of stretcher, in course below or above it.
6. The stretcher should be used only in the facing while hearting

should be done in the headers only
Classifications of bonds: The bonds can be classified as follows:
(i) Stretcher bond
(ii) Header bond
(iii) English bond
(iv) Double Flemish bond
(v) Single Flemish bond
(vi) Garden wall bond
(vii) Facing bond
(viii) Dutch bond
(ix) Raking bond
(x) Zigzag bond

(xi) English cross bond
(xii) Bonds in columns
(xiii) Brick on edge bond or soldier course
(xiv) Bonds at junction and squint junction
Stretcher bond: In this type of bond all the bricks are laid with their
lengths in the direction of the wall. This pattern is used only for wall
having thickness of 9cm only as shown in fig 11.14.
Fig 11.14 Stretcher Bond

Header bond: In this type of bond all the bricks are laid with their ends
towards the face of the wall. This arrangement is suitable for one
brickwall of curved wall and footings for better load distribution as
shown in fig 11.15.
Fig 11.15 Header Bond

Masonry Page 177
English bond: In this type of bond alternate course of headers and

stretchers are laid. It is necessary to place queen closer in the heading
course for breaking the joints vertically. The different english bonds are
as shown in fig 11.16 and 11.17.
Fig 11.16 English Bond

Fig 11.17 Alternate arrangements for various

wall thicknessess in English Bond
Double Flemish bond: In this type, alternate heads and stretchers
are laid in each course. The facing and backing are of the same
Masonry Page 179
appearance brickbats and queen closers are used. The double

Flemish bond is as shown in fig 11.18.
Fig 11.18 Double Flemish Bond
Single Flemish bond: This type of bond is comprised of double

Flemish bond facing and English bond backing in each course. This
type of construction partially possesses the strength of English
bond, and appearance of Flemish bond. As this type of bond
requires minimum thickness of 1 ½ bricks so it cannot be used for
walls having thickness less than 1½ bricks. The fig 11.19 shows
the single Flemish bond.
Fig 11.19 Single Flemish Bond

Garden wall bond: This type of bond is employed for the
construction of garden walls, compound walls, boundary walls etc.
This wall bond can be both English as well as Flemish as shown in
the fig 11.20 & 11.21.
Masonry Page 181
Fig 11.20 English Garden Wall Bond
Fig 11.21 Flemish Garden Wall Bond

Facing bond: In this type of bond bricks of different thickness are
used in the facing and backing of the wall. In this case, a header
course is placed after several stretcher courses. In this type of bond,
the distance between the successive heading courses is equal to
common multiple of thickness of backing and facing bricks.
Dutch bond: This is the modified form of English bond. The
corners of the wall provided with dutch bond are quite strong. The
alternate courses in this type of bond are headers and stretchers. In
stretcher course ¾ bat is used as quoin. A header is placed next to
the ¾ bat in every alternate stretcher course as shown in the fig
11.22.
Fig 11.22 Dutch Bond

Raking bond: In this type of bond alternate courses are placed in
different directions to get maximum strength in the wall. The
racking courses are laid to certain interval along the height of the
wall in very thick wall having number of headers more than the no.
Masonry Page 183
of stretchers between the facing and backing. Thus the raking

course rectifies the defect of low longitudinal, stiffness in thick
wall. This is of two types a. Herring bone bond (placed at 450 in
both direction) b. Diagonal bond as shown in fig 11.23.
Fig 11.23 Herring Bone Bond

Zigzag bond: This type of bond very much similar to herring bone
bond. The only difference is that bricks are laid in zigzag way and
used for paving the brick floor as shown in fig 11.24
Fig 11.24 Zigzag Bond
English cross bond: This type of bond is aesthetically more sound
and posses greater strength than English bond. In this bond every
alternate stretcher course has a header placed next to the quolin
stretcher and rest of the details are similar to English bond as
shown in fig 11.25

Masonry Page 185
Fig 11.25 English Cross Bond

Brick on edge bond or soldier course: In this type of bond, the
bricks are laid on edge. The bricks are placed as headers and
stretchers in alternate courses in such a manner that headers are
placed on bed and the stretchers are placed an edge forming a
continuous cavity. This bond is weak in strength but economical.
Bonds in columns: Generally English bond or double Flemish bond
are used for column construction. In case of circular or octagonal
construction moulded bricks are used. The various arrangements of
bricks in different columns shapes are as shown in fig 11.26.

fig 11.26 Bonds in columns

Masonry Page 187
Fig 11.27 Columns in Double Flemish bond

Bonds at junction: When two walls meet or intersect each other,
the meeting point is known as junction
(i) For tee junction- English or double Flemish is used
as shown in fig 11.28.
Fig 11.28 Bonds in Tee-Junction

Masonry Page 189
(ii) For cross junctions – English bond is used as shown in fig. 11.29
Fig 11.29 Cross Junctions in english bond
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. Masonry is art of construction in which buildings units bricks,

stones etc are arranged systematically and binded with cement
& sand mixture
2. The masonry is classified as
(i) Stone masonry
(ii) Brick masonry
(iii)Hallow Masonry
(iv)Re-forced masonry
(v) Composite Masonry
3. The stone masonry is useful for foundations, dams, walls,
piers, columns, arches, domes, lintels, beams, roofs, floors,
railway ballest, black boards and electrical switch boards
4. Stone masonry is divided
(i) Rubble masonry
(ii) Ashlar masonry
5. The brick masonry is a unified mass obtained by systematically
arrangement of laying brick and bonded together with mortar.
6. The brick mortar generally the following types
(i) Mud mortar
(ii) Cement mortar
(iii)Cement lime mortar
(iv)Lime surkhi mortar
7. Bonding is a process of arranging bricks and mortars to tie
them together in a mass of brickwork
Masonry Page 191
8. The bonds can be classified as

(i) Stretcher bond
(ii) Header bond
(iii) English bond
(iv) Double flemish bond
(v) Single flemish bond
(vi) Garden wall bond
(vii) Faving bond
(viii) Dutch bond
(ix) Raking bond
(x) Zig zag bond
(xi) English cross bond
(xii) Bonds in columns
(xiii) Brick on edge bond or soldier course
(xiv) Bonds at junction and squint junction
1.What is masonry?
2.Name the types of masonry
3.Define the following
a. Strecher
b. Quoins
c. Queen closer
d. King closer
e. Frog
f. Sill
4.Define stone masonry
5.What are the uses of stone masonry?
6.Name the import stones used in the construction of stone masonry
7.What is the use of following tools in the construction of stone
masonry
a. Plumb rule
b. Spirit level
c. Line and pin
d. Bevel
e. Mallet
f. Chisel
g. Scabbling hammer
h. Jumper
i. Gauge
8.Define brick masonry
9.What are the uses of brick masonry
10. Name the important types of stone masonry
Masonry Page 193

1. What is stone masonry? Explain the uses of stone masonry
2. Explain the following with neat sketch a) king closer b) queen
closer.
3. What are factors to be considered for the selection of stone for
stone masoanry?
4. Explain different types of stones used for various purposes
5. Explain the types of tools and their uses for stone masonry
construction
6. What are the general principles adopted in the stone masonry
construction
7. Explain the types of stone masonry
8. Explain the types of brick masonry
9. What are principles adopted in brick masonry construction?
10. Compare the merits and demerits of stone masonry and brick
masonry.
* * *
CHAPTER – 12
FLOORS
In order to sub-divide the portion between the plinth level or basement

level and roof level, solid constructions are Carrie out. These
constructions are known as floors and exposed top surface of floors are
termed as floorings. Ground floors or basement floors, which directly
rest on the ground, do not require the provision of a floor. But they are
provided with suitable type of flooring.
12.1 Types of Floors:

Floors are classified into two categories
1. Timber Floors
2. Composite Floors
1. Timber Floors: In this floor, only timber is used as a material.

Timber floors are further divided into four types.
a. Basement or Ground floor of timber
b. Single Joist timber beam
c. Double Joist timber beam
d. Framed triple joist timber floor.
Features of Timber Floors:

(i) Floor Boards: These boards are provided at the top of bridging joists
and they form the wearing surface of the floor. The width varies from
100mm to 200mm and thickness varies from 20mm to 40mm. the
Floors Page 195
thickness may be changes when a floor subject to heavy traffic from 60

to 80mm. The floor boards are joined and widened by any suitable joint
as shown in the figure.12.1
Fig 12.1 Pugging

(ii) Floor Ceilings: To make the underside of the floor flat and to
improve the appearance as a whole, ceilings may be provided rest on
bridging joists or binders. The ceilings may consists of plaster boards or
sheets of asbestors cement or some suitable material. In order to make
ceilings strong and durable, ceiling joists may be provided at right angles
to the bridging joists or the binders.
(i) Pugging: In order to make the timber floor sound proof,
pugging may be resorted. Pugging plaster is a mixture of
chopped straw and mortar. Insulating boards supporting on
fillets are provided and hallows space between the
floorboards and the insulating boards is filled up with the
pugging plaster.
(ii) Trimming: When openings are to be provided in wooden
floors, it is clear that bridging joists will not rest on the walls.
In such cases, the process of trimming is required. Trimming
joists support one or two trimmer joists to which trimmed
joists are fixed. The trimming joists and trimmer joists have
slightly greater section than bridging joists Fig. 12.2 shows a
wooden floor with stair well.
(iii) Use of stell sections: Binders and girders of wooden floor can
be replaced by mild rolled steel joists. The only precaution to
be taken in this case would be to encase the R.S.J. by
concrete so as to prevent rusting of R.S.J. The use of steel
section makes the floor light and economical.
a) Basement or ground floor of timber:
In auditorium, to carry out dances or dramas timber floors are
constructed on ground floor. Sleeper walls, which may be of
one-half brick or one brick thickness, are constructed at
centre to centre distance of 1.20m to 1.80m. Wall-plates are
provided along the wall as well as along the sleeper walls and
they reduce the spans of the building joists and serve as end
supports for the bridging joists. On wall-plates rest the ends
of bridging joists, which are usually provided at a centre to
centre distance of about 30 cm. Finally, floor boards are
provided to finish up the floor. The details are as shown in fig
12.2.
Floors Page 197
Fig 12.2. Basement or ground floor of timber

b) Single Joist timber floor:
These floors consist of single joist, which are placed below
the floorboards. The joists are usually placed at a centre to
centre distance of 30cm to 45cm. The joists are supported on
wall-plates at their ends. A space of about 50mm is kept for
the circulation of air as shown in fig 12.3. Single joist timber
floor can be adopted for a maximum span of about 3.6m.
When the span of joist exceeds 2.4m, it becomes necessary to
strengthen the joist by providing bearing bone strutting. In
this arrangement, inclined timber pieces are firmly fixed
between the joists and the ends of these struts are nailed to the
joist. At the end, wedges are provided between the wall and
the joists.
Fig 12.3 Details of single joist timber floor

c) Double joist timber floors:
In this type of floors, intermediate supports known as binders,
are provided for bridging joists. Binders are generally placed
at a centre to centre distance of 1.80m to 2.40m as shown in
fig 12.4. The ends of binders rest on wooden or stone blocks.
Double joist timber floors are stronger than the single joist
timber floors. They prevent the passage of sound in better
way and they are suitable for spans of 3.60 to 7.50m. This
type of floors has following disadvantages.
(i) The weight of floor is thrown on few points in a wall.
(ii) Depth of floor is increased by the use of binders and
accordingly height of the room is decreased.
Floors Page 199
Fig 12.4
d) Framed or triple joist timber floor:
In this type of floors, intermediate supports, known as girders,
are provided for the binders. Thus, this type of floor consists
of girders, binders, bridging joists and floor boards as shown
in fig 12.5. Girders are generally placed at a centre to centre
distance of 3 metres. Binders are staggered and connected to
girders by tusk and tenon joints. Alternatively, the ends of
binders are supported on the iron stirrups, which are fixed to
the girders. The ends of girders rest on walls on stone or
concrete templates. This type of timber floor is suitable for
spans greater than 7.50.
Fig 12.5 Details of framed timber floors
II Composite Floors:
Floors composed of more than one material are known as
composite floors and they found to possess the following
advantages.
(i) Resist fire and sound in better way than timber floors
(ii) Better hygienic because can be easily cleaned
(iii) Adopted for greater spans.
Floors Page 201
The following are the types of composite floors

(a) Double flag stone floors
(b) Filler Joists floors
(c) Jack arch floor
(d) R.C.C. floors
(e) Hallow block and rib floors
a) Double flagstone floors:
In this type of floors, flagstones are used in two layers as
shown in fig 12.6. If span is about 4m, only rolled steel joists
are provided and span exceeds 4m, a framework consists of
rolled steel beams and joists is formed. Steel beams are
placed at a distance of about 3m centre to centre and joists are
placed at right angles to beams. Flagstones of about 40mm
thickness and of suitable width are fixed on the lower flanges
and upper flanges. The joints of top layer of flagstones are
finished in a better way to give a nice appearance. Filling of
selected earth or concrete is done in the space between the
two layers of the flagstones.
Fig 12.6 Double Flagstone floor

b) Filler Joist floors:
In this type of floors, small sections of rolled steel joists are
placed in concrete, this joists may either rest on wall or on
steel beam as shown fig 12.7. The joists act as a reinforced
and are spaced at a centre to centre distance of 60cm to 90cm.
Concrete should completely surround the rolled steel / joists
and beams.
Fig 12.7 Filler Joist Floor

c) Jack arch floors:
In this type of floor, brick arches or cement concrete arches
are constructed and these arches rest on the lower flanges of
mild steel joists. The joists in turn rest either on wall or on
beam. The joists are placed at a distance of about 80cm to
120cm center to center. The rise of arch should be 10cm to
20cm. and the minimum depth of concrete at the crown
should be 15cm. The only disadvantage of this floor is that it
does not give plain ceiling surface as shown in the fig 12.8. (a
& b)
Floors Page 203
Fig 12.8 (a) Brick Jack arch floor
Fig 12.8 (b) Concrete jack floor

d) R.C.C Floor: In this type of floors steel bars and concrete

are used to form a floor. This type of floor is widely used in
modern construction. The slab and beam are designed as per
loading coming on the floor and proper reinforcement is
placed at a suitable place. In case of R.C.C. slab thickness
varies from 80mm to 150mm and the main reinforcement is
generally in the form of mild steel bars of diameter varying
from 9mm to 12mm as shown in the fig. 12.9.
Fig 12.9 R.C.C. Floor

The reinforced concrete may be cast-in-situ or pre-cast, the former
being very common. R.C.C. floors are less costly, durable, easy to
construct and fire-proof. However, they are likely to transmit sound.
In any case R.C.C. floors are fast replacing other types of floors.
e) Hallow Block and Rib Floors: In this type of floors, hallow

blocks of clay or concrete are used to reduce the total weight
of the floor. In one form, the blocks are placed 10cm apart
and in this space, mild steel bars are placed as shown in the
Floors Page 205
fig 12.10.A minimum cover of 80mm is kept at the top.

Suitable flooring at the top and sealing finish are provided.
The blocks are provided with rough or grooved surface so
that they can develop enough bond with the concrete. This
type of floor is economical, fire proof, sound proof and light
in weight. If properly designed, this type of floor can even be
used to carry heavy loads.
Fig 12.10 Hallow Block and Rib floor
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. In order to sub-divide the portion between the plinth level or

basement level and roof level, solid constructions are known as
floors.
2. The floors are classified into
(i) Timber floors
(ii) Composite floors
3. The timber floors are divided into
(i) Basement or ground floor of timber
(ii) Single joist timber beam
(iii)Double joist timber beam
(iv)Framed or triple joist timber beam
4. The composite floors are the following
(i) Double flag stone floors
(ii) Filler joists floors
(iii)Jack arch floor
(iv)R.C.C. floors
(v) Hallow block or rib floors
Floors Page 207

1. Define floor
2. What are the types of floors?
3. Name the types of timber floors
4. What are the advantages of composite floors?
5. Name the types of composite floors.

1. Explain different types of timber floors briefly
a) double flag stone floors
b) jack arch floors
3. Explain the construction of composite floors briefly
a) R.C.C. floor
b) Hollow block and rab floors
* * *
CHAPTER – 13
ROOFS
A roof is defined as the uppermost part of a building which is

constructed in the form of a frame work to given protection to the
building against rain, heat, snow, wind etc. A roof basically consists of
structural elements provided at the top of building for the support of roof
coverings.
Following are the requirements of well planned roof:
(i) It should be durable against the adverse effects of various
agencies such as wind, rain, sun etc.
(ii) It should grant the desirable insulation against sound and heat.
(iii) It should be structurally stable and sound, it should be capable of
taking the loads likely to come over it.
(iv) It should be well-drained
(v) It should have efficient water-proofing arrangement.
13.1 Types of roofs-Methods of construction:

The roofs classified into the following three categories;
(i) Pitched roofs
(ii) Flat roofs
(iii) Curved roofs
I. Pitched roofs: A sloping roof is known as pitched roof as
shown in the fig 13.1. The technical terms in connection with
the pitched roof are given below
Roofs Page 209
Fig 13.1 Building with pitched roof
(i) Barge Boards: Wooden planks or boards which are

fixed on the gable end of the roof
(ii) Battens: Thin strips of wood which are fixed on

rafters or ceiling to support the roof ceiling.
(iii) Cleats: Small blocks of wood which are fixed on truss

to prevent the sliding of purlins.
(iv) Dragon beam: The diagonal piece of wood which is

laid across the corner of the wall.
(v) Eaves: The lower edge of a roof which are resting
upon or projecting beyond the supporting walls are
known as eave as shown in the fig 13.2
(vi) Gable: The triangular upper part of a wall formed at

the end of a pitched roof is known as gable.
(vii) Hip: The angle formed at the intersection of two roof

slopes is known as hip.
(viii) Pitch: The inclination of sides of a roof to the

horizontal plane is known as pitch, expressed in
degrees or as a ratio of rise to span.
(ix) Purlins: The wooden pieces which are placed

horizontally on principal rafters to carry the common
rafters are known as purlins.
(x) Rafters: There are the pieces of timber which extend

from the caves to the ridge
a) Common rafters: These are the intermediate

rafters, which give support to the roof coverings
a shown in the fig 13.2.
b) Hip rafters: Which provided at the junction of

two roof slopes
c) Jack rafters: Any rafters, which is shorter than

common rafters is known as Jack Rafters.
d) Principal rafters: These are the inclined

members of a truss
Roofs Page 211
(xi) Ridge: A wooden piece provided at the ridge line of a

sloping roof is known as ridge or ridge board or ridge
piece
(xii) Span: The horizontal distance between the internal
faces of walls or supports is known as span or clear
span.
(xiii) Template: A bidding block generally provided at the
end of a truss. This block is known as template and it
helps in spreading load over a large area. A template
may be of wood or stone or R.C.C.
(xiv) Verge: The edge of a gable, running between the
caves and ridge is known as a verge
(xv) Valley: When two roof surfaces meet together and
form an internal angle, a valley is formed
(xvi) Wall-plate: These are long wooden members which
are embedded on top of walls to receive the common
rafters
Fig 13.2 Truss

Types of pitched roofs:
(i) Single roof
(ii) Double or purlin roof
(iii) Trussed roofs
(i) Single roof: In this type of roofs, common rafters are provided to
each slope without any intermediate support. The following are
the varieties of single roof.
a) Lean to roof
b) Couple roof
c) Couple close roof
d) Collar beam roof
a) Lean to roof: It is the simplest form of a pitched roof and it is

known as pent roof or Aisle roof. In this type of roof, one wall is
carried up sufficiently higher than the other to give necessary slope
to the roof. A lean-to roof is generally used for sheds, out-houses
attached to main buildings verandah etc. This is suitable for a
maximum span of 2.40m as shown in fig 13.3.
Roofs Page 213
Fig 13.3 Lean-to roof

b) Couple roof: In this type of roof the common rafters slope
upwards from the opposite walls and they meet on a ridge piece in
the middle as shown in the fig 13.4. A couple roof is suitable for
spans upto about 3.6m.
Fig 13.4 Couple roof

c) Couple close roof: This roof is just similar to couple roof except
that the legs of the common rafters are connected by a tie beam as
shown in the fig 13.5. The tie beam prevents the tendency of rafters
to spread out and thus danger of overturning of the walls is
avoided. This roof can be adopted economically upto the span of
4.2m.
Fig 13.5 Couple close roof
d) Collar beam roof: The tie beam is raised and placed at a higher
level as shown in fig 13.6 known as collar or collar beam. This
beam roof is adopted to economise the space and to increase the
height of a room. This roof can be adopted upto a maximum span
of 4.8m.
Roofs Page 215
Fig 13.6 Collar beam roof
(i) Double or purlin roofs: When the span exceeds 2.4m, the
necessary size for the rafters becomes uneconomical. Hence in
order to reduce the size of rafters, intermediate supports called
purlins are introduced under the rafters as shown in fig 13.7. This
roof can be adopted economically upto 4.8m.
Fig 13.7 Double or Purlin roof

(ii) Trussed roofs: When the span exceeds 4.8m and when there are
no inside supporting walls or partitions for purlins, framed
structure known as trusses are on the roof, position of cross walls,
span and material of the truss. The spacing is 3m for wooden
trusses. Trusses carry the ridge piece and purlins on which the
common rafters rest. Some of the usual forms of roof truss are
given below.
a) King-post truss
b) Queen post truss
c) Mansard truss
d) Truncated truss
e) Bel-fast truss
f) Steel trusses
g) Composite trusses
a) King post truss: In this type of truss, the central post known
as king-post forms support for the tie beam. The inclined
members, known as structs, prevents the principal rafters
from bending in the middle. A king-post truss suitable for
roofs of span varying from 5 to 8 m as shown in fig 13.8.

Roofs Page 217
Fig 13.8 King post truss roof

b) Queen post truss: This truss is differ from a king-post truss
in having two vertical members known as queen posts. The
upper ends of the queen posts are kept in position by means
of a horizontal member known as straining beam. Additional
purlins are supported on the queen posts. A queen post truss
is suitable for roof spans varying 8 to 12 m as shown in fig
13.9.
fig 13.9 Queen post truss
c) Mansard truss: this is a combination of king post and queen
post trusses. Lower queen post & upper king post trusses. Use
of mansard trusses results in the economy of space and room
may be provided in the room as shown in the fig 13.10.

Roofs Page 219
Fig 13.10 Mansard truss

d) Truncated truss: This is similar to mansard except that the
top is finished flat as shown in fig 13.11.
Fig 13.11 Truncated truss

e) Steel trusses: For spans greater 12m, it becomes economical
to use steel trusses. For smaller spans, steel trusses consists of
angles riveted or welded together through plates known as
gusset plates. As steel resists both compression and tension
stresses, the design of steel truss is simplified various types of
steel trusses are shown in fig 13.12.
Roofs Page 221
Fig 13.12 Steel trusses

f) Composite stress: This truss composed of wooden members
and steel. Steel members resists tension. A composite truss is
light and economical as shown in the fig 13.13.
Roofs Page 223
Fig 13.13 Composite stress

The factors should be considered before selecting the type of roof
covering for pitched roof
(i) Climate of the locality
(ii) Nature of the building
(iii)Initial cost and maintaince cost
(iv)Resistance to fire and heat
(v) Special features of the locality.
II Flat Roofs: A roof which is nearly flat is known as flat roof. It

should be noted that no roof can be laid perfectly level. The roof
must slope in one direction or the other to cause rain water to
flow off rapidly and easily. The construction of flat roof is same
as that of floors except that the top surface is made slightly.
Sloping in case of flat roofs. The types of flat roofs commonly
used are
1. Madras terrace roof
2. Bengal terrace roof
1. Madras Terrace Roof:
Procedure of construction:
1. Teak wood joists are placed on rolled steel joists with a furring
piece between the joists and rolled steel joists. The furring is
placed sloping and gives necessary slope to the flat roof
2. A course of specially prepared terrace bricks of 150x75x25mm

is laid diagonally across the joists with lime mortar
3. After the brick course, has set, a course of brick bat concrete of
75mm thick with 3 parts of brick bats, one part of gravel and
sand and 50 percent of lime mortar by volume is laid.
4. The concrete is well rammed for three days and allowed to set
5. Flat tiles are laid over the layer of concrete of thickness 50mm
6. Finally, the surface of roof is finished with three coats of

plaster given a slope of 1 in 30.
7. As this type of flat roof is widely used in madras state, it is

known as madras terrace roof as shown in fig 13.14.
Roofs Page 225
Fig 13.14 Madras Terrace Roof

2. Bengal terrace roof:
Procedure of construction:
1. Rafters are placed, with a slight inclination, at 30cm to 50cm
c/c. one end of the rafters is inserted into the main wall to a
depth of 20cm and its other end is supported on a verandah
wall.
2. Battens are placed at right angles to the rafters at a centre to
centre distance of about 15cm
3. A course of flat tiles is then laid in mortar over the battens.
4. Finally, the surface of the roof is finished in any one of the
following methods
(i) Two or more courses of flat tiles may be laid and the
surface of roof is rubbed and polished with two or
three coats of plaster
(ii) A layer of jelly concrete of 40mm thick may be laid
over the first course of files. On this layer of
concrete, another course of flat tiles is laid and the
surface of roof is rubbed and polished with two or
three coats of plaster
5. As this type of roof is mainly used in Bengal state to cover
verandahs, it is known as Bengal Terrace roof as shown in fig
13.15.
Fig 13.15 Bengal Terrace roof

Advantages of flat roofs:
(i) The construction of roof is simplified
(ii) It is easier to make a flat roof fire-proof than a
sloping roof
Roofs Page 227
(iii) The roof are can be utilized as roof garden, dryling

yards and conveniently be used for sleeping in hot
season.
(iv) The construction of work of upper floors can be
easily started where as pitched roof, the entire roof
is to removed and is to be replaced by a new floor
under such circumstances
(v) Flat roofs is found to be economical than pitched
roof.
Disadvantages
1) Flat roofs cannot be used for long spans without introduction of
intermediate pillars and beams
2) Cracks are developed on the surface of the roof due to the
variation in temperature
3) Pockets of water are formed on the surface of the roof if slope is
not sufficient and leads to leakage of roof
4) Flat roofs are not suitable, where rainfall is heavy
5) The dead weight of flat roof is considered and hence it proves to
be more expensive, Initial cost is higher than pitched roof.
III Curved roofs: These are the just the modifications of pitched
roofs and are frequently employed in modern age to cover large
areas shed/roofs and domes are the varieties of curved roofs.
They are useful for big structures such as factories, monumental
works etc curved roofs may be constructed of timber or R.C.C.
the latter material being very common now-a-days. They are two
common forms of a shell roof
i) A north-light shell roof
ii) A barrel vault shell roof are as shown in fig
13.16 & 13.17
Fig 13.16 North-light shell roof
Fig 13.17 Barrel vault shell roof

A dome is a round vault forming a roof. It is useful when roof is to
be provided on circular brick work or regular polygon shaped walls .
Roofs Page 229
Curved roofs afford pleasing appearance and due to arch action, the
stresses are considerably reduced which results in thin sections for a
curved roof.
Procedure of construction
(i) Pre-cast units of cement concrete tilis of size 70 x 70cm with
a uniform minimum thickness of 20mm in the form of domes
with a rise of about 50mm are used
(ii) Pre-cast units of R.C.C. 1:2:4 beams are prepared as per
design usually 90mm deep and 130mm wide as per design
usually 90mm deep and 130mm wide
(iii) The beams are suitably laid across the supporting walls
(iv) The tiles are placed in position after spreading some mortar
on the edges of beams. The minimum bearing of tiles on
beams should be 25mm and that on walls should be 50mm to
70mm
(v) The haunches between the humps of tiles are filled up with
cement concrete of proportion 1:2:4
(vi) Suitable water-proofing treatment to the roof is given at the
top. The roof thus exhibits a flat surface at the top and curved
surface at bottom.
Advantages
1. It can be constructed in short time
2. It does not require skilled supervision
3. It is cheap in construction
4. It requires less frame work
* * *
SYNOPYSIS
1. A roof is defined as uppermost part of a building which is
constructed in the form of a frame work to give protection to the
building against rain, heat, snow, wind etc
2. A well planed roof requires following requirements
(i) Durable against adverse effects
(ii) Insulation against sound and heat
(iii) Stable
(iv) Well drained
(v) Efficient water-proofing
3. The types of roofs are
(i) Pitched roofs
(ii) Flat roofs
(iii) Curved roofs
4. A sloping roof is known as pitched roof are the following types
(i) Single roof
(ii) Double or purlin roof
(iii) Trussed roof
5. A single roof common rafters are provided to each slope without any
intermediate support is the following types.
(i) Lean to roof
(ii) Couple roof
(iii) Couple close roof
(iv) Collar beam roof
6. When the span exceeds 2.4m, intermediate supports called purlins
are provided in double or purlin roof upto 4.8m.
Roofs Page 231
7. When the span exceeds 4.8m and when there are no inside supporting
walls or partitions for purlins, framed structure known as truss of
following types
(i) King post truss
(ii) Queen post truss
(iii) Truncated truss
(iv) Be-fast truss
(v) Steel truss
(vi) Composite truss
8. A roof which is nearly flat is known as flat roof commonly used flat
roofs are
(i) Madras terrace roof
(ii) Bengal terrace roof
9. Curved roof are the just modified of pitched roofs to cover large
areas
Ex: shell roofs, dome roofs.

1. Define roof.
2. What are the categories of roof?
3. Define common rafter.
4. What are the types of pitched roofs?
5. What are the advantages of flat roofs?
6. What are the advantages of curved roof?
7. Name the different types of single roofs.
8. What are the types of trussed roofs?
9. What is king post and queen post trusses?

1. What are the requirements of a well planned roof?
2. Explain the classification of roofs briefly.
3. Explain types of single roofs.
4. Explain king post and queen post truss.
5. Explain the construction of flat roof of madras terrace roof
6. Explain the construction of flat roof of Bengal terrace roof.
7. Explain the advantages and disadvantages of flat roofs.
8. Explain briefly about curved roofs.
* * *
Damp Proof and Fire Proof Construction Page 233
CHAPTER 14
DAMP PROOF AND FIRE PROOF CONSTRUCTION
Damp prevention and fire protection are the chief requirements to

ensure the safety of buildings against dampness and fire respectively.
The sources, effects, techniques and methods of damp prevention,
materials used for damp-proofing (D.P.C) damp-proofing treatments in
buildings, treatment of dampness are discussed under damp proof
chapter.
14.1 Sources of dampness(causes)
Dampness in building in generally due to one or more of the

following causes
(i) Faulty design of structure
(ii) Faulty construction or poor workmanship
(iii) Use of poor materials in construction
These cause give rise to an easy access to moisture to enter the

building from different points, such as rising of moisture from
ground, rain penetration through walls, roofs and floors etc. The
moisture entering the building from foundation and roofs, travels
in different directions further under the effects of capillary action
and gravity respectively. The entry of water and its movements,
in different parts of the building are positively due to the one or
more of the causes listed above.
14.2 Effects of dampness:
The various effects caused due to dampness in buildings mainly

results in poor functional performance, ugly appearance and
structural weakness of the buildings.
1. A damp building creates unhealthy living and working conditions

for the occupants
2. Presence of damp condition causes efflorescence on building

surfaces which ultimately results in the disintegration of bricks
stones, tiles etc and hence reduction of strength
3. It may result in softening and crumbling of plaster
4. It may cause bleaching and flaking of the paint which results in

the formation of coloured patches on the wall surfaces and
ceilings
5. It may result in the corrosion of metals used in the construction of

buildings
6. The materials used as floor coverings such as tiles are damaged

because they lose adhesion with the floor bases
7. Timber when in contact with damp condition, gets deteriorated

due to the effect of warping, buckling and rolling of timber
8. All the electrical fittings gets deteriorated, causing leakage of

electric current with the potential danger of a short circuit
9. Dampness promotes the growth of termites and hence creates

unhygienic conditions in buildings
10. Dampness when accompanied by the warmth and darkness,

breeds the germs of tuberculosis, neuralgia, aute and chronis
neumatism etc which some times result in fatal diseases
14.3 Techniques and methods of damp prevention:
The following are the precautions to be taken to prevent

dampness in buildings, before applying the various techniques.
1. The site should be located on high ground and well drained

soil to safe guard against foundation dampness
2. All the exposed walls should be of sufficient thickness to

safeguard against rain protection (minimum 30cm)
3. Bricks of superior quality free from defects should be used
4. Good quality cement mortar (1:3) should be used to produce

definite pattern and perfect bond in the building
5. Cornices and string courses should be provided to through

rain water away from the walls
6. All the exposed surfaces like top of walls, compound walls

etc should be covered with water proofing cement plaster
7. Cavity walls are more reliable than solid walls in preventing

the dampness
Techniques:
1. Use of damp proof courses
2. Water proof or damp proof treatments
3. Cavity walls or hallow walls

4. Guniting or shot concrete or shotcrete
5. Pressure grouting or cementation
1. Use of damp-proof courses (D.P.C.)
These are layers or membranes of water repellent materials such

as bituminuous felts, mastic asphalt, plastic sheets, cement
concrete, mortar, metal sheets, stones etc which are interposed in
the building structure at all locations wherever water entry is
anticipated or suspected. The best location or position of D.P.C.
in the case of building without basement lies at plinth level or
structures without any plinth level, it should be laid at least 15cm
above ground level. The damp proof course provided horizontally
and vertically in floors, walls etc. In the case of basements, laying
of D.P.C. is known as taking Fig 14.1 shows the D.P.C. treatment
above ground level.
Fig 14.1 D.P.C. above ground level for new buildings
2. Water proof surface treatments: The surface treatment consists

in filing up the pores of the material exposed to moisture by
providing a thin film of water repellent material over the surface

(internal / external ) . External treatment is effective in preventing
dampness
Many surface treatments, like pointing, plastering, painting,

distempering etc are given to the exposed surfaces and also to the
internal surface . The most commonly used treatment to protect
the walls against dampness is lime cement plaster (1:6) (1-
cement, 6-lime) mix proportion. Generally employed as water
proofing agent in surface treatments are sodium or potassium
silicate. Aluminium or zinc sulphate, Barium Hydroxide and
magnesium sulphate in alternate applications. Soft soap and alum
also in alternate applications, unie and unseed oil; coal tar,
bitumen, waxes and fats; resins and gums
Waxes and fats are not suitable in tropics as they melt with
rise in temperatures
3. Integral damp-proofing treatments :
The integral treatment consists of adding certain compounds to

the concrete or mortar during the process of mixing, which when
used in construction acts as barriers to moisture penetration under
different principles
i) Compounds like chalk, talc, fallers earth etc have

mechanical action principle (i.e.,) they fill the pores
present in the concrete or mortar and make them
dense and water proof
ii) Compounds like denser and water proof sulphates,
calcium chlorides etc work on chemical action
principle (i.e.) they react chemically and fill the pores
to act as water-resistant
iii) The compounds like soaps, petroleum, oils fatty

acids compounds such as sterates of calcium, sodium
ammonium etc work on the repulsion principle i.e.,
they are used as admixture in concrete to react with it
and become water repellent
4. Cavity walls or hallow walls: A cavity wall consists of two

parallel walls or leaves or skins of masonary separated by a
continuous air space or cavity. The provision of continuous
cavity in the wall per effectively prevent the transmission or
percolation of dampness from outer walls or leaf to inner wall or
leaf. The following are the advantages of cavity wall.
(i) As there is no contact between outer and inner walls of

cavity wall, possibility of moisture penetration is reduced
to a minimum.
(ii) A cavity wall prevents the transmission of heat through

wall.
(iii) A cavity wall offer good insulation against sound.
(iv) The cavity wall tends to reduce the nuisance of

efflorescence.
(v) The cavity wall also provides benefits such as economy,

better comfort and hygienic conditions in buildings
The cavity wall construction and D.P.C. details for flat roofs is
as shown in fig no 14.2
Fig 14.2 Cavity wall construction and D.P.C. details for flat roofs
5. Guniting: (or shot concrete) : The technique of guniting

consists in forming an imperious layer of rich cement mortar
(1:3) or fine aggregate mix for water proofing over the exposed
concrete surface or over the pipes, cisterns etc for resisting the
water pressure. By this technique, an impervious layer of high
compressive strength (600 to 700 kg/cm2) is obtained and hence
this is also very useful for reconditioning or repairing old
concrete works
6. Pressure grouting or (cementation). The mixture of cement,

sand and water under pressure into the cracks, voids or fissures
present in the structural component or the ground. In general, the
foundations are given this treatment to avoid the moisture
penetration. This technique also used for repairing structures,
consolidating ground to improve bearing capacity, forming water
cut-offs to prevent seepage etc.
Fire protection:
It is defined as the protection of the occupants of the building,

contents and structure of the building and adjacent buildings from the
risks of fire and spread of fire. The objective is achieved by using fire-
resistive materials in the construction. By suitable planning of the
building internally and in relation to adjacent building internally and in
relation to adjacent building and by providing suitable means of quick
escape for the occupants. These measures are essential to minimize the
spread of fire and limit the total damage to a minimum
14.4 Important considerations in fire protection:
1. It should be the objective of every engineer and architect while

planning and designing the building that the structure offer
sufficient resistance against fire so as to afford protection to the
occupants, use of fire-resisting materials and construction
techniques and providing quick and safe means of escape in the
building.
2. All the structural elements such as floors, walls, columns, beams

etc should be made of fire resisting materials
3. The construction of structural elements such as walls, floors,

columns, lintels, arches etc should be made in such a way that
they should continue to function atleast for the time, which may
be sufficient for occupants to escape safely in times of fire.
4. The building should be so planned or oriented that the elements

of construction or building components can with stand fire for a
given time depending upon the size and use of building, to isolate
various compartments so as to minimize the spread of fire
suitable separation is necessary to prevent fire, gases, and smoke
from spreading rapidly through corridors, staircases left shafts
etc.
5. Adequate means of escape are provided for occupants to leave

the building quickly and safely in terms of outbreak of fire.
6. In multi-storeyed office buildings suitable equipment for

detecting, extinguishing and warning of fire should be installed in
the niches.
14.4 Fire-resistant construction:
National building code classifies the construction into four
classes, namely type 1, type 2, type 3 and type 4 on the basis of
fire-resistance offered by building components for 4-hours, 3-
hours, 2-hours and 1-hour respectively. To achieve the objective
of fire-resistance, due considerations should be made in design
and construction of the structural members and use of
combustible material should be avoided as far as possible in the
construction
a) Walls and columns
b) Floor and roofs
c) Wall openings
d) Building fire escape elements (i.e.,) stair, staircase,
corridors, entrances etc.
a) Walls and columns: The load-bearing non-load bearing
walls should be plastered with fire resistive mortar to improve
fire resistance. Normally 20cm thick common wall is
sufficient from fire resistance point of view. Bricks should be
preferred to stones if the construction is solid bearing wall. If
it happens to be a framed structure then R.C.C. frames are
preferred to those of steel frame. Partition walls, should also
be fire resistant materials. In case of wooden partitions are
employed, they should be covered with metal lath and plaster.
Sufficient cover to R.C.C. members like beams or columns
should be to enable them to function satisfactorily, under the
fire maximum time. It has been recommended that a cover of
atleast 5cm inside the main reinforcement of structural
members, like columns, girders, trusses etc, 38mm for
ordinary beam, long span slabs, arches etc, 25mm for
partition walls, short spans should be provided. The fire

proofing treatments, which can possibly to concrete and steel
column construction are as shown in the fig 14.3.
Fig 14.3 Fire proofing treatments to concrete

and steel columns
b) Floors and roofs: The floors and roofs should be made of
fire-resisting material as they act as horizontal barriers to
spread of heat and fire in vertical direction. For fire-
resistant construction, the floor such as concrete jack arch
floor with steel joists embedded in concrete or hallow
tiled ribbed floor, R.C.C. floor etc should be used as
shown in fig. 14.4.
Fig 14.4 Fire-resisting in floors

c) Wall openings: From fire resistance point of view, firstly

the openings in the walls should be restricted to a
minimum and secondly they should be protected by
suitable arrangements in case of fire. These days, wire-
glass panels are preferred for windows, where as steel
rolling shutters are becoming popular for door ways and
window openings in garages, godowns, shops etc due to
their ability in preventing the spread of fire
d) Building fire escape element: Staircases, corridors,

Lobbies, entrances etc are the fire escape elements should
be constructed out of fire-resistant materials and be well
separated from the rest of the building. Doors to the
staircase, corridors and lefts should be made of fire-
proofing materials. Staircase should be created next to the
outerwalls and should be accessible from any floor in the
direction of flow towards the exits from the building.
14.5 General measures of fire safety in building:
In important buildings, in addition to the fire-resisting

materials and adopting fire resistant construction, the following
general measures of fire-safety have been recommended
(i) Alaram system
(ii) Fire extinguishing arrangements
(iii) Escape routes for public buildings

SYNOPYSIS
1. Damp prevention and fire protection are the chief requirements

to ensure the safety of buildings against dampness and fire
respectively
2. The sources of dampness are
(i) Faulty design of structure
(ii) Faulty construction or poor workmanship
(iii) Use of poor materials inc construction
3. The effects of dampness are
(i) Unhealthy living and working conditions for

occupants
(ii) Disintegration of bricks results decreasing in

strength
(iii) Crumbling of plaster
(iv) Formation of colour patches on the wall
(v) Corrosion of metals
(vi) Timber get deteriorated
(vii) Electrical fittings gets deteriorated causing short

circuit
(viii) Growth termites creates unhygienic conditions
4. The techniques used for damp roofing
(i) Use of damp proof courses

(ii) Water proof or damp proof treatments
(iii) Cavity wall or hallow walls
(iv) Gunitins or shot concrete
(v) Pressure grouting or cementation
5. Five protection is defined as the protection occupants of the

building, contents and structure of the building and adjacent
buildings from the risks of fire and spread of fire. This is
achieved by using fire resistive materials in the construction by
suitable planning
6. The general measures of fire safety in building are
(i) Alaram system
(ii) Fire extinguish arrangements
(iii) Escape routes for public buildings


1. Define damp prevention
2. What is D.P.C. ? Give examples.
3. What are the important sources of dampness?
4. Name any four effects of dampness
5. Name any four methods of preventing dampness
6. Define fire protection
7. What are the general methods of fire safety in buildings?
8. What are the properties of ideal fire resisting material?

1. Explain the sources of dampness.
2. Explain the effects of dampness.
3. Explain the methods of preventing dampness
4. Explain the fire-resisting properties of the following material
a. Timber
b. Stone
c. Bricks
d. Concrete
5. Explain fire-resistance construction
6. Explain the general measures of fire safety in buildings.
* * *

Class Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Building Construction

Question No. 100

Question No. 101

Question No. 102

Question No. 104

Question No. 105

Question No. 106

Question No. 107

Question No. 108

Question No. 109

Question No. 110

Question No. 111

Question No. 112

Question No. 113

Question No. 115

Question No. 116

Question No. 117

Question No. 118

Question No. 119

Question No. 120

Question No. 121

Question No. 122

Question No. 123

Question No. 124

Question No. 126

Question No. 127

Question No. 128

Question No. 129

Question No. 130

Question No. 131

Question No. 132

Question No. 133

Question No. 134

Question No. 135

Question No. 137

Question No. 138

Question No. 139

Question No. 140

Question No. 141

Question No. 142

Question No. 143

Question No. 144

Question No. 145

Question No. 146

Question No. 147

Question No. 148

Question No. 149

Question No. 150

Question No. 151

Question No. 153

Question No. 154

Question No. 155

Question No. 156

Question No. 157

Question No. 158

Question No. 159

Question No. 160

Question No. 161

Question No. 162

Question No. 163

Question No. 164

Question No. 165

Question No. 166

Question No. 167